Home

EN / ACS550-01/U1 User's Manual

Contents

1. 40 Panel REF1 P1101 Panel REF 2 1 51106 REF1 LO 17 JREF2 S E Panel REF2 sas PID Setpoint ps Al IP4016 G40 Current PIDA Satie Pole ri LOC REM ines selection AI P4017 P4014 P4015F LOC ZUM PID Act Value orque REM Power Panel REF 1 P1103 PTi02 DI G12 P1104 Kabag P1105 Al Speed Comm REF 1 EXT 2 Panel REF 2 4 D P1106 G12 H Const Al Speed Comm REF 2 P1106 Panel REF2 fP4010 PID Setpoint 0 17 P1107 E P4012 lt I p1108 Al2 P4013 19 Comm Internal G40 Al P4016 PID1 Current PID1 Out Torque Power p4014H P4015 Curre P4017 PID Act Value Torque Power Note In order to activate and use the PID controller parameter 1106 must be set to value 19 Parameters 146 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual PID controller Advanced The ACQ550 has two separate PID controllers Process PID PID1 and e External PID PID2 Process PID PID1 has 2 separate sets of parameters Process PID PID1 SET1 defined in Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 and Process PID PID1 SET2 defined in Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 You can select between the two different sets by using parameter 4027 Typically two different PID controller sets are used when the load of the motor changes considerably from one situation to anoth
2. x1 1 10 kohm 11 SCR Signal cable shield screen V1 Ip Alt External reference 1 0 10 V Hand Control Ko 3 AGND Analog input circuit common Wa MOV Reference voltage 10 V DC D 5 AI2 External reference 2 0 20 mA Auto Control 6 AGND Analog input circuit common DH H7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA D 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA y9 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start Stop Hand Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 Forward Reverse Hand Activation reverses rotation direction r 415 DI3 EXT1 EXT2 Selection Activation selects auto control 16 DI4 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 17 DI5 Forward Reverse Auto Activation reverses rotation direction 18 DIE Start Stop Auto Activation starts the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A p Default operation 21lRO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Note 1 23 RO2A Fx Default operation The sensor for AI2 is powered 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 externally See the manufacturer s 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable instructions To use sensors 26 RO3A A Default operation supplied by the drive aux voltage 27 ROSB Fault 1 2225 connected to 27 output see page 65 Fa
3. H Relay logic ACQ550 c LN iT Standard PFC mode PFC with Autochange mode The fourth auxiliary motor uses the same reference step low frequency and start frequency values as the third auxiliary motor Parameters 168 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description e The table below shows the ACQ550 PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 where the settings are either 231 PFC or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is disabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 Parameter setting ACQ550 Relay assignment 111 Autochange disabled As K4 RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 RO5 ROG 0 1 0 2 31 X 31 31 31 31 X 31 Aux X X X Aux Aux X X Aux Aux Aux X X ux X Aux Aux XX X X X A 31 31 1 Aux Aux X X X One additional relay output for the PFC that is in use One motor is in sleep when the other is rotating N N O N NAA X X X X UX A x 9 x x x x v gt XX X X X X PA x x x x x o a x x 2 2 Dona X gt lt gt lt X lt e The table below shows the ACQ550 PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 where the settings are either 31
4. 78 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User 3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 0 600 1 30 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 0 600 1 300 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 500 Hz 3717 LOAD TORQ Low 5 0 600 1 30 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 0 600 1 300 Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 4001 GAIN 0 1 100 0 0 1 1 0 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 3600 0 s 0 1 s 60 0 s 4003 DERIVATION TIME 0 0 10 0s 0 1s 0 0s 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 1 0s 4005 ERROR VALUE INV 03 NO 1 YES 1 O NO 4006 UNITS 0 127 1 4 96 4007 UNIT SCALE 0 4 1 1 4008 0 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 0 0 4007 4009 100 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 100 0 4007 4010 SET POINT SEL 0 2 8 17 19 20 1 1 Ai 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 40 0 4007 4012 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 0 4013 SETPOINT MAX 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 0 4014 FBK SEL 1 13 1 1 ACT1 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER 0 000 NOT SEL 32 768 32 767 0 001 0 000 NOT SEL 4016 ACT1 INPUT 1 7 1 2 A12 4017 ACT2 INPUT 1 7 1 2 A12 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4022 SLEEP SELECTION 6 7 1 O NOT SEL 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm
5. IEC NEC Based on Based on EN 60204 1 and IEC 60364 5 2 2001 NEC Table 310 16 for copper wires PVC insulation e 90 C 194 F wire insulation e 30 C 86 F ambient temperature e 40 C 104 F ambient temperature e 70 C 158 F surface temperature e not more than three current carrying cables with concentric copper shield conductors in raceway or cable or earth directly buried not more than nine cables laid on cable ladder R side by side copper cables with concentric copper shield Max load Cu cable Max load Al cable Max load Cu wire size current current current A mm A mm A AWG kcmil 14 3x1 5 Aluminium cable 22 8 14 cannot be used with 20 3x2 5 frame sizes R1 R5 273 12 27 3x4 because of its lower 36 4 10 capacity 34 3x6 50 1 8 47 3x10 68 3 6 62 3x16 86 5 4 79 3x25 100 3 98 3x35 91 3x50 118 2 119 3x50 117 3x70 137 1 153 3x70 143 3x95 155 1 0 186 3x95 165 3x120 178 2 0 215 3x120 191 3x150 205 3 0 249 3x150 218 3x185 237 4 0 284 3x185 257 3x240 264 250 MCM or 2 x 1 330 3x240 274 3x 3x50 291 300 MCM or 2 x 1 0 285 2x 3x95 319 350 MCM or 2 x 2 0 Technical data ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 255 Ground connections For personnel safety proper operation and reduction of electromagnetic emission pick up the drive and the motor must be grounded at the installation site e Conductors must be adequately sized as req
6. Type Normal use Heavy duty use Frame ACQ550 U1 bn Py Py bha Pha Pha size see below A kW hp A kW hp Three phase supply voltage 500 600 V 02A7 6 2 8 1 5 2 2 4 1 1 1 5 R2 03A9 6 4 0 2 2 3 2 7 1 5 2 R2 06A1 6 6 3 4 5 3 9 2 2 3 R2 09A0 6 9 3 5 5 7 5 6 1 4 5 R2 011A 6 12 0 7 5 10 9 0 5 5 K R2 017A 6 18 0 11 15 11 7 5 10 R2 022A 6 23 0 15 20 17 11 15 R3 027A 6 28 0 18 5 25 22 15 20 R3 032A 6 33 0 22 30 27 18 5 25 R4 041A 6 43 0 30 40 32 22 30 R4 052A 6 54 0 37 50 41 30 40 R4 062A 6 64 0 45 60 52 37 50 R4 077A 6 80 0 55 75 62 45 60 R6 099A 6 102 0 75 100 77 55 75 R6 125A 6 129 0 90 125 99 75 100 R6 144A 6 149 0 110 150 125 90 125 R6 00467918 xls C Symbols Typical ratings Normal use 10 overload capability lon continuous rms current 1096 overload is allowed for one minute in ten minutes PN typical motor power in normal use The kilowatt power ratings apply to most IEC 4 pole motors The horsepower ratings apply to most 4 pole NEMA motors Heavy duty use 50 overload capability lond continuous rms current 50 overload is allowed for one minute in ten minutes Pha typical motor power in heavy duty use The kilowatt power ratings apply to most IEC 4 pole motors The horsepower ratings apply to most 4 pole NEMA motors Sizing The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range To achieve the rated motor p
7. NG NG NA NN Nj Sn NN MEN HEN HIN RN 2H E E Optional braking Frame Terminal Brake options NANANA O i aja size labels R5 R6 UDC UDC e Braking unit Chopper and resistor UDC R UDC U2 V2 W2 A Q C GND Power input Power output to motor U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 WARNING To avoid danger or damage to the drive on IT systems and corner grounded TN systems see section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 23 Installation ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Disconnecting the internal EMC filter 23 On certain types of systems you must disconnect the internal EMC filter otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors which might cause danger or damage the drive Note When the internal EMC filter is disconnected the drive is not EMC compatible The following table shows the installation rules for the EMC filter screws in order to connect or disconnect the filter depending on the system type and the frame size For more information on the different system types see T systems on page 256 and Corner grounded TN systems on page 255 The locations of scre
8. 1 10 kohm41 SCR Signal cable shield screen TY 2 Al External speed reference 1 0 10 V Ko 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 Al2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common Dp 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA D 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA 149 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 112 DCOM Digital input common for all H 13 Dl1 Start fwd If DI1 state is the same as DI2 the drive stops 14 DI2 Start reverse 15 DI3 Constant speed selection I 116 DI4 Constant speed selection 17 DI5 Ramp pair selection Activation selects 2nd acc dec ramp pair L 7 118 DI6 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A Default operation 21 RO1B Es Ready gt 19 connected to 21 A paang D REM 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A FH Default operation DI3 Di4 Output 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 x Reference Oy 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable SONST SPEED 26 RO3A A Det otto 9 O 1 CONST SPEED 2 1203 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 1 CONST SPEED 3 1204 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference Al1 Analog output AO1 Speed J1 Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output AO2 Curren
9. a E J2 DIP switch bam for RS485 termination m NN Optional module 1 J2 J2 i gt gt gt X1 Communications py A 18 9 i RS485 A ON rT j gt pi THIN E m gt Optional module 2 off position on position Power input Power output to motor U1 V1 W1 4 U2 V2 W2 Frame sizes R5 R6 differ See next page 3AUA0000001571 Optional braking Frame Terminal size labels R1 R2 BRK BRK Brake resistor Brake options R3 R4 UDC UDC e Braking unit Chopper and resistor WARNING To avoid danger or damage to the drive on IT systems and corner grounded TN systems see section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 23 Installation 22 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual The following diagram shows the power and ground terminal layout for frame sizes R5 and R6 R5 f a a E4 ere E H GULO f pod pss pss 9S Hu u Power output to motor Power input U2 V2 W2 F1 U1 V1 W1
10. Code Description 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol Format XXYY where xx protocol ID and YY program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID Defines the node address of the RS485 link The node address on each unit must be unique 5303 EFB BAUD RATE Defines the communication speed of the RS485 link in kbits per second kb s 1 2 kb s 2 4 kb s 4 8 kb s 9 6 kb s 19 2 kb s 38 4 kb s 57 6 kb s 76 8 kb s 5304 EFB PARITY Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 link communication The same settings must be used in all on line stations O 8 NONE 1 8 data bits no parity one stop bit 1 8 NONE 2 8 data bits no parity two stop bits 2 8 EVEN 1 8 data bits even parity one stop bit 3 8 ODD 1 8 data bits odd parity one stop bit 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE Selects the communication profile used by the EFB protocol O ABB DRV LIM Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS400 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conforms to 32 bit DCU Profile 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS600 800 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES Contains a count of valid messages received by the drive During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error received by t
11. 49 fault mode 00 ee eee 231 232 parameter backup mode 49 control word ABB drives FBA description 220 EFB description 197 EBA Cibao natan NG naal wan dow andres 210 FBA generic profile 228 cooling air TOW a 3e pr LA haban mi 271 fan maintenance triggers 123 heat l ss iare eas a a selle 271 space requirement 271 corner grounded TN system 255 warning about filterS 6 warning about screws at EM1 EM3 21 warning about screws at F1 F2 22 correction source PID parameter 155 cover AMO Biar aa tetera nea LA 17 replace isa pte a ds 32 cover top see hood CRC errors count parameter 158 crimp on ringlugs l l 257 Index ACQ550 U1 User s Manual critical speeds avoiding parameter group 120 high parameters 120 low parameters aa 120 select parameter 120 C Tick marking a 279 current at fault history parameter 91 data parameter a 85 max limit parameter 110 measurement fault code 234 rating Ode 13 D date see time amp date eee eee 53 DC brake time parameter 114 bus voltage data parameter 85 current ref para
12. Wire size BEE mm mu Manufacturer Ring lug Miu ng E Burndy YAV6C L2 MY29 3 1 s lIsco CCL 6 38 ILC 10 2 Burndy YA4C L4BOX MY29 3 x i llsco CCL 4 38 MT 25 1 Burndy YA2C L4BOX MY29 3 2 35 2 lIsco CRC 2 IDT 12 1 lIsco CCL 2 38 MT 25 1 Burndy YA1C L4BOX MY29 3 2 llsco CRA 1 38 IDT 12 1 lIsco CCL 1 38 MT 25 1 Thomas amp Betts 54148 TBM 8 3 Burndy YA25 L4BOX MY29 3 2 po T lIsco CRB 0 IDT 12 1 llsco CCL 1 0 38 MT 25 1 Thomas amp Betts 54109 TBM 8 3 Technical data 258 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Wire size Crimpi T i rimping 0 0 mm2 kemil Manufacturer Ring lug tool crimps AWG Burndy YAL26T38 MY29 3 2 lIsco CRA 2 0 IDT 12 1 70 2 0 lIsco CCL 2 0 38 MT 25 1 Thomas amp Betts 54110 TBM 8 3 Burndy YAL27T38 MY29 3 2 lIsco CRA 3 0 IDT 12 1 95 3 0 lIsco CCL 3 0 38 MT 25 1 Thomas amp Betts 54111 TBM 8 3 Burndy YA28R4 MY29 3 2 lIsco CRA 4 0 IDT 12 1 95 3 0 lIsco CCL 4 0 38 MT 25 2 Thomas amp Betts 54112 TBM 8 4 Screw on terminal lugs 1 Use the following procedure to attach cables if screw on terminal lugs are supplied and the cable size is 95 mm 3 0 AWG or larger 1 Attach the supplied screw on lugs to the drive end of the cables 2 Attach screw on lugs to the drive X60003 Technical data ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 259 Motor connections WARNING Never
13. O KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the reference source 1 al1 Defines analog input 1 A11 as the reference EXT REF 1 MING source 2 Al2 Defines analog input 2 A12 as the reference EXT REF 1 MIN source 3 Al1 JOYST Defines analog input 1 A11 configured for joystick operation as the reference source EXT REF 1 MAX The minimum input signal runs the drive at the maximum reference in the reverse direction Define the minimum 2 ae T using parameter 1104 EXT REF 1 MIN e The maximum input signal runs the drive at maximum reference in the forward direction Define the maximum EXT REF 1 MIN using parameter 1105 Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST WARNING Because the low end of the reference range commands full reverse operation do not use O V as the lower end of the reference range Doing so means that if the control signal is lost which is a O V input the result is full reverse operation Instead use the following set up so that loss of the analog input triggers a fault stopping the drive Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 1304 MINIMUM Al2 at 20 2 V or 4 mA Set parameter 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT to a value 5 or higher Set parameter 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION to 1 FAULT 4 Al2 JOYST Defines analog input 2 A12 configured for joystick operation as the reference source e See above AI1 JOYST description Hysteresis 4 of full s
14. 0 0 273 drive OU SIdO o ooooooooo 274 DIP switches o ooooooooooo 21 24 285 direction control parameter 93 display format PID parameter 147 disposal zz ose far ase eee nee nah 278 document library oooooooooo o 295 download failure 2 ciu ete MEE ERR 53 handling inexact transfers 52 parameter sets ooo 50 drive EFB comm installation 178 FBA module installation 212 id fault COde oooooooo ooo 234 mounting ia e eee s 18 mounting dimensions 273 outside dimensions lusus 274 rating parameter 08 131 temperature data parameter 85 weight eur rere npe Ra 275 drive on time data parameters 87 E earth fault faultcode 0002 eee eee 234 parameter 0000 perdio ee See ws 126 earthing see ground EFB embedded fieldbus 177 actual value scaling 185 actual values e eee eee 185 analog output control activate 183 comm fault response 184 configuration 2 00 cee eee 180 configure for loss of communication 187 control interface ooo oooooooo 177 control word Loco 197 diagnostics llle 186 drive control of functions activate 181 exception codes aaaa 196 fault code 28
15. A list of changed parameters is displayed Select EXIT to exit the Changed YY 3 Parameters Mode Control panel ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 49 Fault History Mode Use the Fault History Mode to see drive fault history fault state details and help for the faults 1 Select FAULT HISTORY in the Main Menu 2 Press ENTER to see the latest faults up to 10 faults maximum 3 Press DETAIL to see details for the selected fault Details are available for the three latest faults 4 Press DIAG to see the help description for the fault See Diagnostics section Note If a power off occurs only the three latest faults will remain with details only in the first fault Drive Parameter Backup Mode Use the Drive Parameter Backup Mode to export parameters from one drive to another The parameters are uploaded from a drive to the control panel and downloaded from the control panel to another drive Two options are available Par Backup Mode The ACQ Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters The Par Backup Mode has these functions Upload to Panel Copies all parameters from the drive to the Control Panel This includes user sets of parameters if defined and internal parameters such as those created by the Motor Id Run The Control Panel memory is non volatile and does not depend on the panel s battery To upload parameters to control panel follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main
16. 235 overtemperature fault parameter 127 temperature data parameter 87 control cable connections 00000e eee eae 24 requirements eee eee 269 control panel 20 c eee eee 47 backup drive parameters 49 cable requirements 270 changed parameters mode 48 comm error fault parameter 124 Contrast sie ARDE A a ela 43 display bar graph 132 133 display contrast aaa 43 display decimal point form parameters 132 display max parameters 133 display min parameters 133 display process variables parameter group 132 display selection parameters 132 display units parameters 133 features ooo 43 i o settings mode 000 eee ee 55 maintenance lesse elles 245 modes vus eh keke eee d Ed ee 44 operating the drive 45 parameter lock parameter 106 parameters mode annann nnen 45 pass code parameter 106 reference control parameter 94 signal max parameters 132 signal min parameters 132 SOMO Sii a rs lea 43 start up assistant mode 47 status information 00 44 time 4 date set 53 control panel ACQ Dattery ue ossa hee EPA SER 245 fault logger mode
17. ramp time PFC parameter ramp zero select parameter time parameter 2 2 activate external PID parameter actual input PID parameters actual max PID parameters actual min PID parameters actual values mapping FBA generic profile scaling EFBcomm scaling FBAcomm scaling FBA ABB drives profile scaling FBA generic profile alarm display enable parameter lISUNG ete saree nG ORES Maced ee Pe words data parameters alternate macro 000020 eee eee altitude A eet mec ae tee as environment liMit shipping liMit o o o oo oo o ambient conditions 2 283 ambient temperature darating aa yee eee wie ee A 250 environment limit 276 shipping limit llle 276 amplitude logging see load analyzer analog cable requirements 270 analog I O connections oooooooooooooooo 24 specifications llle 24 analog input parameter group 100 data parameter aaan naan 86 fault limit parameters 126 filter parameters 100 less than min auto reset parameter 128 less than min fault parameter 124 loss fault codes
18. 91 status at history parameter 91 time of history parameters 91 torque at history parameter 91 voltage at history parameter 91 words data parameters 90 fault display URI ese eoo id Tan tee e 232 I e a ree E 231 fault names eee 232 fault logging ACQ control panel 49 FB actual signals parameter group 89 FBA protocol listing 209 Index ACQ550 U1 User s Manual FBA fieldbus adapter actual values eee eee analog output control activate comm fault response configuration 0 0 2 aa control Word control word ABB drives diagnostics drive feedback o oooooooomooo fieldbus control activate input reference sel activate installati0ON o o o oooooooo PID control setpoint source activate planning ime tib oi cx reference saver bac Rad relay output control activate Seb Up slo se RR teer ths qam ror tend start stop direction control activate state diagram ABB drives status word Loco status word ABB drives FBA drive parameters ext comm module parameter group command words data parameters config file CPI firmware revision parameter config file id revision paramete
19. The text Copying parameters and a progress diagram is displayed 4 Select ABORT if you want to stop the process 1 menu hu Select PAR BACKUP with the UP DOWN buttons and select ENTER kh 2 uE XE Scroll to Upload to Panel and select 3 un CZ Control panel 50 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Download Full Set Restores the full parameter set from the Control Panel to the drive Use this option to restore a drive or to configure identical drives This download does not include user sets of parameters o The text Parameter upload successful is displayed and the EY control panel returns to the PAR BACKUP menu Select EXIT to return to the main menu Now you 5 can disconnect the panel Upload Download to panel N i Control Ea Panel E 1P2100 IP2100 To download all parameters to drive follow these steps Select MENU to enter the menu 1 CG Select PAR BACKUP with the UP DOWN buttons Scroll to Download to drive all and select SEL The text Restoring parameters is displayed Select ABORT if you want 4 to stop the process After the download stops the message Parameter download successful is displayed and the control panel goes back to PAR BACKUP menu Select EXIT to return 5 to the main menu Control panel ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 51 Note Download Full Set writes all param
20. FAULT WORD 3 Read only copy of the Fault Word 3 e See parameter 0305 When an alarm is active the corresponding bit for the active alarm is set in the Alarm Words e Each alarm has a dedicated bit allocated within Alarm Words e Bits remain set until the whole alarm word is reset Reset by writing zero to the word e The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displays as 0001 All zeros and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 ALARM WORD 2 See parameter 0308 ALARM WORD 1 Bit 0305 FAULT WORD 1 0306 FAULT WORD 2 0307 FAULT WORD 3 0 OVERCURRENT Obsolete EFB 1 1 DC OVERVOLT THERM FAIL EFB 2 2 DEVOVERTEMP OPEX LINK EFB 3 3 SHORT CIRC OPEX PWR INCOMPATIBLE SW 4 Reserved CURR MEAS USER LOAD CURVE 5 DCUNDERVOLT SUPPLY PHASE Reserved 6 Al LOSS ENCODER ERR Reserved 7 Al2LOSS OVERSPEED Reserved 8 MOT OVERTEMP Reserved Reserved 9 PANEL LOSS DRIVE ID Reserved 10 ID RUN FAIL CONFIG FILE System error 11 MOTOR STALL SERIAL 1 ERR System error 12 CB OVERTEMP EFB CON FILE System error 13 EXT FAULT 1 FORCE TRIP System error 14 EXT FAULT 2 MOTOR PHASE System error 15 EARTH FAULT OUTP WIRING Param setting fault Bit 0308 ALARM WORD 1 0309 ALARM WORD 2 O OVERCURRENT Reserved 1 JOVERVOLTAGE PID SLEEP 2 UNDERVOLTAGE ID RUN 3 DIR LOCK Reserved 4 NO COMM START ENABLE 1 MISSING 5 Al LOSS STA
21. Input Words STATUS WORD Actual Value speed or frequency Others The drive supports a maximum of 15 input words Protocols limits may further restrict the total Note The words output and input are used as seen from the fieldbus controller point of view For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view The meanings of the controller interface words are not restricted by the ACQ550 However the profile used may set particular meanings Fieldbus controller Fieldbus Control Word CW References Process l O cyclic Status Word SW Actual Values Service Messages Parameter R W Requests Responses lt gt Acyclic Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The fieldbus controller sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive The drive switches between states according to the bit coded instructions in the CONTROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD requires that e The drive is in remote Auto control Fieldbus adapter ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 211 e The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands from EXT1 set using parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL e The external plug in fieldbus adapter is activated Parameter 9802 COMM P
22. a 188 fault code Bd 188 fault code 32 ce eee 188 fault code 33 0 0 eee eee ee 188 fault tracing parameters 186 fault duplicate stations 187 fault intermittent off line 188 fault no master station on line 187 fault swapped wires 187 feedback from drive o 185 input reference sel activate 182 installation onto Kag KG bue oe a na ha 178 misc drive control activate 182 modbus actual values 196 PID control setpoint source activate 184 plarinirig sx daa oe BAGA EE Ete RE 178 protiles i2 vr pas Re AERE PARE 190 reference scaling ABB drives profile 206 relay output control activate 183 SOUP es coni Rede Na nece 179 start stop direction control activate 181 state diagram aa 205 status W0rd cece eee 200 termination 179 Index 286 EFB drive parameters 159 protocol parameter group 159 baud rate parameter 159 command words data parameters 89 config file fault code 235 control profile parameter 159 CRC errors count parameter 159 fault codes a 235 fault function parameter 126 fault time parameter 126 ok messages count parameter 159 param
23. 233 maximum parameters 100 minimum parameters 100 analog output parameter group 104 content max parameters 104 content min parameters 104 current max parameters 104 current min parameters 104 data content parameters 104 data parameters 0000005 86 filter parameters 104 analyzer load see load analyzer application block output data parameter 85 application macro parameter 83 application macros see macros assistant ACQ Control Panel TASKS naa Bayo Pma ha TET 47 autochange interval parameter AA 168 level parameter 169 Overview ee 169 starting order counter 169 automatic reset see reset automatic auxiliary motor see motor auxiliary B backup drive parameters eee 49 battery ACQ Control Panel 245 baud rate RS 232 parameter 158 Index 284 braking components aana a aa 265 protection from overheated resistor 268 resistor heat dissipation 268 selecting brake choppers resistors 265 WIG ise sem met me Rees 268 break point frequency fault parameter 125 buffer overruns count parameter 158 C cable requirements CONTO Nah ciao prse LINDEN diia 269 grounding Jure
24. 87 product inquiries na pag pA hanes t ees dite 295 TAINING AA PA AA PAA 295 profiles EFB comm 0 00 190 proportional gain parameter 118 Index ACQ550 U1 User s Manual protection circuit required w chopper 268 disconnecting device disconnecting means 251 enclosure standard 279 environmental a 276 motor thermal 000 0 005 261 PT100 temperature sensor 136 PTC temperature sensor 136 pump power see energy saving R radiation limits conducted EN 61800 3 0000 0c eee 264 ramp pair accel decel parameter 116 range listing for parameters 69 ratings ini Rede eI nhe Ete 247 reference select parameter group 94 corrections for parameter values 95 keypad control parameter 94 maximum parameters 96 minimum parameters 96 select source parameter 94 step PFC parameters 164 reference scaling EFB ABB drives profile 206 FBA ABB drives profile 224 FBA generic profile 228 regulator by pass control parameter 174 relative humidity environmentlimit 276 shipping liMit o oo oo ooo 276 relay output parameter group 101 activation condition
25. Noconductive dust allowed The ACQ550 should be installed in clean air according to enclosure classification Cooling air must be clean free from corrosive materials and free from electrically conductive dust Chemical gases Class 3C2 e Solid particles Class 382 Storage Noconductive dust allowed Chemical gases Class 1C2 e Solid particles Class 152 Transportation Noconductive dust allowed Chemical gases Class 2C2 Solid particles Class 252 The following table lists the standard stress testing that the ACQ550 passes Stress tests Without shipping package Inside shipping package Mechanical conditions In accordance In accordance with ISTA 1A and 1B Sinusoidal with IEC 60721 3 3 Class 3M4 specifications vibration e 2 9 Hz 3 0 mm 0 12 in 9 200 Hz 10 m s 33 ft s Shock Not allowed In accordance with IEC 68 2 29 max 100 m s 330 ft s 11ms Not allowed 76 cm 30 in frame size R1 61cm 24 in frame size R2 4 18 in f ize R Free fall 6 cm 18 in frame size R3 e 31 cm 12 in frame size R4 e 25cm 10 in frame size R5 15cm 6 in frame size RE Materials Material specifications Drive enclosure PC ABS 2 5 mm color NCS 1502 Y or NCS 7000 N Hot dip zinc coated steel sheet 1 5 2 mm thickness of coating 20 micrometers If the surface is painted the total thickness of the coating zinc and paint is 80 100
26. Parameters 126 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 3010 STALL FUNCTION This parameter defines the operation of the Stall function This protection is active if the drive operates in the stall region see the figure for the time defined by 3012 STALL TIME The User Limit is defined in Group 20 LIMITS by 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 2018 MAX TORQUE i 2 or the limit on the COMM input Torque 0 NOT SEL Stall protection is not used Current 1 FAULT When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set by 3012 STALL TIME Stall region The drive coasts to stop 95 e A fault indication is displayed 2 ALARM When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set by 3012 STALL TIME e An alarm indication is displayed The alarm disappears when the drive is out of the stall region for half the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME User limit 3011 STALL FREQUENCY P 3011 This parameter sets the frequency value for the Stall function Refer to Stall frequency the figure 3012 3017 3018 STALL TIME This parameter sets the time value for the Stall function EARTH FAULT Defines the drive response if the drive detects a ground fault in the motor or motor cables The drive monitors for ground faults while the drive is running and while the drive is not running Also see parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT O DISABLE No drive response to ground faults
27. Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 167 Code Description 8117 NR OF AUX MOT Sets the number of auxiliary motors e Each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals e The Autochange function if used requires an additional relay output for the speed regulated motor The following describes the set up of the required relay outputs Relay outputs As noted above each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and relays e The ACQ550 provides relay outputs RO1 RO3 An external digital output module OREL 01 can be added to provide relay outputs RO4 RO6 Parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 define respectively how relays RO1 RO6 are used the parameter value 31 PFC defines the relay as used for PFC e The ACQ550 assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending order If the Autochange function is disabled the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC and so on If the Autochange function is used the assignments rotate Initially the soeed regulated motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the second relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC and so on
28. 6410 UDC AT PEAK 0 65535 V 1V 6411 FREQ AT PEAK 0 0 6553 5 Hz 0 1 Hz 6412 TIME OF RESET 1 Date dd mm yy power on time in days 1 d 6413 TIME OF RESET 2 Time hh mm ss 2s 6414 ALTRANGEOTO10 0 0 100 0 0 1 6415 AL1RANGE10TO20 0 0 100 0 0 1 6416 ALIRANGE20T030 0 0 100 0 0 1 6417 AL1RANGE30TO40 0 0 100 0 0 1 6418 ALTRANGE40TO50 0 0 100 0 0 1 6419 ALTRANGEBOTO60 0 0 100 0 0 1 6420 AL1RANGE60TO70 0 0 100 0 0 1 6421 ALTRANGE70TOB80 0 0 100 0 0 1 6422 ALTRANGE80TO90 0 0 100 0 0 1 6423 ALTRANGE90TO 0 0 100 0 0 1 6424 AL2RANGEOTO10 0 0 100 0 0 1 6425 AL2RANGE10TO20 0 0 100 0 0 1 6426 AL2RANGE20TO30 0 0 100 0 0 1 6427 AL2RANGE30TO40 0 0 100 0 0 1 6428 AL2RANGE40TO50 0 0 100 0 0 1 6429 AL2RANGE50TO6O 0 0 100 0 0 1 6430 AL2RANGEGOTO7O 0 0 100 0 0 1 6431 AL2RANGE70TO80 0 0 100 0 0 1 6432 AL2RANGE80TO90 0 0 100 0 0 1 Parameters 82 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User 6433 AL2RANGE90TO 0 0 100 0 0 1 Group 81 PFC CONTROL 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 0 0 100 096 0 196 0 096 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 8105 REFERENCE STEP3 0 0 100 0 0 196 0 096 8109 START FREQ 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz U1 60 0 Hz 8110 START FREQ 2 0 0
29. Parameters Mode Edits parameter values individually e Start up Assistant Mode Guides the start up and configuration e Changed Parameters Mode Shows changed parameters e Fault History Mode Shows the drive fault history e Drive Parameter Backup Mode Stores or uploads the parameters e Time Date Mode Sets the time and date for the drive 1 0 Settings Mode Checks and edits the I O settings Standard Display Mode Use the Standard Display Mode to read information on the drive s status and to operate the drive To reach the Standard Display Mode press EXIT until the LCD display shows status information as described below Status information Top The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive HAND Indicates that the drive control is local that is from the control panel AUTO Indicates that the drive control is remote such as the basic I O X1 or fieldbus e Indicates the drive and motor rotation status as follows Control panel display Significance Rotating arrow clockwise or Drive is running and at setpoint counterclockwise Shaft direction is forward or reverse Rotating dotted arrow blinking Drive is running but not at setpoint Stationary dotted arrow Start command is present but motor is not running E g start enable is missing Upper right shows the active reference Middle Using parameter group 34 the middle of t
30. 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 0 65535 1 0178 SAVED CO2 0 0 6553 5 tn 0 1 tn Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 71 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 0303 FBSTS WORD 1 0304 FB STS WORD 2 1 0305 FAULT WORD 1 1 0306 FAULT WORD 2 1 0307 FAULT WORD 3 1 0308 ALARM WORD 1 1 0309 ALARM WORD 2 1 Group 04 FAULT HISTORY 0401 LAST FAULT Fault codes panel displays as text 1 0 0402 FAULT TIME 1 Date dd mm yy power on time in days 1 day 0 0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time hh mm ss 2s 0 0404 SPEED AT FLT 32768 32767 1 rpm 0 0405 FREQ AT FLT 3276 8 3276 7 0 1 Hz 0 0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT 0 0 6553 5 0 1 V 0 0407 CURRENT AT FLT 0 0 6553 5 0 1A 0 0408 TORQUE AT FLT 3276 8 3276 7 0 1 0 0409 STATUS AT FLT 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 0410 Di 1 3 AT FLT 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0 0411 DI 4 6 AT FLT 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 As par 0401 1 0 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 As par 0401 1 0 Group 10 START STOP DIR 1001 EXT COMMANDS 0 14 1 2 D11 2 Y 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 14 1 O NOT SEL Y 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD 2 REVERSE 1 1 FORWARD Y 3 REQUEST 1004 JOGGING SEL 6 6 1 O NOT SEL Y Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT 1101 KEYPAD REF SEL 1 REF1 Hz r
31. 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter 3407 Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 135 Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS This group defines the detection and reporting for a particular potential fault motor overheating as detected by a temperature sensor Typical connections are shown below One sensor Three sensors All f f i Al i Motor Motor un AGND AGND m E TI TJ b E D L aot A01 i NG 3 8 nF JL 3 3 nF SG 5 WARNING IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth To fulfil this requirement connect a thermistor and other similar components to the drive s control terminals using any of these alternatives e Separate the thermistor from live parts of the motor with double reinforced insulation e Protect all circuits connected to the drive s digital and analog inputs Protect against contact and insulate from other low voltage circuits with basic insulation rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit e Use an external thermistor relay The relay insulation must be rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main c
32. ABB Drives profile EFB STATUS WORD See parameter 5320 Bit Name Value Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram RDY_ON RDY_RUN 1 READY TO SWITCH ON o NOT READY TO SWITCH ON READY TO OPERATE OFF1 ACTIVE RDY REF O OPERATION ENABLED OPERATION INHIBITED TRIPPED OFF 2 STA FAULT ojojo a No fault OFF2 INACTIVE OFF2 ACTIVE OFF_3_STA O OFF3 INACTIVE OFF3 ACTIVE SWC_ON_INHIB ALARM AT_SETPOINT SWITCH ON INHIBIT ACTIVE O O SWITCH ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE Alarm See section Alarm listing on page 238 for details on alarms No alarm OPERATING Actual value equals within tolerance limits the reference value Actual value is outside tolerance limits not equal to reference value REMOTE Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 Drive control location LOCAL 10 ABOVE_LIMIT Supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit Bit remains 1 until supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit See Group 32 SUPERVISION Supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit Bit remains 0 until supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit See Group 32 SUPERVISION 11 EXT CTRL LOC O External control location 2 EXT2 selected External control location 1 EXT1 selected 12 EXT RUN EN
33. Note Disabling earth fault ground fault may void the warranty 1 ENABLE Ground faults display fault 16 EARTH FAULT and if running the drive coasts to stop COMM FAULT FUNC Defines the drive response if the fieldbus communication is lost O NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 28 SERIAL 1 ERR and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP 7 Displays an alarm 2005 1 0 COMM and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value 3 LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2005 1 0 COMM and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when fieldbus communication is lost 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Sets the communication fault time used with 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC e Brief interruptions in the fieldbus communication are not treated as faults if they are less than the COMM FAULT TIME value 3021 AM FAULT LIMIT Sets a fault level for analog input 1 e See 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT Sets a fault level for analog input 2 e See 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 127 Code Description 3023 WIRING FAULT Defines
34. 1 Fieldbus control enabled dida NG CW 0 or Ref 0 Retain last CW and Ref CW 0 and Ref 0 Fieldbus control enabled e Ref and deceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 EXT2 Effective if 1102 COMM 0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 EXT1 Effective if 1102 COMM 12 Unused 15 DCU Profile The following tables describe the CONTROL WORD content for the DCU profile DCU profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 0301 Bit Name Value Command Req Comments 0 STOP 1 Stop Stops according to either the stop mode parameter or the stop mode requests bits 7 0 no op and 8 1 START 1 Start Simultaneous STOP and START commands 0 no op result in a stop command 2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction This bit XOR d with the sign of the reference ER defines direction 0 Forward direction 3 LOCAL 1 Local mode When the fieldbus sets this bit it steals E control and the drive moves to fieldbus local 0 xternal mode control mode 4 RESET gt 1 Reset Edge sensitive other no op 5 EXT2 1 Switch to EXT2 0 Switch to EXT1 6 RUN_DISABLE 1 Run disable Inverted run enable 0 Run enable on 7 STPMODE R 1 Normal ramp stop mode 0 no op Embedded fieldbus 200 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual DCU profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 0301 Bit Name Value Command Req Comments STPMODE EM 1 Emerge
35. 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 20 0 mA 1506 FILTER AO1 0 0 10 0s 0 1 s 0 1s 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 99 178 1 104 parameter 0104 CURRENT 1508 A02 CONTENT MIN Depends on the signal selected with par 1507 1509 AO2 CONTENT MAX Depends on the signal selected with par 1507 Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 73 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 1510 MINIMUM A02 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0 0 mA 1511 MAXIMUM A02 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 20 0 mA 1512 FILTER A02 0 0 10 0s 0 1s 0 1s Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS 1601 RUN ENABLE 6 7 1 O NOT SEL Y 1602 PARAMETER LOCK O LOCKED 1 OPEN 2 NOT SAVED 1 1 OPEN 1603 PASS CODE 0 65535 1 0 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 6 8 1 O KEYPAD 1605 USER PAR SET CHG 6 6 1 O NOT SEL 1606 ILOCAL LOCK 6 8 1 O NOT SEL 1607 PARAM SAVE O DONE 1 SAVE 1 O DONE 1608 START ENABLE 1 6 7 1 O NOT SEL Y 1609 START ENABLE 2 6 7 1 O NOT SEL Y 1610 DISPLAY ALARMS 0 NO 1 YES 1 O NO 1611 PARAMETER VIEW O DEFAULT 1 O DEFAULT 1612 FAN CONTROL O DEFAULT 1 FORCE FAN ON 1 O DEFAULT Group 20 LIMITS 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 30000 30000 rpm 1 rpm O rpm Y 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm U1 1800 rpm Y 2008 MAX CURRENT 0 1 8 long 0 1A 1 8 long Y 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 E
36. 3 Start Application macros ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Connection examples of two wire and three wire sensors 65 Many applications use process PI D and need a feedback signal from the process The feedback signal is typically connected to analog input 2 Al2 The macro wiring diagrams for each macro earlier in this chapter use an externally powered sensor connections not shown The figures below give examples of connections using a two wire or three wire sensor transmitter supplied by the drive auxiliary voltage output Two wire sensor transmitter X1 control board 4 20 mA 5 Al2 I 6 AGND Process actual value measurement 0 4 20 mA Rin 100 ohm X1 control board 10 24V 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output non isolated 24 V DC 250 mA Note The sensor is supplied through its current output and the drive feeds the supply voltage 24 V Thus the output signal must be 4 20 mA not 0 20 mA Three wire sensor transmitter X1 control board Process actual value measurement 0 4 20 mA Ri 100 ohm control board P OUT 0 4 20 mA 5 AI2 E 6 AGND X1 10 24 V 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output non isolated 24 V DC 250 mA Application macros 66 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual User parameter sets In addition to the standard appli
37. Code Description 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM Selects the first supervised parameter Must be a parameter number from Group 01 OPERATING DATA e 100 NOT SELECTED No parameter selected 101 178 Selects parameter 0101 0178 e Ifthe supervised parameter passes a limit a relay output is energized The supervision limits are defined in this group The relay outputs are defined in Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS definition also specifies which supervision limit is monitored LO HI Operating data supervision using relay outputs when LOSHI Case A Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal exceeds a given limit The relay remains active until the supervised value drops below the low limit Case B Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal falls below a given limit The relay remains active until the supervised value rises above the high limit LO gt HI Operating data supervision using relay outputs when LO gt HI The lowest limit HI 3203 is active initially and remains active until the supervised parameter goes above the highest limit LO 3202 making that limit the active limit That limit remains active until the supervised parameter goes below the lowest limit HI 3203 making that limit ac
38. Group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS This group defines up to three critical speeds or ranges of speeds that are to be avoided due for example to mechanical resonance problems at certain speeds Code 2501 Description CRIT SPEED SEL foutput Sets the critical speeds function on or off The critical speed A function avoids specific speed ranges O OFF Disables the critical speeds function 02 A nn a 1 ON Enables the critical speeds function 46 Example To avoid speeds at which a fan system vibrates badly Determine problem speed ranges Assume they are found to 23 be 18 23 Hz and 46 52 Hz 18 Set 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 1 Set 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 18 Hz Set 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 23 Hz ae Set 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 46 Hz HL f1H f2L f2H Set 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 52 Hz 18 23 46 52 gt frer Hz 2502 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 LO Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 1 The value must be less than or equal to 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI Units are rpm unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ then units are Hz CRIT SPEED 1 HI Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 1 The value must be greater than or equal to 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO Units are rpm unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ then units are Hz 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 2 e See parameter 2502 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI Sets the maximum limit for critic
39. MS Analog a P 1301 P 1302 input signal or 1304 or 1305 1106 REF2 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF2 0 17 Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 19 Pip1OUT The reference is taken from the PID1 output See Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 and Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 20 21 Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 19 PID1 REF2 LIMIT SELECT max 1107 1108 PFC 1 17 20 21 MIN 1107 1108 1107 REF2 MIN Sets the minimum for external reference 2 The minimum analog input signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF2 MIN in e Parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analog input signal This parameter sets the minimum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference nominal torque 1108 REF2 MAX Sets the maximum for external reference 2 e The maximum analog input signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF2 MAX in Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets the maximum analog input signal e This parameter sets the maximum frequency reference e The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference nominal torque Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 97 Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS This group defines a set of constant speeds In general e You can program up to
40. SUPRV1 UNDER Energize relay when first supervised parameter 3201 drops below the limit 3202 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 129 10 SUPRV2 OVER Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 exceeds the limit 3206 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 129 11 SUPRV2 UNDER Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 drops below the limit 3205 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 129 12 SUPRV3 OVER Energize relay when third supervised parameter 3207 exceeds the limit 3209 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 129 13 SUPRV3 UNDER Energize relay when third supervised parameter 3207 drops below the limit 3208 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 129 14 AT SET POINT Energize relay when the output frequency is equal to the reference frequency 15 FAULT RST Energize relay when the drive is in a fault condition and will reset after the programmed auto reset delay See parameter 3103 DELAY TIME 16 FLT ALARM Energize relay when fault or alarm occurs 17 EXT CTRL Energize relay when external control is selected 18 REF 2 SEL Energize relay when EXT2 is selected 19 CONST FREQ Energize relay when a constant speed is selected 20 REF LOSS Energize relay when reference or active control place is lost 21 OVERCURRENT Energize relay when an overcurrent alarm or fault occurs 22 OVERVOLTAGE Energize relay
41. Study these installation instructions carefully before proceeding Failure to observe the warnings and instructions may cause a malfunction or personal hazard N WARNING Before you begin read chapter Safety on page 5 Note The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable local laws and regulations ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any installation which breaches the local laws and or other regulations Furthermore if the recommendations given by ABB are not followed the drive may experience problems that the warranty does not cover Installation flow chart The installation of the ACQ550 adjustable speed AC drive follows the outline below The steps must be carried out in the order shown At the right of each step are references to the detailed information needed for the correct installation of the drive Task PREPARE for installation v v PREPARE the mounting location REMOVE the front cover v MOUNT the drive v INSTALL wiring v CHECK installation v REINSTALL the cover v START UP See Preparing for installation on page 12 Prepare the mounting location on page 16 Remove the front cover on page 17 Mount the drive on page 18 Wiring overview on page 19 and Install the wiring on page 26 Check installation on page 31 Reinstall the cover on page 32 How to start up the drive on page 33 Installation 1
42. WARNING A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low voltage public network which supplies domestic premises Radio frequency interference is expected if the drive is used on such a network Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on IT ungrounded systems The supply network becomes connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the drive Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected to a corner grounded TN system as this would damage the drive Technical data ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Index Numerics Oxxxx register EFB function codes EFB mapping 1xxxx register EFB function codes EFB mapping 2 wire sensor transmitter connection example 3 wire macro 2 ee 3 wire sensor transmitter connection example 3xxxx register EFB function codes EFB mapping 4xxxx register EFB function codes EFB mapping ABB document library feedback on ABB manuals product and service inquiries product training o o ooooo standard default macro acceleration deceleration parameter group at aux stop PFC parameter compensation parameter ramp select parameter ramp shape parameter
43. in mm lin mm in mm lin mm in mm in Ww 213 8 4 213 8 4 257 10 1 257 10 1 369 14 5 410 16 1 W2 222 8 8 222 8 8 267 10 5 267 10 5 369 14 5 410 16 1 H3 461 18 2 561 221 629 248 760 29 9 775 30 5 924 36 4 D 234 9 2 245 9 7 254 10 0 284 11 2 309 12 2 423 16 7 00467918 xIs C 1 ACQ550 01 290A 4 1119 mm 44 1 in 2 UL type 12 not available for ACQ550 01 290A 4 Weight The following table lists typical maximum weights for each frame size Variations within each frame size due to components associated with voltage current ratings and options are minor 1 ACQ550 x1 246A 4 IP21 UL type 1 70 kg 154 Ib 2 ACQ550 x1 246A 4 IP54 UL type 12 80 kg 176 Ib Weight Enclosure R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib IP21 UL type1 6 5 143 9 0 19 8 16 35 24 53 34 75 69 152 IP54 UL type 12 8 0 17 6 11 0 24 3 17 0 37 5 26 0 57 3 42 0 93 0 86 0 190 00467918 xls C Technical data 276 Degrees of protection Available enclosures ACQ550 U1 User s Manual e P21 UL type 1 enclosure The site must be free of airborne dust corrosive gases or liquids and conductive contaminants such as condensation carbon dust and metallic particles e P54 UL type 12 enclosure This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and li
44. 0 ENGLISH 1 ENGLISH AM 2 DEUTSCH 3 ITALIANO 4 ESPA OL 5 PORTUGUES 6 NEDERLANDS 7 FRAN AIS 8 DANSK 9 SUOMI 10 SVENSKA 11 RUSSKI 12 POLSKI 13 TURKCE 14 CZECH 15 MAGYAR 16 ELLINIKA 9902 APPLIC MACRO Selects an application macro Application macros automatically edit parameters to configure the ACQ550 for a particular application 1 ABB 2 WIRE 2 3 WIRE 3 ALTERNATE 4 MOTOR POT 5 HAND AUTO 6 PID CONTROL 7 PFC CONTROL O USER S1 LOAD 1 USER S1 SAVE 2 USER S2 LOAD 3 USER S2 SAVE 1 USER S1 SAVE 3 USER S2 SAVE With these it is possible to save two different user parameter sets into the drive permanent memory for later use Each set contains parameter settings including Group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification run O USER S1 LOAD 2 USER S2 LOAD With these the user parameter sets can be taken back in use 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Selects the motor control mode 1 or 2 VECTOR SPEED sensorless vector control mode e Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm e Reference 2 is speed reference in 96 100 is absolute maximum speed equal to the value of parameter 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED or 2001 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed 3 SCALAR FREQ scalar control mode Default e Reference 1 is frequency reference in Hz Reference 2 is frequency reference in 100 is absolute maximum fr
45. 0 A start inhibit from this channel is not granted 31 ACK_OFF_ILCK 1 Start inhibit due to OFF button 0 Normal operation Embedded fieldbus 204 State diagram ABB Drives profile To illustrate the operation of the state diagram the following example ABB DRV LIM implementation of the ABB Drives profile uses the control word to start the drive ACQ550 U1 User s Manual First the requirements for using the CONTROL WORD must be met See above When the power is first connected the state of the drive is not ready to switch on See dotted lined path in the state diagram below Use the CONTROL WORD to step through the state machine states until the OPERATING State is reached meaning that the drive is running and follows the given reference See the table below Step CONTROL WORD Value Description 1 CW 0000 0000 0000 0110 bit 15 bit O This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO SWITCH ON Wait at least 100 ms before proceeding CW 0000 0000 0000 0111 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO OPERATE CW 0000 0000 0000 1111 This CW value changes the drive state to OPERATION ENABLED The drive starts but will not accelerate CW 0000 0000 0010 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG output and changes the drive state to RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED CW 0000 0000 0110 1111 This CW value releases the ramp functi
46. 1 Status is displayed as a binary number 1 indicates that the input is activated LI l e Oindicates that the input is deactivated 0119 DI 4 6 STATUS DI 1 DI2 DIS Status of the three digital inputs See parameter 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS 0120 Al 1 The relative value of analog input 1 in 96 0121 Al 2 The relative value of analog input 2 in 96 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Status of the three relay outputs l m l e 1 indicates that the relay is energized l LI l e Oindicates that the relay is de energized 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS RELAY 1 STATUS Status of the three relay outputs Available if OREL 01 Relay Output RELAY 2 STATUS Extension Module is installed RELAY 3 STATUS e See parameter 0122 0124 AO 1 The analog output 1 value in milliamperes 0125 0126 AO 2 The analog output 2 value in milliamperes PID 1 OUTPUT The PID controller 1 output value in 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT The PID controller 2 output value in 0128 PID 1 SETPNT The PID 1 controller setpoint signal e Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0129 PID 2 SETPNT The PID 2 controller setpoint signal e Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0130 PID 1 FBK The PID 1 controller feedback signal e Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0131 PID 2 FBK The PID 2 controller feedback signal e Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0
47. 137 overtemperature fault code 233 sensor selection parameter 136 sensor type parameter 136 thermal protection 261 thermal protection fault parameter 124 thermal stress data parameter 87 thermal time fault parameter 125 289 motor auxiliary aux start order parameter 175 aux start delay PFC parameter 166 aux stop delay PFC parameter 166 number of aux parameter 167 motors several aNd ai eee GN 249 259 mounting dimensions 273 fl nges oo reed eb MN Maes 16 template 16 multimotor systems 249 259 MWh counter data parameter 87 power consumption maintenance trigger 123 N NEMA ratings see ratings noise random sw freq parameter 122 NPN 2 ND GN aa aa PLA an 25 O offset PID parameter 154 ok messages count parameter 158 operating data parameter group 85 OPEX link fault code 234 OPEX power fault code 234 OPINIONS LEE 13 parameter group 176 Codes shore arai eh Oe kal NE 13 output frequency data parameter 85 voltage data parameter 85 wiring fault code 00 235 overcurrent automatic reset parameter 128 faultcode anana 232 overload c
48. 1415 RO 5 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 5 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1416 RO 5 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 5 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1417 RO 6 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 6 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 6 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY Parameters 104 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS This group defines the drive s analog current signal outputs The drive s analog outputs can be e any parameter in Group 01 OPERATING DATA e limited to programmable minimum and maximum values of output current e scaled and or inverted by defining the minimum and maximum values of the source parameter or content Defining an maximum value parameter 1503 or 1509 that is less than the content minimum value parameter 1502 or 1508 results in an inverted output e filtered Code Description 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL Defines the content for analog output AO1 99 EXCITE PTC Provides a current source for sensor type PTC Output 1 6 mA See Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 100 EXCITE PT100 Provides a current source for sensor type PT100 Output 9 1 mA See Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 101 178 Output corresponds to a parameter in Group 01 OPERATING DATA Parameter defined by value value 102 parameter 0102 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN AAO mA Se
49. 4 20 mA PID PFC 0 10V gt 0 100 PID Analog input circuit common setpoint Output frequency 0 20 mA Actual 1 PI controller actual value 0 4 20 mA Analog output circuit common Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC Auxiliary voltage output common Digital input common for all Start Stop Manual Activation starts the drive Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive EXT1 EXT2 selection Activation selects PFC control Interlock Deactivation always stops the drive Interlock Deactivation stops constant speed motor Start Stop PFC Activation starts the drive Note 2 CN The sensor for Al2 is powered exter Default operation nally See the manufacturer s instruc Running gt 19 connected to 21 tions To use sensors supplied by the Relay output 2 programmable drive aux voltage output see page 65 Default operation Fault 1 gt 22 connected to 24 Fault gt 22 connected to 23 Relay output 3 programmable Default operation Auxiliary motor switched on gt 25 connected to 27 Relay output 1 programmable Output signals Jumper setting Analog output AO1 Frequency J1 Analog output AO2 Actual 1 Sh Al1 0 10V e Relay output 1 Running 9 gt AI2 0 4 20 mA e Relay output 2 Fault 1 or e Relay output 3 Aux motor ON J1 E ol A1 0 10 V n TI Al2 0 4 20 mA Note Use the following switch on order 1 EXT1 EXT2 2 Run Enable
50. 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz U1 60 0 Hz 8111 START FREQ 3 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz U1 60 0 Hz 8112 LOW FREQ 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz U1 30 0 Hz 8113 Low FREQ 2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz U1 30 0 Hz 8114 LOW FREQ 3 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz U1 30 0 Hz 8115 AUX MOT START D 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 5 0s 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 3 0s 8117 NR OF AUX MOT 0 4 1 1 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 1 TEST MODE 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1h 0 0 h NOT SEL 0 1 336 0 h 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL 0 0 100 0 0 1 50 0 8120 INTERLOCKS 0 6 1 4 DI4 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL 0 2 NO 1 YES 1 O NO 8122 PFC START DELAY 0 00 10 00 s 0 01s 0 50 s 8123 PFC ENABLE O NOT SEL 1 ACTIVE 1 O NOT SEL 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 1800 0 s 0 1s 0 0 s NOT SEL 8125 DECIN AUX START 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 1800 0 s 0 1s 0 0 s NOT SEL 8126 TMED AUTOCHNG 0 4 1 O NOT SEL 8127 MOTORS 1 7 1 2 8128 AUX START ORDER 1 EVEN RUNTIME 2 RELAY ORDER 1 1 EVEN RUNTIME Group 98 OPTIONS 9802 COMM PROT SEL O NOT SEL 1 STD MODBUS 1 O NOT SEL 4 EXT FBA Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 83 Complete parameter descriptions This section describes the actual signals and parameters for ACQ550 Group 99 START UP DATA This group defines special start up data required to setup the drive enter motor information Code Description 9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language ACQ Control Panel ACQ CP AQ
51. ACQ550 x1 Input current Input power mains fuses see below A IEC 60269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann type 04A6 2 4 6 10 10 JJS 10 06A6 2 6 6 07A5 2 7 5 012A 2 11 8 16 15 JJS 15 017A 2 16 7 25 25 JJS 25 024A 2 24 2 25 JJS 25 031A 2 30 8 40 40 JJS 40 046A 2 46 2 63 60 JJS 60 059A 2 59 4 80 JJS 80 075A 2 74 8 80 100 JJS 100 088A 2 88 0 100 110 JJS 110 114A 2 114 125 150 JJS 150 143A 2 143 200 200 JJS 200 178A 2 178 250 250 JJS 250 221A 2 221 315 300 JJS 300 248A 2 248 350 JJS 350 00467918 xls C ACQ550 x1 Input current Input power mains fuses see below A IEC 60269 gG A ULClass T A Bussmann type 03A3 4 3 3 10 10 JJS 10 04A1 4 4 1 06A9 4 6 9 08A8 4 8 8 10 10 JJS 15 012A 4 11 9 16 16 JJS 15 015A 4 15 4 16 16 JJS 20 023A 4 23 25 30 JJS 30 031A 4 31 35 35 JJS 40 038A 4 38 50 50 JJS 50 045A 4 45 60 JJS 60 059A 4 59 63 80 JJS 80 072A 4 72 80 90 JJS 90 078A 4 77 100 JJS 100 097A 4 97 125 80 JJS 110 Technical data ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 253 ACQ550 x1 Input current Input power mains fuses see below A IEC 60269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann type 125A 4 125 160 150 JJS 150 157A 4 157 200 160 JJS 200 180A 4 180 250 200 JJS 250 246A 4 246 250 250 JJS 250 Fuses 500 600 V drives 00467918 xls C ACQ550 U1 Input current I
52. ACT1 INPUT Defines the source for actual value 1 ACT1 See also parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 1 Al1 Uses analog input 1 for ACT1 2 Al2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT1 3 CURRENT Uses current for ACT1 4 TORQUE Uses torque for ACT1 5 POWER Uses power for ACT1 6 COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT1 7 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT1 4017 ACT2 INPUT Defines the source for actual value 2 ACT2 See also parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM 1 Al1 Uses analog input 1 for ACT2 2 Al2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT2 3 CURRENT Uses current for ACT2 4 TORQUE Uses torque for ACT2 5 POWER Uses power for ACT2 6 COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT2 7 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT2 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM ACT 26 Sets the minimum value for ACT1 Scales the source signal used as the actual value ACT1 defined P4019 oes L by parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT For parameter 4016 values 6 COMM ACT 1 and 7 COMM ACT 2 scaling is not done Par 4016 Source Source min Source max P 4018 1 Analog input 1 1301 MINIMUM Al1 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 2 Analog input 2 1304 MINIMUM AI2 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 Source min Source max 3 Current 0 2 nominal current Source signal 4 Torque 2 nominal torque 2 nominal torque 5 Power 2 nominal power 2 nominal power ACT1 4 B See the fig
53. Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command e See DI1 above 1 DH INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command De activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command Activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command e See DI1 INV above 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR Sets the maximum supplied current during torque boost e See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 115 Code Description 2112 ZERO SPEED DELAY Defines the delay for the Zero Speed Delay function If parameter value is set to zero the Zero Speed Delay function is disabled The function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential During the delay the drive knows accurately the rotor position No Zero Speed Delay With Zero Speed Delay Speed Speed Speed controller switched off Speed controller remains live Motor coasts to stop Motor is decelerated to true O speed A Zero Speed TENER Y Zero Speed gt t os tt Delay Zero speed delay can be used e g with jogging function or mechanical brake No Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the motor actual speed falls below an internal limit called Zero Speed th
54. Feedback is below wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 P 4025 WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up ot 4026 WAKE UP DELAY A pian Defines the wake up delay a deviation from the setpoint greater Parameters 152 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Process PID PID1 has two separate sets of parameters PID set 1 and PID set 2 e PID set 1 uses parameters 4001 4026 e PID set 2 uses parameters 4101 4126 PID 1 PARAM SET defines which set is selected O SET 1 PID Set 1 parameters 4001 4026 is active 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for PID Set selection Activating the digital input selects PID Set 2 De activating the digital input selects PID Set 1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID Set selection See DI1 above 7 SET 2 PID Set 2 parameters 4101 4126 is active 8 11 TIMED FUNC 1 4 Defines the Timed function as the control for the PID Set selection Timed function de activated PID Set 1 Timed function activated PID Set 2 e See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 12 2 ZONE MIN The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and feedback 2 The drive will control the zone and select the set that has a larger difference A positive difference a setpoint higher than the feedback is always larger than a nega
55. GAIN 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 5 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 3 0s 4101 GAIN 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 5 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 3 0s 8123 PFC ENABLE O NOTSEL O NOTSEL 0 NOT SEL O NOT SEL 0 NOTSEL 0 NOT SEL 1 ACTIVE Application macros 68 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Application macros ACQ550 U1 Users Manual 69 Parameters Complete parameter list The following table lists all parameters Table header abbreviations are e S Parameters can be modified only when the drive is stopped e User Space to enter desired parameter values Some values depend on the construction as indicated in the table by U1 Setup and parts specific to US installation and NEMA compliance Refer to the type designation on the drive for example ACQ550 U1 08A8 4 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S Group 99 START UP DATA 9901 LANGUAGE 0 16 0 3 1 O ENGLISH 9902 APPLIC MACRO 3 7 1 6 PID CONTROL Y 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 or 2 VECTOR SPEED 1 3 SCALAR FREQ Y 3 SCALAR FREQ 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT U1 yyyy 2 115 345 V 1V U1 yyyy 2 230 V Y U1 yyyy 4 230 690 V U1 yyyy 4 460 V U1 yyyy 6 288 862 V U1 yyyy 6 575 V 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 0 2 long 2 0 gt long 0 1A 1 0 long Y 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 10 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz U1 60 0 Hz Y 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 50 3000
56. N A TORQLIM2 N A 00017 CONTROL WORD Bit 16 Does not apply FBLOCAL CTL Does not apply 00018 CONTROL WORD Bit 17 FBLOCAL REF 00019 CONTROL WORD Bit 18 START DISABLE1 00020 CONTROL WORD Bit 19 START DISABLE2 00021 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 00032 00033 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 00034 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 00035 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 00036 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 00037 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5 00038 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 1 Active low For the Oxxxx registers e Status is always readable e Forcing is allowed by user configuration of the drive for fieldbus control e Additional relay outputs are added sequentially Embedded fieldbus 192 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual The ACQ550 supports the following Modbus function codes for coils Function code Description 01 Read coil status 05 Force single coil 15 OxOF Hex Force multiple coils 1xxxx Mapping Modbus discrete inputs The drive maps the following information to the 1xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Discrete Inputs bit wise map of the STATUS WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 inputs are reserved for this purpose e discrete hardware inp
57. PID 1 OUTPUT 1000 0 1000 0 0 1 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT 100 0 100 0 0 1 0128 PID 1 SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 0129 PID 2 SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0130 PID 1 FBK Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 0131 PID2FBK Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0132 PID 1 DEVIATION Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 0133 PID 2 DEVIATION Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0134 COMM RO WORD 0 65535 1 0135 COMM VALUE 1 32768 32767 1 0136 COMM VALUE 2 32768 32767 1 0137 PROCESS VAR 1 1 0138 PROCESS VAR 2 1 0139 PROCESS VAR 3 1 0140 RUN TIME 0 00 499 99 kh 0 01 kh 0141 MWH COUNTER 0 65535 MWh 1 MWh 0142 REVOLUTION CNTR 0 65535 Mrev 1 Mrev 0143 DRIVE ON TIME HI 0 65535 days 1 day 0144 DRIVE ON TIME LO 00 00 00 23 59 58 1 2s 0145 MOTOR TEMP Par 3501 1 3 10 200 C 1 Par 3501 4 0 5000 ohm Par 3501 5 6 0 1 0146 MECH ANGLE 0 32768 1 0147 MECH REVS 32768 32767 1 0148 Z PLS DETECTED O NOT DETECTED 1 DETECTED 1 0150 CB TEMP 20 0 150 0 C 1 0 C 0153 MOT THERM STRESS 0 0 100 0 0 196 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 32768 32767 1 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 32768 32767 1 0174 SAVED KWH 0 0 999 9 kWh 0 1 kWh 0175 SAVED MWH 0 65535 MWh 1 MWh 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0 0 999 9 0 1
58. Parameter Value setting Al reference scaling 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD Max ref Fieldbus Resultant ref reference 1 63 100 Max ref 100 163 1003 DIRECTION 1003 DIRECTION 2 REVERSE 3 REQUEST Max ref Fieldbus reference 163 100 Max ref Max ref Fieldbus 163 100 reference Max ref Resultant ref 163 Fieldbus adapter ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Actual Value 227 As described earlier in section Control interface on page 210 Actual Values are words containing drive values Actual Value scaling The scaling of the integers sent to the fieldbus as Actual Values depends on the resolution of the selected drive parameter Except as noted for ACT1 and ACT2 below scale the feedback integer using the resolution listed for the parameter in section Complete parameter list on page 69 For example Feedback integer Parameter resolution Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 2 0 1 mA 10 0 1 10 0 1 1 Data words 5 and 6 are scaled as follows ABB Drives profile Virtual addresses of the drive control Contents Scaling ACT1 ACTUAL SPEED 20000 20000 par 1105 par 1105 ACT2 TORQUE 10000 10000 100 100 The virtual address area of the drive control is allocated as follows Control Word Reference 1
59. TIMED FUN1 amp 2 Selects a constant speed or the external reference depending on the state of Timed Functions 1 amp 2 and constant speed mode See parameter 1209 TIMED MODE sEL and Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 1 DI1 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input D11 Inverse operation Digital input de activated Constant Speed 1 activated 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input See above 7 DI1 2 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI1 and DI2 Inverse operation uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated DI1 DI2 Function 1 1 No constant speed O 1 Constant speed 1 1202 1 O Constant speed 2 1203 0 O Constant speed 3 1204 8 DI2 3 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI2 and DI3 e See above DI1 2 INV for code 9 DI3 4 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DIS and DI4 e See above DI1 2 INV for code 10 DI4 5 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI4 and DI5 e See above DI1 2 INV for code 11 DI5 6 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI5 and DI6 e See above DI1 2 INV for code 12 DI1 2 3 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI DI2 and DIS e Inverse operation uses three digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI act
60. the disconnecting device must be one of the following types aswitch disconnector of utilization category AC 23B EN 60947 3 a disconnector having an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the disconnector EN 60947 3 acircuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947 2 Other regions The disconnecting device must conform to the applicable safety regulations Fuses Branch circuit protection must be provided by the end user and sized per national and local electric codes The following tables provide fuse recommendations for short circuit protection on the drive s input power The rated fuse currents given in the tables are the maximums for the mentioned fuse types If smaller fuse ratings are used check that the fuse rms current rating is larger than the input current Technical data 252 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Check that the operating time of the fuse is below 0 5 seconds The operating time depends on the fuse type the supply network impedance as well as the cross sectional area material and length of the supply cable In case the 0 5 seconds operating time is exceeded with the gG or T fuses ultra rapid aR fuses will in most cases reduce the operating time to an acceptable level Fuses 208 240 V drives Fuses 380 480 V drives
61. 0 0 HZ O rpm 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 60 0 s 4025 WAKE UP DEV Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 0 0 4007 4026 WAKE UP DELAY 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 6 14 1 O SET 1 Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 4101 GAIN 0 1 100 0 0 1 1 0 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 3600 0 s 0 1 s 60 0 s 4103 DERIVATION TIME 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 4104 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 1 0s 4105 ERROR VALUE INV O NO 1 YES 1 0 NO 4106 UNITS 0 127 1 4 96 4107 UNIT SCALE 0 4 1 1 Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 79 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 4108 0 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 0 0 4107 4109 100 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 100 0 4107 4110 SET POINT SEL 0 2 8 17 19 20 1 1 A11 Y 4111 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 40 0 4107 4112 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 0 4113 SETPOINT MAX 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 0 4114 FBK SEL 1 13 1 1 ACT1 4115 FBK MULTIPLIER 0 000 NOT SEL 32 768 32 767 0 001 0 000 NOT SEL 4116 ACT1 INPUT 1 7 1 2 A12 Y 4117 JACT2 INPUT 1 7 1 2 A12 Y 4118 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4119 ACT1 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4120 ACT2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4121 ACT2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000
62. 0 25 6 5 0 25 9 0 0 35 1 Center to center dimension Technical data 274 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Outside dimensions Drives with IP21 UL type 1 enclosures Types ACQ550 x1 246A 4 and ACQ550 01 290A 4 frame size R6 D e z s I E LL T l D de X0031 IP21 UL type 1 dimensions for each frame size R1 R2 R3 RA R5 R6 Ref H mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in 125 4 9 125 4 9 203 8 0 203 8 0 265 104 302 11 9 H 330 13 0 430 16 9 490 19 3 596 23 5 602 23 7 700 27 6 H2 315 12 4 415 16 3 478 18 8 583 23 0 578 22 8 698 27 5 H3 369 14 5 469 18 5 583 23 0 689 27 1 736 29 0 888 35 0 D 212 8 3 222 8 7 231 9 1 262 10 3 286 11 3 400 15 8 00467918 xls C 1 ACQ550 x1 246A 4 and ACQ550 01 290A 4 979 mm 38 5 in Technical data ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 275 Drives with IP54 UL type 12 enclosures gu dun p Type ACQ550 01 290A 4 IP54 UL type 12 not available frame size R6 i r LJT H3 Li w IP54 UL type 12 Dimensions for each frame size Ref R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R62 mm _
63. 15 11 70 2 0 15 11 R6 95 3 03 105 350MCM 40 30 105 350MCM 40 30 00467918 xls C Aluminium cable cannot be used with frame sizes R1 R5 because of its lower capacity Aluminium cable cannot be used with type ACQ550 01 290A 4 because of the terminal size 3 See section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 257 Note See the recommended cable sizes for different load currents in section nput power cables wiring on page 254 Technical data ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 257 Power terminal considerations R6 frame size WARNING For R6 power terminals if screw on terminal lugs are supplied they can only be used for wire sizes that are 95 mm 3 0 AWG or larger Smaller wires will loosen and may damage the drive They require crimp on ring lugs as described below Crimp on ring lugs 2 E On the R6 frame size if screw on terminal lugs are HA 2 supplied but the cable size used is less than 95 B mm 3 0 AWG or if no screw on terminal lugs 3 are supplied at all use crimp on ring lugs 4 according to the following procedure mbagal 1 Select appropriate ring lugs from the following table Remove the screw on terminal lugs if supplied 3 Attach the ring lugs to the drive end of the cables Isolate the ends of the ring lugs with insulating tape or shrink tubing 5 Attach the ring lugs to the drive
64. 2 Sets the second minimum limit for torque 96 Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque Parameters 112 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 Sets the first maximum limit for torque Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 Sets the second maximum limit for torque 96 Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 113 Group 21 START STOP This group defines how the motor starts and stops The ACQ550 supports several start and stop modes Code 2101 Description START FUNCTION Selects the motor start method The valid options depend on the value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 AUTO Selects the automatic start mode e Vector control mode Optimal start in most cases The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor SCALAR FREQ mode Immediate start from zero frequency Identical to selection 8 RAMP 2 DC MAGN Selects the DC Magnetizing start mode Note The DC Magnetizing start mode cannot start a rotating motor Note The drive starts when the set pre magnetizing time parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME has passed even if motor magnetization is not complete e Vector control modes Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magneti
65. 281 2 12 kHz switching frequency is not available 3 Not tested Sine filters further extend the cable lengths Under heading Operational limits the Basic unit columns define the cable lengths with which the basic drive unit works without problems within the drive specification without installing any further options Column With du dt filters defines the cable lengths when an external du dt filter is used The columns under heading EMC limits show the maximum cable lengths with which the units have been tested for EMC emissions The factory guarantees that these cable lengths meet the EMC standard requirements If external sine filters are installed longer cable lengths can be used With sine filters the limiting factors are the voltage drop of the cable which has to be taken into account in engineering as well as the EMC limits where applicable The default switching frequency is 4 kHz WARNING Using a motor cable longer than specified in the table above may cause permanent damage to the drive Examples for using the table Requirements Checking and conclusions R1 frame size Check operational limits for R1 and 8 kHz gt for a 150 m 490 ft 8 kHz fsw cable a du dt filter is needed Category C2 C H Check EMC limits gt EMC requirements for Category C2 are met 150 m 490 ft cable vith a 150 m 490 ft cable Technical data ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 261
66. 37 DEVICENET 101 CONTROLNET 128 ETHERNET 132 PROFINET 135 EthercAT 136 EPL Ethernet POWERLINK 144 CC Link 5102 FB PAR 2 FB PAR 26 Refer to communication module documentation for more information on these parameters 5126 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH Validates any changed fieldbus parameter settings O DONE Refreshing done 1 REFRESH Refreshing After refreshing the value reverts automatically to DONE 5128 FILE CPI FW REV Displays the CPI firmware revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter configuration file Format is xyz where x major revision number y minor revision number e z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 5129 FILE CONFIG ID Displays the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module s configuration file identification e File configuration information is drive application program dependent 5130 FILE CONFIG REV Contains the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module configuration file Example 1 revision 1 5131 FBA STATUS Contains the status of the adapter module O IDLE Adapter not configured 1 EXECUT INIT Adapter is initializing 2 TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive 3 CONFIG ERROR Adapter configuration error e The revision code of the adapter s CPI firmware revision is older than required CPI firmware version defined in the drive s configuration file par
67. 40001 bits 0 3 40031 bits O 1 with Ext1 selected 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 10 COMM Start Stop by fieldbus 40001 bits 0 3 40031 bits O 1 with Ext2 selected 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction by fieldbus 4002 4003 40031 bit 3 1 For Modbus the protocol reference can depend on the profile used hence two columns in these tables One column refers to the ABB Drives profile selected when parameter 5305 0 ABB DRV LIM or 5305 2 ABB DRV FULL The other column refers to the DCU profile selected when parameter 5305 1 DCU PROFILE See section ABB control profiles technical data on page 197 2 The reference provides direction control a negative reference provides reverse rotation Embedded fieldbus 182 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Input reference select Using the fieldbus to provide input references to the drive requires e drive parameter values set as defined below e fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 8 COMM Reference set selection by fieldbus 40001 bit 11 40031 bit 5 1103 REF1 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 1 by fieldbus 40002 1106 REF2 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 2 by fieldbus 40003 Reference Sc
68. 4025 WAKE UP DEV for at least this time period re starts the PID controller Code Description 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL A ip 4024 A Sets the motor speed frequency that enables the PID sleep Aag function a motor speed frequency below this level for at least UN t P 4024 the time period 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY enables the PID sleep bai function stopping the drive P 4023 Requires 4022 7 INTERNAL ct See the figure A PID output level B PID process feedback 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY i B Sets the time delay for the PID sleep function a motor speed N gt P 4026 frequency below 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL for at least this time period Setpoint enables the PID sleep function stopping the drive P 4025 e See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above 4025 WAKE UP DEV Stop Defines the wake up deviation a deviation from the setpoint Start greater than this value for at least the time period 4026 WAKE UP DELAY re starts the PID controller e Parameters 4006 and 4007 define the units and scale C e Parameter 4005 0 P 4025 4005 zA Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation Setpoint e Parameter 4005 1 P 4025 4005 0 Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation D Wake up level can be above or below setpoint mi See the figures e C Wake up level when parameter 4005 1 e D Wake up level when parameter 4005 0 e E Feedback is above wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up e F
69. 7 constant speeds ranging from 0 500 Hz or 0 30000 rpm Values must be positive No negative speed values for constant speeds Constant speed selections are ignored if the process PID reference is followed or the drive is in local control mode or PFC Pump Fan Control is active Note Parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 acts also as a so called fault speed which may be activated if the control signal is lost For example see parameters 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION 3002 PANEL COMM ERR and 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Code 1201 Description CONST SPEED SEL Defines the digital inputs used to select Constant Speeds See general comments in introduction O NOT SEL Disables the constant speed function 1 DI1 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI1 Digital input activated Constant Speed 1 activated 2 6 DI2 DI6 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI2 DI6 See above 7 DI1 2 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI1 and DI2 Uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated DI DI2 Function 0 O No constant speed 1 O Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 Constant speed 3 1204 Can be set up as a so called fault speed which is activated if the control signal is lost Refer to parameter 3001 AI MIN function and parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 8 DI2 3 Selects one of three Constan
70. ACT2 ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 3 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 plus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 4 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 times ACT2 provides the feedback signal 5 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 divided by ACT2 provides the feedback signal 6 MIN ACT1 2 The smaller of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 7 MAX ACT1 2 The greater of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 8 sqrt AcT1 2 Square root of the value for ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 9 sqA1 sqA2 Square root of ACT1 plus the square root of ACT2 provides the feedback signal 10 sqrt AcT1 Square root of ACT1 provides the feedback signal 11 COMM FBK 1 Signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 provides the feedback signal 12 COMM FBK 2 Signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 provides the feedback signal 13 AVE ACT1 2 The average of ACT1 and ACT2 provides the feedback signal 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER Defines an extra multiplier for the PID feedback value FBK defined by parameter 4014 Used mainly in applications where the flow is calculated from the pressure difference 0 000 NOT SEL The parameter has no effect 1 000 used as the multiplier 32 768 32 767 Multiplier applied to the signal defined by parameter 4014 FBK SEL Example FBK Multiplier x JA1 A2 Parameters 150 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 4016
71. Detection is more sensitive when the drive is not running and can produce false positives Possible corrections Check for correct faults in the input wiring Verify that motor cable does not exceed maximum specified length e A delta grounded input power supply and motor cables with high capacitance may result in erroneous error reports during non running tests To disable response to fault monitoring when the drive is not running use parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT To disable response to all ground fault monitoring use parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT Note Disabling earth fault ground fault may void the warranty 17 OBSOLETE Not used 18 THERM FAIL Internal fault The thermistor measuring the internal temperature of the drive is open or shorted Contact your local ABB representative 19 OPEX LINK Internal fault A communication related problem has been detected on the fiber optic link between the control and OINT boards Contact your local ABB representative 20 OPEX PWR Internal fault Exceptionally low voltage detected on the OINT power supply Contact your local ABB representative 21 CURR MEAS Internal fault Current measurement is out of range Contact your local ABB representative 22 SUPPLY PHASE Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high Check for and correct Missing mains phase Blown fuse 23 OBSOLETE 24 OVERSPEED Motor speed is greater than 120 of the larger in magnitude of 2001 MINIMUM SPEED or 2002 MAXIMUM SP
72. EFB supported features 189 EFB technical data 189 motor checking insulation 26 compatibility 14 id run parameter 84 load curve break point frequency 125 load curve max fault parameter 125 load curve zero speed load 125 maintenance triggers 123 nominal current parameter 83 nominal frequency parameter 83 nominal power parameter 84 nominal speed parameter 84 nominal voltage parameter 83 phase fault code 235 requirements eee eee 14 stall fault code ooo o oo 234 thermal protection 261 motor cable checking insulation 26 lengthi z damag ana ace eue AA pana 259 max length oooooooommo oo 259 requirements a 262 requirements EMC 263 motor connection lugs for RE 257 terminal size o oooooooooooo o 256 torque enr ae E ERE aU ae 256 motor control parameter group 121 control mode parameter 83 IR compensation parameters 121 motor potentiometer macro 61 motor temperature measure parameter group 135 alarm limit parameter 136 data parameter 0 00 oo 87 fault limit parameter
73. MINIMUM FREQ 1 8109 START FREQ 1 8113 LOW FREQ 2 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary motor e See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The second auxiliary motor stops if e Two auxiliary motors are running e ACQB550 output frequency drops below the limit 8113 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8113 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8114 LOW FREQ 3 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third auxiliary motor See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The third auxiliary motor stops if e Three auxiliary motors are running e ACQB550 output frequency drops below the limit 8114 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8114 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8115 AUX MOT START D Sets the Start Delay for the auxiliary motors e The output frequency must remain above the start frequency limit parameter 8109 8110 or 8111 for this time period before the auxiliary motor starts e See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation 8116 AUX MOT STOP D Sets the Stop Delay for the auxiliary motors e The output frequency must remain below the low frequency limit parameter 8112 8113 or 8114 for this time period before the auxiliary motor stops See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation
74. Manual 119 Code Description 2305 2304 ACC COMPENSATION Sets the derivation time for acceleration compensation Adding a derivative of the reference to the output of the speed controller compensates for inertia during acceleration 2303 DERIVATION TIME describes the principle of derivative action Rule of thumb Set this parameter between 50 and 10096 of the sum of the mechanical time constants for the motor and the driven machine The figure shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp No acceleration compensation Acceleration compensation A A Speed reference Actual speed t t Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set acceleration compensation AUTOTUNE RUN Starts automatic tuning of the speed controller 0 OFF Disables the Autotune creation process Does not disable the operation of Autotune settings 1 ON Activates speed controller autotuning Automatically reverts to OFF Procedure Note The motor load must be connected Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40 of the rated speed Change the autotuning parameter 2305 to ON The drive e Accelerates the motor e Calculates values for proportional gain integration time and acceleration compensation e Changes parameters 2301 2302 and 2304 to these values Resets 2305 to OFF Parameters 120 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual
75. Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU STATUS WORD profiles STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 1 MSW See parameter 0304 Embedded fieldbus ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 195 For the Modbus protocol drive parameters in Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL report the parameter mapping to 4xxxx Registers Code Description 5310 EFB PAR 10 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40005 5311 EFB PAR 11 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40006 5312 EFB PAR 12 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40007 5313 EFB PAR 13 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40008 5314 EFB PAR 14 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40009 5315 EFB PAR 15 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40010 5316 5317 5318 EFB PAR 16 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40011 EFB PAR 17 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40012 EFB PAR 18 Sets additional delay in milliseconds before the ACQ550 begins transmitting response to the master request 5319 EFB PAR 19 Holds a copy in hex of the CONTROL WORD Modbus register 40001 5320 EFB PAR 20 Holds a copy in hex of the STATUS WORD Modbus register 40004 Except where restricted by the drive all parameters are available for both reading and writing The parameter writes are verified for the correct
76. O Type designation Installation ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 13 Type designation Use the following chart to interpret the type designation found on both the type designation and the serial number label ACQ550 U1 08A8 4 J404 AC Standard Drive 550 product series Construction region specific U1 Setup and parts specific to US installation and NEMA compliance Output current rating e g 08A8 8 8 A see section Ratings on page 247 for details Voltage rating 2 208 240 VAC 4 380 480 VAC 6 500 600 V AC Options Examples of options B055 IP54 UL type 12 no specification IP21 UL type 1 0J400 No control panel L511 OREL 01 Relay output extension K451 RDNA 01 DeviceNet Ratings and frame size The chart in section Ratings on page 247 lists technical specifications and identifies the drive s frame size significant since some instructions in this document vary depending on the drive s frame size To read the ratings table you need the Output current rating entry from the type designation Also when using the ratings table note that the table is broken into sections based on the drive s Voltage rating Serial number The format of the drive serial number shown on the labels is described below Serial number is of format CYYWWXXXXX where C Country of manufacture YY Year of manufacture WW Week of manufacture 01 02 03 for wee
77. PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 DI6 Free DI4 DI6 Free 3 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DIT First PFC Relay pi2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 4 DIT Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay pi2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DIS Third PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI4 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 5 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DIS Third PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI4 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 Fifth PFC Relay DI6 Fifth PFC Relay DI6 Free 6 Not allowed DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay DI4 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 Fifth PFC Relay DI6 Sixth PFC Relay Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 171 Code Description 2 DI2 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI2 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on e the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P
78. Parameters 100 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS This group defines the limits and the filtering for analog inputs Code Description 1301 MINIMUM Al Defines the minimum value of the analog input Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range See example below e The minimum analog input signal corresponds to 1104 REF1 MIN or 1107 REF2 MIN MINIMUM Al cannot be greater than MAXIMUM Al These parameters reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference See the figure at parameter 1104 Example To set the minimum analog input value to 4 mA Configure the analog input for 0 20 mA current signal e Calculate the minimum 4 mA as a percent of full range 20 mA 4 mA 20 mA 100 20 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 Defines the maximum value of the analog input Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range The maximum analog input signal corresponds to 1105 REF1 MAX or 1108 REF2 MAX See the figure at parameter 1104 1303 FILTER AN D ya Unfiltered signal Defines the filter time constant for analog input 1 A11 e The filtered signal reaches 63 of a step change within the time PA specified 100 63 D Filtered signal l l pi Time constant 1304 MINIMUM Al2 Defines the minimum value of the analog input e See MINIMUM Al1 above 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 Defines the maxim
79. RCCL 01 CC Link Adapter Module User s Manual 3AUA0000061340 English RCNA 01 ControlNet Adapter User s Manual 3AFE64506005 English RDNA 01 DeviceNet Adapter User s Manual 3AFE64504223 English RECA 01 EtherCAT Adapter Module User s Manual 3AUA0000043520 English Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 ACS55 ACS150 ACS310 ACS320 ACS350 ACS550 ACH550 and ACQ550 3AFE68735190 English CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation e V CC Link is a trademark of CC Link Partner Association ControlNet M is a trademark of ODVA DeviceNet is a trademark of ODVA DRIVECOM is a registered trademark of DRIVECOM User Group e V EtherCAT is a registered trademark of Beckhoff EtherNet IP is a trademark of ODVA Modbus and Modbus TCP are registered trademarks of Schneider Automation Inc PROFIBUS PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO are registered trademarks of Profibus International ACQ550 U1 Drives 1 200 hp User s Manual 3AUA0000145616 Rev A EN EFFECTIVE 10 1 2013 2009 ABB Oy All Rights Reserved ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 5 Safety Use of warnings and notes BB gt e BB There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual e Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact or give information on a subject e Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death and or damage to the equipment They also tell you how
80. REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FORWARD 2 DI1 2 Two wire Start Stop Direction e Start Stop is through digital input DI1 DI1 activated Start DIT de activated Stop e Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input D12 DI2 activated Reverse de activated Forward 3 DI1P 2P Three wire Start Stop e Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse Start is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI1 In order to start the drive the digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the pulse in DI1 Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DI2 Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FORWARD 4 DI1P 2P 3 Three wire Start Stop Direction e Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons as described for DI1P 2P e Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DIS DI3 activated Reverse de activated Forward 5 DI1P 2P 3P Start Forward Start Reverse and Stop e Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with two separate momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse e Start Forward command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI1 In order to sta
81. STATUS WORD Bit 26 Reserved REQ CTL Embedded fieldbus ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 193 Modbus Internal location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE ref all profiles 5305 0 OR 2 5305 1 10028 STATUS WORD Bit 27 Reserved REQ_REF1 10029 STATUS WORD Bit 28 Reserved REQ_REF2 10030 STATUS WORD Bit 29 Reserved REQ_REF2EXT 10031 STATUS WORD Bit 30 Reserved ACK_STARTINH 10032 STATUS WORD Bit 31 Reserved ACK_OFF_ILCK 10033 DI1 DI1 DI1 10034 DI2 DI2 DI2 10035 DI3 DI3 DI3 10036 DI4 DI4 DI4 10037 DI5 DI5 DI5 10038 DIG DI6 DI6 1 Active low For the 1xxxx registers e Additional discrete inputs are added sequentially The ACQ550 supports the following Modbus function codes for discrete inputs Function code 02 Description Read input status 3xxxx Mapping Modbus inputs The drive maps the following information to the 3xxxx Modbus addresses called Modbus input registers any user defined analog inputs The following table summarizes the input registers Modbus ACQ550 reference all profiles Remarks 30001 All This register shall report the level of Analog Input 1 0 100 30002 Al2 This register shall report the level of Analog Input 2 0 100 The AC 550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 3xxxx registers Function code 04 Description Read 3xxxx input status 4xxxx Register mapping The
82. See chapter Diagnostics on page 231 for a complete description Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT1 and 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT2 store the most recent faults e For fieldbus access the drive reports faults as a hexadecimal value assigned and coded according to the DRIVECOM specification See the table below Not all profiles support requesting fault codes using this specification For profiles that support this specification the profile documentation defines the proper fault request process Fieldbus fault code Drive fault code DRIVECOM specification 1 OVERCURRENT 2310h 2 DC OVERVOLT 3210h 3 DEV OVERTEMP 4210h 4 SHORT CIRC 2340h 5 Reserved FF6Bh 6 DC UNDERVOLT 3220h 7 Al1 LOSS 8110h 8 Al2 LOSS 8110h 9 MOT OVERTEMP 4310h 10 PANEL LOSS 5300h 11 ID RUN FAIL FF84h 12 MOTOR STALL 7121h 14 EXT FAULT 1 9000h 15 EXT FAULT 2 9001h 16 EARTH FAULT 2330h 17 Obsolete FF6Ah 18 THERM FAIL 5210h 19 OPEX LINK 7500h 20 OPEX PWR 5414h 21 CURR MEAS 2211h 22 SUPPLY PHASE 3130h 23 OBSOLETE 7301h 24 OVERSPEED 7310h 25 Reserved FF80h 26 DRIVE ID 5400h Fieldbus adapter 218 Drive fault code Fieldbus fault code DRIVECOM specification 27 CONFIG FILE 630Fh 28 SERIAL 1 ERR 7510h 29 EFB CON FILE 6306h 30 FORCE TRIP FF90h 31 EFB 1 FF92h 32 EFB 2 FF93h 3
83. Sets the speed for DC Hold Requires that parameter 2104 DC HOLD CTL 1 DC HOLD 2106 DC CURR REF Defines the DC current control reference as a percentage of parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 2107 DC BRAKE TIME Defines the DC brake time after modulation has stopped if parameter 2104 is 2 DC BRAKING 2108 START INHIBIT Sets the Start inhibit function on or off If the drive is not actively started and running the Start inhibit function ignores a pending start command in any of the following situations and a new start command is required e A fault is reset Run Enable parameter 1601 activates while start command is active Mode changes from local to remote Control switches from EXT1 to EXT2 Control switches from EXT2 to EXT1 O OFF Disables the Start inhibit function 1 ON Enables the Start inhibit function 2109 EMERG STOP SEL Defines control of the Emergency stop command When activated e Emergency stop decelerates the motor using the emergency stop ramp parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME e Requires an external stop command and removal of the emergency stop command before drive can restart O NOT SEL Disables the Emergency stop function through digital inputs 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command Activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command De activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command 2 6 DI2 DI6
84. U1 User s Manual 233 Fault code Fault name in panel Description and recommended corrective action DEV OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is overheated Temperature is at or above limit R1 R4 115 C 239 F R5 R6 125 C 257 F Check for and correct e Fan failure Obstructions in the air flow e Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink Excessive ambient temperature Excessive motor load SHORT CIRC RESERVED Fault current Check for and correct e A short circuit in the motor cable s or motor Supply disturbances Not used DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient Check for and correct Missing phase in the input power supply Blown fuse Undervoltage on mains Al1 LOSS Analog input 1 loss Analog input value is less than Al1 FAULT LIMIT 3021 Check for and correct Source and connection for analog input e Parameter settings for Al1 FAULT LIMIT 3021 and 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION AI2 LOSS MOT OVERTEMP Analog input 2 loss Analog input value is less than AI2 FAULT LIMIT 3022 Check for and correct Source and connection for analog input Parameter settings for AI2 FAULT LIMIT 3022 and 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION Motor is too hot based on either the drive s estimate or on temperature feedback Check for overloaded motor Adjust the parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 Check the temperature sensors and Gr
85. X1 1 10 kohm 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 Al External frequency reference 1 0 10 Vi ort 143 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 Al2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D H7 AO1 Output frequency 0 20 mA LT 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA t79 AGND Analog output circuit common 40 24v Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 411 GND Auxiliary voltage output common LL 2 DCOM Digital input common for all lb 113 DI1 Start Stop Activate to start 14 DI2 Fwd Rev Activate to reverse rotation direction 15 DI3 Constant speed selection 16 DI4 Constant speed selection 17 DI5 Ramp pair selection Activate to select 2nd acc dec ramp pair 18 DI6 Not used 19 ROIC Relay output 1 programmable ees T The eie o S 20 ROTA Default operation Has aa eo ld le 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 i 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Note 2 Code 23 RO2A Mn Default operation 0 open 1 connected 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 DI3 DI4 Output 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable o O Reference through AH 26 RO3A f Default operation IT JO CONSTSPEED 1 1202 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 271 D T CONST SPEED 2 1203 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 1 1 CONST SPEED 3 1204 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference Al1 Analog output AO1 Frequency J1 e Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog outpu
86. above 1512 FILTER AO2 Defines the filter time constant for A02 See FILTER A01 above Parameters 106 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS This group defines a variety of system level locks resets and enables Code Description 1601 RUN ENABLE Selects the source of the run enable signal O NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external run enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the run enable signal This digital input must be activated for run enable f the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal e See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the run enable signal Bit 6 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the run disable signal e See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the run enable signal This digital input must be de activated for run enable e f this digital input activates the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal e See DH INV above 1602 PARAMETER LOCK Determines if the control panel can change param
87. and 3 selected in the timer 23 T1 T2 T3 B Booster and Time Periods 1 2 and 3 selected in the timer 24 T4 B Booster and Time Period 4 selected in the timer 25 T1 T4 B Booster and Time Periods 1 and 4 selected in the timer 26 T2 T4 B Booster and Time Periods 2 and 4 selected in the timer 27 71 T2 T4 B Booster and Time Periods 1 2 and 4 selected in the timer 28 T3 T4 B Booster and Time Periods 3 and 4 selected in the timer 29 T1 T3 T4 B Booster and Time Periods 1 3 and 4 selected in the timer 30 T2 T3 T4 B Booster and Time Periods 2 3 and 4 selected in the timer 31 T11 2 3 4 B Booster and Time Periods 1 2 3 and 4 selected in the timer 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC e See parameter 3626 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC e See parameter 3626 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC e See parameter 3626 Parameters 142 Group 37 USER LOAD CURVE ACQ550 U1 User s Manual This group defines supervision of user adjustable load curves motor torque as a function of frequency The curve is defined by five points Code 3701 Description USER LOAD C MODE Supervision mode for the user adjustable load curves This functionality replaces the former underload supervision in Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS To emulate it see section Correspondence with the obsolete underload supervision on page 143 O NOT SEL Supervision is not active UNDERLOAD Supervision for the torque
88. as a ramp unless additional time is specified here to reach the maximum frequency A longer time provides a softer transition at each end of the slope The shape becomes an s curve Rule of thumb 1 5 is a suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the acceleration ramp time AP 0 0 LINEAR Specifies linear acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 pi 0 1 1000 0 S CURVE Specifies s curve acceleration deceleration ramps for A eeu ACCELER TIME T ramp pair 1 B 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 2 e See 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 e Used also as jogging acceleration time See 1004 JOGGING SEL 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 2 e See 2203 DECELER TIME 1 e Used also as jogging deceleration time See 1004 JOGGING SEL 2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 2 e See 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 117 Code Description 2208 EMERG DEC TIME Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for an emergency See parameter 2109 EMERG STOP SEL Ramp is linear 2209 RAMP INPUT 0 Defines control for forcing the speed to O with the currently used deceleration ramp see parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 O
89. be started History For reference the last three fault codes are stored into parameters 0401 0412 0413 For the most recent fault identified by parameter 0401 the drive stores additional data in parameters 0402 0411 to aid in troubleshooting a problem For example parameter 0404 stores the motor speed at the time of the fault Diagnostics 238 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual The ACQ Control Panel provides additional information about the fault history See section Fault History Mode on page 49 for more information To clear the fault history all of the Group 04 FAULT HISTORY parameters 1 Using the control panel in the Parameters mode select parameter 0401 2 Press EDIT 3 Press UP and DOWN at the same time 4 Press SAVE Correcting alarms The recommended corrective action for alarms is Determine if the alarm requires any corrective action action is not always required Use the table in section Alarm listing below to find and address the root cause of the problem Alarm listing The following table lists the alarms by code number and describes each Alarm code Display Description 2001 OVERCURRENT Current limiting controller is active Check for and correct Excessive motor load Insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Faulty motor motor cables or connections 2002 2003 OVERVOLTAGE UNDERVOLTAGE Overv
90. buttons and select SEL The different formats are displayed Select a format with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL to confirm the 8 selection Scroll to Set Date with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL Change the days months and year with the UP DOWN buttons and select OK to save the values The active value is 10 displayed in inverted color Scroll to Date Format with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL 11 CDa GPa Child Pld Pid CPld CP ld GF The Date formats are displayed Select a date format with the UP DOWN buttons and select OK to confirm the selection A 12 4 f Control panel ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 13 Select EXIT twice to return to the main menu O Settings Mode To view and edit the I O settings follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu Y Scroll to I O Settings with the UP DOWN buttons and select ENTER Scroll to the I O setting you want to view with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL Select the setting you want to view with the UP DOWN buttons and select OK You can change the value with the UP DOWN buttons and save it by selecting SAVE If you do not want to change the setting select CANCEL Select EXIT to return to the main menu Control panel 56 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Control panel ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 57 Application macros Macr
91. connect line power to the drive output terminals U2 V2 or W2 Line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the drive If frequent bypassing is required use mechanically interlocked switches or contactors WARNING Do not connect any motor with a nominal voltage less than one half of the drive s nominal input voltage WARNING Disconnect the drive before conducting any voltage tolerance Hi Pot test or insulation resistance Megger test on the motor or motor cables Do not conduct these tests on the drive Motor connection specifications Motor connection specifications Voltage U3 0 U 3 phase symmetrical Umax at the field weakening point Frequency 0 500 Hz Frequency resolution 0 01 Hz Current See section Ratings on page 247 Field weakening point 10 500 Hz Selectable See the availability in the table below 1 2 4 and 8 kHz 12 kHz 208 240 V All types Frame sizes R1 R4 in scalar control mode Switching frequency 380 480 V All types Frame sizes R1 R4 except ACQ550 01 097A 4 in scalar control mode 500 600 V All types Frame sizes R2 R4 in scalar control mode Cable temperature rating 90 C 194 F rating minimum Maximum motor cable See section Motor cable lengths on page 259 length Motor cable lengths Maximum motor cable lengths for 400 V and 600 V drives are given in the sections below In mult
92. control mode 380 480 V All types Frame sizes R1 R4 except ACQ550 01 097A 4 in scalar control mode 500 600 V All types Frame sizes R2 R4 in scalar control mode 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL i The switching frequency may be reduced if the ACQ550 limit R1 R4 drives see par 2606 internal temperature rises above a limit See the figure f This function allows the highest possible switching 12 kHz eae drives Spe pue frequency to be used based on operating conditions A Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic 8 kHz oe Drive noise temperature O OFF The function is disabled li eS 1 ON The switching frequency is limited according to i a the fig re 80 C 90 C 100 C T 2608 ISLIP COMP RATIO Sets gain for slip compensation in e A squirrel cage motor slips under load Increasing the frequency as the motor torque increases compensates for the slip e Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ O No slip compensation 1 200 Increasing slip compensation 100 means full slip compensation 2609 NOISE SMOOTHING This parameter introduces a random component to the switching frequency Noise smoothing distributes the acoustic motor noise over a range of frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise intensity The random component has an average of O Hz It is added to the switching frequency set by parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ This parameter has no effect if paramete
93. digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal e See DI INV above Controls the visibility of the following alarms 2001 Overcurrent alarm 2002 Overvoltage alarm e 2003 Undervoltage alarm 2009 Device overtemperature alarm For more information see section A arm listing on page 238 O NO The above alarms are suppressed 1 YES All of the above alarms are enabled 1612 FAN CONTROL Possibility to force the fan on By writing ON here the user can try to mitigate DC voltage fluctuations Parameters 110 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Group 20 LIMITS This group defines minimum and maximum limits to follow in driving the motor speed frequency current torque etc Code Description 2001 MINIMUM SPEED Speed Defines the minimum speed rpm allowed P 2002 A positive or zero minimum speed value defines two ranges one positive and one negative 2001 value is lt 0 Speed range allowed e A negative minimum speed value defines one speed range 0 Time See the figure P 2001 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED Speed 2001 value is gt O Defines the maximum speed rpm allowed P 2002 Speed range allowed P 2001 ae p Time P 2001 Speed range allowed P 2002 2003 MAX CURRENT Defines the maximum output current A supplied by the
94. drive maps its parameters and other data to the 4xxxx holding registers as follows e 40001 40099 map to drive control and actual values These registers are described in the table below e 40101 49999 map to drive parameters 0101 9999 Register addresses that do not correspond to drive parameters are invalid If there is an attempt to read or write outside the parameter addresses the Modbus interface returns an exception code to the controller Embedded fieldbus 194 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual The following table summarizes the 4xxxx drive control registers 40001 40099 for 4xxxx registers above 40099 see the drive parameter list e g 40102 is parameter 0102 Modbus register Access Remarks 40001 CONTROL WORD R W Maps directly to the profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 0 or 2 ABB Drives profile Parameter 5319 holds a copy in hex format 40002 Reference 1 R W Range 0 20000 scaled to 0 1105 REF1 MAX or 20000 0 scaled to 1105 REF1 MAX 0 40003 Reference 2 R W Range 0 10000 scaled to 0 1108 REF2 MAX or 10000 0 scaled to 1108 REF2 MAX 0 40004 STATUS WORD R Maps directly to the profile s STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 0 or 2 ABB Drives profile Parameter 5320 holds a copy in hex format 40005 Actual 1 R By default stores a copy of 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Use select using 5310 parameter 5310 to select a different actual
95. drive model The remedy is to perform backups only between drives of the same type ACQ Water ACS industrial or ACH HVAC and the same model all ACQ550 Too many differences The remedy is to manually define a new set or upload the set from a drive that more closely resembles the target drive Note If upload or download of parameters is aborted the partial parameter set is not implemented TIME amp DATE Set Mode The TIME amp DATE Set Mode is used for setting the time and date for the internal clock of the ACQ550 In order to use the timer functions of the ACQ550 the internal clock has to be set first Date is used to determine weekdays and is visible in Fault logs To set the clock follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu 1 Y Scroll to Time amp Date with the UP DOWN ra buttons and select ENTER to enter the cA 2 TIME amp DATE Set Mode GY Scroll to Clock Visibility with the UP ra DOWN buttons and select SEL to change EE 3 the visibility of the clock GY Y Control panel 54 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Scroll to Show Clock with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL to make the clock visible Scroll to Set Time with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL Change the hours and minutes with the UP DOWN buttons and select OK to save the values The active value is displayed in inverted color Scroll to Time Format with the UP DOWN
96. drive to the motor 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL Sets the DC overvoltage controller on or off e Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the DC bus voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the trip limit the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque by increasing output frequency O DISABLE Disables controller 1 ENABLE Enables controller Note If a braking chopper or a braking resistor is connected to the drive this parameter value must be set to O DISABLE to ensure proper operation of the chopper 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL Sets the DC undervoltage controller on or off When on If the DC bus voltage drops due to loss of input power the undervoltage controller decreases the motor speed in order to keep the DC bus voltage above the lower limit e When the motor speed decreases the inertia of the load causes regeneration back into the drive keeping the DC bus charged and preventing an undervoltage trip e The DC undervoltage controller increases power loss ride through on systems with a high inertia such as a centrifuge or a fan O DISABLE Disables controller 1 ENABLE TIME Enables controller with 500 ms time limit for operation 2 ENABLE Enables controller without maximum time limit for operation Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 111 Code Description 2007 MINIMUM FREQ Freq 2007 value is lt 0 Defines
97. e Error value Kp e Gain K 1 T Integration time 0 A Tp Derivation time 0 Error value 2302 2303 INTEGRATION TIME y A Controller output Sets the integration time for the speed 7 controller The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes for a constant Kp e error value Shorter integration times correct continuous errors faster Control becomes unstable if the integration time is too short Kp e The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step error remains constant Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE kya RUN to automatically set the integration time T Gain Ky 1 T Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation time 0 e Error value t DERIVATION TIME Sets the derivation time for the speed controller Derivative action makes the control more responsive to error value changes The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change If the derivation time is set to zero the controller works as a PI controller otherwise as a PID controller The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Gain Ky 1 T Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation time gt 0 T Sample time period 2 ms Ae Error value change between two samples e Error value Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s
98. e eee eee eee 280 start parameter group 113 aux motor PFC parameters 165 aux motor delay 166 control EFBcomm 055 181 control FBACOMM oo 213 DC magnetizing time parameter 113 delay PFC parameter 174 delay parameter 115 frequency PFC parameters 165 function parameter o o o o o 113 inhibit parameter 114 select enable source parameter 108 torque boost current parameter 114 start mode automatic 220 car DE ERAI e 113 automatic torque boost 113 DC magnetizing oo oooooooo o 113 flying start llle 113 start stop parameter group 113 start stop dir parameter group 92 starting order counter 169 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual start up data parameter group 83 guided ACQ Control Panel 33 limited ACQ Control Panel 35 state diagram comm EFB a 205 comm ABB drives 223 station id RS 232 parameter 158 status at fault history parameter 91 status word ABB drives FBA description 221 EFB comm definition 200 TR 211 FBA generic profile 228 stop parameter gr0UP o oooococooooo o 113 au
99. each combination of drive enclosure type IP21 UL type and IP54 UL type 12 and wiring type conduit or cable Be sure to select the appropriate procedure Determine electro magnetic compliance EMC requirements per local codes See section Motor cable requirements for CE amp C Tick compliance on page 263 In general Follow local codes for cable size Keep these four classes of wiring separated input power wiring motor wiring control communications wiring and braking unit wiring e When installing input power and motor wiring refer to the following as appropriate Terminal Description Specifications and notes U1 V1 W1 3 phase power supply input Input power connections on page 251 PE Protective Ground Ground connections on page 255 U2 V2 W2 Power output to motor Motor connections on page 259 The ACQ550 x1 xxxx 2 208 240 V series can be used with a single phase supply if output current is derated by 50 For single phase supply voltage connect power at U1 and W1 e To locate input power and motor connection terminals see section Power connection diagrams on page 21 For specifications on power terminals see section Drive s power connection terminals on page 256 e For corner grounded TN systems see section Corner grounded TN systems on page 255 e For IT systems see section IT systems on page 256 e For frame size R6 see section Power terminal considerations R6 fr
100. energy see energy saving scalar frequency mode 83 scaling actual value FBA ABB drives profile 227 actual value FBA generic profile 229 actual values EFBcomm 185 reference EFB ABB drives profile 206 reference FBA ABB drives profile 224 reference FBA generic profile 228 screw on terminal lugs 258 s curve ramp parameter 116 second environment C3 compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 281 C3 motor cable length 260 definition bo ad oa 281 sensor type parameter 136 sensorless vector control mode 83 serial 1 error fault code 28 188 serial 1 error fault code 235 serial communication see EFB embedded fieldbus see EFB drive parameters see FBA fieldbus adapter see FBA drive parameters serial number 2 20000 eee eae 12 13 SEMIGE ed eb ak emi eR i BBS bd DAG 295 setpoint maximum PID parameter 149 setpoint minimum PID parameter 149 setpoint select PID parameter 148 shock stress testing 277 short circuit fault code 233 single phase supply connection cece eee eee 19 erating Win pattie na 250 sleep selection PID parameter 150 slip compensation ratio parameter 122 soft keys cont
101. environment Category C3 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class second environment unrestricted distribution Compliance with the IEC EN 61800 3 2004 The immunity performance of the drive complies with the demands of IEC EN 61800 3 category C2 see page 281 for IEC EN 61800 3 definitions The emission limits of IEC EN 61800 3 are complied with the provisions described below First environment drives of category C2 1 The internal EMC filter is connected 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 4 The motor cable length does not exceed the allowed maximum length specified in The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual section Motor cable length for 400 V drives on page 260 for the frame size and switching frequency in use WARNING In a domestic environment this product may cause radio inference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required Second environment drives of category C3 1 2 3 The internal EMC filter is connected The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual Technical data 282 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 4 The motor cable length does not exceed the allowed maximum length specified in section Motor cable length for 400 V drives on page 260 for the frame size and switching frequency in use
102. hardware screws or nuts and bolts four each The type of hardware depends on the mounting surface and the frame size Frame size Mounting hardware R1 R4 M5 10 R5 M6 1 4 in R6 M8 5 16 in Suitable environment and enclosure Confirm that the site meets the environmental requirements To prevent damage prior to installation store and transport the drive according to the environmental requirements specified for storage and transportation See section Ambient conditions on page 276 Installation ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 15 Confirm that the enclosure is appropriate based on the site contamination level IP21 UL type 1 enclosure The site must be free of airborne dust corrosive gases or liquids and conductive contaminants such as dripping water condensation carbon dust and metallic particles IP54 UL type 12 enclosure This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions If for some reason an IP21 drive needs to be installed without the conduit box or cover or an IP54 drive without the conduit plate or hood see the note in chapter Technical data page 280 Suitable mounting location Confirm that the mounting location meets the following constraints The drive must be mounted vertically on a smooth solid surface and in a suitable environment as defined above For horizontal installation contact your local ABB representative for mor
103. input power to ground associated with long high capacitance motor cables Grounding and routing Motor cable shielding Motor cables require shielding using conduit armored cable or shielded cable Conduit When using conduit Bridge joints with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint Bond conduit run to the drive enclosure Use a separate conduit run for motor cables also separate input power and control cables Use a separate conduit run for each drive Armored cable When using armored cable Use six conductor 3 phases and 3 grounds type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds Armored motor cable can share a cable tray with input power cables but not with control cables Shielded cable For shielded cable details see section Motor cable requirements for CE amp C Tick compliance on page 263 Grounding See section Ground connections on page 255 For CE compliant installations and installations where EMC emissions must be minimized see section Effective motor cable shields on page 264 Drive s motor connection terminals The drive s motor and input power terminals have the same specifications See section Drive s power connection terminals on page 256 Technical data ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 263 Motor cable requirements for CE amp C Tick compliance The requirements in this section apply for CE or C Tick complian
104. installation EFB on page 178 Route control cables to minimize radiation to the cable Route as far away as possible from the input power and motor cables at least 20 cm 8 in Where control cables must cross power cables make sure they are at an angle as near 90 as possible e Stay atleast 20 cm 8 in from the sides of the drive Use care in mixing signal types on the same cable Do not mix relay controlled signals using more than 30 V and other control signals in the same cable e Run relay controlled signals as twisted pairs especially if voltage gt 48 V Relay controlled signals using less than 48 V can be run in the same cables as digital input signals Technical data 270 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Note Never mix 24 V DC and 115 230 V AC signals in the same cable Analog cables Recommendations for analog signal runs Use double shielded twisted pair cable Use one individually shielded pair for each signal Do not use a common return for different analog signals Digital cables Recommendation for digital signal runs A double shielded cable is the best alternative but single shielded twisted multi pair cable is also usable Control panel cable If the control panel is connected to the drive with a cable use only Category 5 Patch ethernet cable The maximum length that is tested to meet EMC specifications is 3 m 9 8 ft Longer cables are susceptible to electromagnet
105. is especially effective when vector control mode is used parameter 9904 1 or 2 VECTOR SPEED and or operation point is near zero speed and or operation requires a torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback i e without a pulse encoder O OFF IDMAGN The Motor ID Run process is not run Identification magnetization is performed depending on parameter 9904 and 2101 settings In identification magnetization the motor model is calculated at first start by magnetizing the motor for 10 to 15 s at zero speed motor not rotating The model is recalculated always at start after motor parameter changes Parameter 9904 1 or 2 VECTOR SPEED Identification magnetization is performed Parameter 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2101 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST Identification magnetization is performed e Parameter 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2707 has other value than 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST Identification magnetization is not performed 1 ON Enables the Motor ID Run during which the motor is rotating at the next start command After run completion this value automatically changes to 0 Note The motor must be de coupled from the driven equipment Note If motor parameters are changed after ID Run repeat the ID Run WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80 of the nominal speed during the ID Run The motor
106. is properly grounded The input power mains voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage The input power mains connections at U1 V1 and W1 are connected and tightened as specified The input power mains fuses are installed The motor connections at U2 V2 and W2 are connected and tightened as specified The motor cable is routed away from other cables NO power factor compensation capacitors are in the motor cable The control connections are connected and tightened as specified NO tools or foreign objects such as drill shavings are inside the drive NO alternate power source for the motor such as a bypass connection is connected no voltage is applied to the output of the drive Installation 32 Reinstall the cover IP21 UL type 1 1 B O N IP54 UL type 12 1 2 Align the cover and slide it on Tighten the captive screw Reinstall the control panel Continue with start up See chapter Start up control with I O and ID Run on page 33 Align the cover and slide it on Tighten the captive screws around the edge of the cover Slide the hood down over the top of the cover Only needed for UL type 12 installations Install the two screws that attach the hood Only needed for UL type 12 installations Install the control panel Note The control panel window must be closed to comply with IP54 UL type 12 E ACQ550 U1 User s Manua
107. is scaled as follows ABB Drives and DCU profiles 100 0 5 Par 1105 1 100 0 5 par 1105 Value Reference setting Al reference scaling REF1 COMM AI1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 100 0 50 Al1 input signal gt 100 Embedded fieldbus ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 207 ABB Drives and DCU profiles Value Reference setting Al reference scaling REF1 COMM AI1 COMM Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 200 l l l l 100 7 l l l i Al1 input signal 100 0 5 par 1105 i i iu dl 0 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1108 l l l l 100 P77 TTA 7777 l l l Alt input signal 100 0 5 par 1108 HP 0 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 200 l l l l 100 f 7771701711 l l l i Altinput signal 0 gt 0 50 100 Embedded fieldbus 208 Reference handling ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Use Group 10 START STOP DIR parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location EXT1 and EXT2 The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and
108. jaa 59 ABB standard default 58 alle Mate scott Ng 60 hand auto is BANGA NONG 62 motor potentiometer 61 BEG xu iesu pur nn AA SERIE et 64 PID control 63 user parameter sets 66 parameter default values 67 parameters not changed 57 magnetization identification 84 mains see input power maintenance capacitors ee 245 control panel 245 AA eagle andy AIRA Ale 241 internal enclosure fan 244 intervals o 241 main fane occ 242 triggers parameter group 123 manuals list of ACS550 manuals 2 providing feedback 295 mapping actual value FBA generic profile 229 EFB modbus lllesssss 190 materials 0 0 0 2 e a E E eee 277 Index ACQ550 U1 User s Manual maximum frequency parameter 111 torque limit parameters 112 torque select parameter 111 minimum frequency parameter 111 torque limit parameters 111 torque select parameter 111 modbus EFB addressing convention 190 EFB GOIS a a ha a a 190 EFB discrete inputs 192 EFB holding registers 193 EFB input registers 193 EFB mapping details 190 EFB mapping summary 190
109. micrometers Cast aluminium AISi Extruded aluminium AISi Package Corrugated board expanded polystyrene plywood raw wood heat dried Package wrap consists of one or more of the following PE LD plastic wrap PP or steel bands Technical data 278 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Material specifications Disposal The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural resources The package materials are environmentally compatible and recyclable All metal parts can be recycled The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under controlled circumstances according to local regulations Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks If recycling is not feasible all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed circuit boards can be landfilled The DC capacitors contain electrolyte and if the drive is not provided with the RoHS marking the printed circuit boards contain lead both of which are classified as hazardous waste within the EU They must be removed and handled according to local regulations For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling instructions please contact your local ABB distributor Technical data ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 279 Applicable standards Drive compliance with the following standards is identified by the standard marks on the type designation label Mark App
110. option Rxxx Two basic serial communications configurations are available e embedded fieldbus EFB See chapter Embedded fieldbus on page 177 e fieldbus adapter FBA With one of the optional FBA modules in the drive s expansion slot 2 the drive can communicate to a control system using one of the following protocols PROFIBUS DP Ethernet Modbus TCP EtherNet IP EtherCAT PROFINET IO POWERLINK CANopen DeviceNet ControlNet CC Link The ACQ550 detects automatically which communication protocol is used by the plug in fieldbus adapter The default settings for each protocol assume that the profile used is the protocol s industry standard drive profile e g PROFIdrive for PROFIBUS AC DC Drive for DeviceNet All of the FBA protocols can also be configured for the ABB Drives profile Configuration details depend on the protocol and profile used These details are provided in a user s manual supplied with the FBA module Fieldbus adapter 210 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Details for the ABB Drives profile which apply for all protocols are provided in section ABB Drives profile technical data on page 220 Control interface In general the basic control interface between the fieldbus system and the drive consists of e Output Words CONTROL WORD REFERENCE speed or frequency Others The drive supports a maximum of 15 output words Protocols limits may further restrict the total
111. page 245 Capacitor replacement Every nine years See Heplacement on page 245 frame sizes R5 and R6 Replace battery in the ACQ Every ten years See Battery on page 245 Control Panel Consult your local ABB Service representative for more details on the maintenance On the Internet go to www abb com drive and select Drive Services Maintenance and Field Services Heatsink The heatsink fins accumulate dust from the cooling air Since a dusty heatsink is less efficient at cooling the drive overtemperature faults become more likely In a normal environment not dusty not clean check the heatsink annually in a dusty environment check more often Clean the heatsink as follows when necessary 1 Remove power from the drive Remove the cooling fan see section Main fan replacement on page 242 Blow clean compressed air not humid from bottom to top and simultaneously use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust Note If there is a risk of the dust entering adjoining equipment perform the cleaning in another room Maintenance 242 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 4 Reinstall the cooling fan 5 Restore power Main fan replacement The drive s main cooling fan has a life span of about 60 000 operating hours at maximum rated operating temperature and drive load The expected life span doubles for each 10 C 18 F drop in the fan temperature fan temperature is a function of ambient
112. parameter values Group 01 OPERATING DATA to Group 98 OPTIONS are changed before the ID Run check that the new settings meet the following conditions 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 0 rpm 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED gt 80 of the motor rated speed 2003 MAXIMUM CURRENT gt long 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 gt 50 or 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 gt 50 depending on which limit is in use according to parameter 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL Check that the Run Enable signal is on parameter 7607 Ensure that the panel is in local control HAND shown on the left at the top Press key to switch between local and remote control Start up control with I O and ID Run ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 41 ID RUN WITH THE ACQ CONTROL PANEL Change parameter 9910 ID RUN to 1 ON Save the new setting LOC UPAR EDIT by pressing X 9910 ID RUN O 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE O If you want to monitor actual values during the ID Run go to LOC Y the Output mode by pressing EP repeatedly until you get 0 0 Hz there 0 0 A 0 0 X DIR 00 00 MENU O Press lt lt gt gt to start the ID Run The panel keeps switching LOC CU ALARM between the display that was shown when you started the ID ALARM 2019 Run and the alarm display presented on the right ee In general it is recommended not to press any control panel 00 00 keys during the ID Run However you can stop the I
113. parameters 101 off delay parameters 102 on delay parameters 102 status data parameter 86 relays specifications 269 remove COVED 0 02 i e a rh nnn 17 reset automatic parameter group 128 analog input less than min parameter 128 delay time parameter 128 external fault parameter 128 number of trials parameter 128 overcurrent parameter 128 trial time parameter 128 undervoltage parameter 128 resolution listing for parameters 69 resonance avoiding select parameter 120 revolution counter data parameter 87 ring lugs oe ra KLANG aan S 257 RS 232 baud rate parameter 158 parity parameter 158 station id parameter 158 291 RS 232 counts buffer overruns parameter 158 CRC errors parameter 158 frame errors parameter 158 ok messages parameter 158 parity errors parameter 158 RS485 comm occ 178 run enable source select parameter 106 run time data parameter 85 87 maintenance trigger 123 S Sately sc dle ae x Pe DR E er RN ER 5 save changes parameter 107 saving
114. programming of a new drive You should familiarize yourself with the control panel operation and follow the steps outlined above At the first start the drive automatically suggests entering the first task Language Select The assistant also checks the values entered to prevent entries that are out of range The Start up Assistant is divided into tasks You may activate the tasks one after the other as the Start up Assistant suggests or independently Note If you want to set the parameters independently use the Parameters Mode The table below lists the tasks of the assistants and the relevant drive parameters Depending on the selection made in the Application task parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO the Start up Assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests Name Description Language select Selecting the language Motor set up Setting the motor data Performing the motor identification If the speed limits are not in the allowed range Setting the limits Application Selecting the application macro PID control Selecting the source for the process reference If AM is used Setting analog input Al1 limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits Setting the speed reference limits Setting the source and limits for the process actual value Control panel 48 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Name Description Continued Speed control EXT1 Selecting the source for the spee
115. ready for use Start up control with I O and ID Run ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 39 How to control the drive through the I O interface The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analog inputs when e the motor start up is performed and e the default standard parameter settings are valid PRELIMINARY SETTINGS If you need to change the direction of rotation check that parameter 1003 is set to 3 REQUEST Ensure that the control connections are wired according to the See section ABB 2 wire macro connection diagram given for the ABB Standard macro on page 58 Ensure that the drive is in remote control Press key to switch In remote control the panel between remote and local control display shows text REM STARTING AND CONTROLLING THE SPEED OF THE MOTOR Start by switching digital input DI1 on ACQ Control Panel The arrow starts rotating It is dotted until the setpoint is reached Regulate the drive output frequency motor speed by adjusting the voltage of analog input Al1 CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF THE MOTOR Reverse direction Switch digital input DI2 on Forward direction Switch digital input DI2 off STOPPING THE MOTOR Switch digital input DI1 off The motor stops ACQ Control Panel The arrow stops rotating Start up control with I O and ID Run 40 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual How to perform the ID Run The drive estimates motor ch
116. relay outputs parameter 1401 The jogging status is also seen in DCU Profile status bit 21 O NOT SEL Disables the jogging function 1 Di Activates de activates jogging based on the state of DI1 DI1 activated jogging active DI1 de activated jogging inactive 2 6 DI2 DI6 Activates jogging based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 above 1 DI INv Activates jogging based on the state of DI1 DI1 activated jogging inactive D11 de activated jogging active 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Activates jogging based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 INv above Parameters 94 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT This group defines how the drive selects between command sources characteristics and sources for REF1 and REF2 Code Description 1101 KEYPAD REF SEL Selects the reference controlled in local control mode 1 REF1 Hz rpm Reference type depends on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Speed reference rpm if 9904 1 or 2 VECTOR SPEED Frequency reference Hz if 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ 2 REF2 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL Defines the source for selecting between the two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 Thus defines the source for Start Stop Direction commands and reference signals O EXT1 Selects external control location 1 EXT1 e See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS for ExT1 s Start Stop Dir definitions e
117. right details screen The first item that requires editing is automatically highlighted and includes details In general the first item listed in the details is the value defined by the backup file The second item listed is the default edit e For tracking purposes an asterisk initially appears by each item As edits are made the asterisks disappear In the illustrated example the backup specifies a switching frequency of 12 kHz but the target drive is limited to 8 kHz Press EDIT to edit the parameter The display is the target drive s standard edit screen for the selected parameter Highlight the desired value for the target drive 5 Press SAVE to save setting Control panel ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 53 6 Press EXIT to step back to the differences view and continue for each remaining exception 7 When your editing is complete press READY in the Differences List and then select Yes save parameters Download failures In some situations the drive may be unable to accept a download In those cases the control panel display is Parameter download failed plus one of the following causes e Set not found You are attempting to download a data set that was not defined in the backup The remedy is to manually define the set or upload the set from a drive that has the desired set definitions e Par lock The remedy is to unlock the parameter set parameter 1602 ncompat
118. standard equipment For frame sizes R3 R6 contact your ABB representative for appropriate parts See section Brake components on page 265 Technical data ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 281 IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility It is the ability of electrical electronic equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment Likewise the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or system within its locality First environment includes establishments connected to a low voltage network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly supplying domestic premises Drive of category C2 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first environment Note A professional is a person or organisation having necessary skills in installing and or commissioning power drive systems including their EMC aspects Category C2 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class first environment restricted distribution EMC standard IEC EN 61800 3 does not any more restrict the distribution of the drive but the using installation and commissioning are defined Drive of category C3 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first
119. than 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 Defines the torque value of the second underload curve definition point e Must be smaller than 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 Defines the torque value of the second overload curve definition point 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 Defines the frequency value of the third load curve definition point e Must be smaller than 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 Defines the torque value of the third underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 Defines the torque value of the third overload curve definition point Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 143 Code Description 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 Defines the frequency value of the fourth load curve definition point Must be smaller than 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 Defines the torque value of the fourth underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 Defines the torque value of the fourth overload curve definition point 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 Defines the frequency value of fifth load curve definition point 3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 Defines the torque value of the fifth underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 Defines the torque value of the fifth overload curve definition poin
120. the drive response to cross wiring faults and to ground faults detected when the drive is NOT running When the drive is not running it monitors for Improper connections of input power to the drive output the drive can display fault 35 OUTPUT WIRING if improper connections are detected Ground faults the drive can display fault 16 EARTH FAULT if a ground fault is detected Also see parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT O DISABLE No drive response to either of the above monitoring results Note Disabling wiring fault ground fault may void the warranty 1 ENABLE The drive displays faults when this monitoring detects problems 3024 CB TEMP FAULT Defines the drive response to control board overheating O DISABLE No response 1 ENABLE Displays fault 37 CB OVERTEMP and the drive coasts to stop 3028 EARTH FAULT CONFIG Earth Fault configuration with new hardware With new devices it is possible to configure the sensitivity of the Earth fault detection with parameter Parameters 128 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET This group defines conditions for automatic resets An automatic reset occurs after a particular fault is detected The drive holds for a set delay time then automatically restarts You can limit the number of resets in a specified time period and set up automatic resets for a variety of faults Code Description 3101 NUMB
121. the jogging function is active 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 2 what relay output 2 means e See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 3 what relay output 3 means e See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 1 Control event a EN On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFC 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 1 heldy status E s e On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFC m pm 1404 ON DELAY 1405 OFF DELAY 1406 RO 2 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 2 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1407 RO 2 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 2 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1408 RO 3 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 3 e See RO 1 ON DELAY Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 103 Code Description 1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY Switch off delay for relay 3 See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1410 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 4 6 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 4 6 what relay output 4 6 means Available if OREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module is installed See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1413 RO 4 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 4 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1414 RO 4 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 4 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY
122. the minimum limit for the drive output frequency P 2008 A positive or zero minimum frequency value defines two ranges one positive and one negative Frequency range allowed A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed range 0 Time See the figure Note Keep MINIMUM FREQ lt MAXIMUM FREQ 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ FUE Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency Freq 2007 value is gt O P 2008 Frequency range allowed i NG p lime P 2007 Frequency range allowed P 2008 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL Defines control of the selection between two minimum torque limits 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 and 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 O MIN TORQUE 1 Selects 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 as the minimum limit used 1 Di1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value e De activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 Value 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used e See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used e The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication e The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value De activating
123. time specified by parameter 2208 Normal command sequence Enter OFF3 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Be sure motor and driven equipment can be stopped using this mode 3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note the Run OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active See 1601 If 1601 is set to COMM this bit also actives the Run Enable signal 0 OPERATION Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED INHIBITED 4 Unused ABB DRV LIM RAMP_OUT_ 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED ABB DRV FULL 0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to Zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force 5 RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED 0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held 6 RAMP_IN_ 1 RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation Enter OPERATING ZER F 7 3 0 RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero Embedded fieldbus ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 199 ABB Drives profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 5319 Commanded Bit Name Value state Comments 7 RESET O gt 1 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if 1604 COMM 0 OPERATING Continue normal operation 8 9 Unused 10 Unused ABB DRV LIM REMOTE CMD
124. value for this register 40006 Actual 2 R By default stores a copy of 0104 CURRENT Use parameter select using 5311 5311 to select a different actual value for this register 40007 Actual 3 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5312 to select an select using 5312 actual value for this register 40008 Actual 4 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5313 to select an select using 5313 actual value for this register 40009 Actual 5 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5314 to select an select using 5314 actual value for this register 40010 Actual 6 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5315 to select an select using 5315 actual value for this register 40011 Actual 7 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5316 to select an select using 5316 actual value for this register 40012 Actual 8 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5317 to select an select using 5317 actual value for this register 40031 ACQ550 R W Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU CONTROL WORD profiles CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 LSW See parameter 0301 40032 ACQ550 CONTROL R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU WORD MSW profiles CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0302 40033 ACQ550 R Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU STATUS WORD profiles STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 1 LSW See parameter 0303 40034 ACQ550 R
125. warns that the PFC autochange function is active To control PFC use Group 81 PFC CONTROL and the PFC macro on page 64 2015 2016 2017 PFC LOCK RESERVED This alarm warns that the PFC interlocks are active which means that the drive cannot start the following Any motor when Autochange is used The speed regulated motor when Autochange is not used Not used Diagnostics 240 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Alarm code Display Description 2018 PID SLEEP This alarm warns that the PID sleep function is active which means Note 1 that the motor could accelerate when the PID sleep function ends To control PID sleep use parameters 4022 4026 or 4122 4126 2019 ID RUN Performing ID Run 2020 RESERVED Not used 2021 START ENABLE 1 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 1 signal is missing MISSING To control Start Enable 1 function use parameter 1608 To correct check e Digital input configuration Communication settings 2022 START ENABLE 2 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 2 signal is missing MISSING To control Start Enable 2 function use parameter 1609 To correct check Digital input configuration Communication settings 2023 EMERGENCY Emergency stop activated STOP 2024 OBSOLETE 2025 FIRST START Signals that a the drive is performing a First Start evaluation of motor characteristics This is normal the first time the motor
126. when an overvoltage alarm or fault occurs 23 DRIVE TEMP Energize relay when a drive or control board overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 24 UNDERVOLTAGE Energize relay when an undervoltage alarm or fault occurs 25 All LOSS Energize relay when Al1 signal is lost 26 AI2 LOSS Energize relay when Al2 signal is lost 27 MOTOR TEMP Energize relay when a motor overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 28 STALL Energize relay when a stall alarm or fault exists 30 PID SLEEP Energize relay when the PID sleep function is active 31 PFC Use relay to start stop motor in PFC control See Group 81 PFC CONTROL Use this option only when PFC control is used Selection activated deactivated when drive is not running 32 AUTOCHANGE Energize relay when PFC autochange operation is performed Use this option only when PFC control is used 33 FLUX READY Energize relay when the motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque motor has reached nominal magnetizing 34 USER MACRO 2 Energize relay when User Parameter Set 2 is active Parameters 102 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 35 COMM Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1 relay 6 according t
127. will rotate in the forward direction Ensure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the ID Run See also section How to perform the ID Run on page 40 MOTOR COSPHI Defines the nominal motor cos phi power factor The parameter improves performance especially with high efficiency motors O IDENTIFIED Drive identifies the cos phi automatically by estimation 0 01 0 97 Value entered used as the cos phi Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 85 Group 01 OPERATING DATA This group contains drive operating data including actual signals The drive sets the values for actual signals based on measurements or calculations You cannot set these values Code Description 0101 SPEED amp DIR The calculated signed speed of the motor rpm The absolute value of 0101 SPEED amp DIR is the same as the value of 0102 SPEED The value of 0101 SPEED amp DIR is positive if the motor runs in the forward direction The value of 0101 SPEED amp DIR is negative if the motor runs in the reverse direction 0102 SPEED The calculated speed of the motor rpm Parameter 0102 or 0103 is shown by default in the control panel Output mode 0103 OUTPUT FREQ The frequency Hz applied to the motor Parameter 0102 or 0103 is shown by default in the control panel Output mode 0104 CURRENT The motor current as measured by the ACQ550 Shown by default in the control panel Outpu
128. 0 C with 8 kHz switching frequency See the parameter description for 2607 for details Technical data ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Input power connections 251 WARNING Do not operate the drive outside the nominal input line voltage range Overvoltage can result in permanent damage to the drive Input power specifications Input power mains connection specifications Voltage U4 208 220 230 240 V AC 3 phase or 1 phase 15 10 for ACQ550 x1 xxxx 2 380 400 415 440 460 480 V AC 3 phase 15 10 for ACQ550 x1 XXXX 4 500 525 575 600 V AC 3 phase 15 10 for ACQ550 U1 xxxx 6 Prospective short circuit current Maximum allowed prospective short circuit current in the supply is 100 kA providing that the input power cable of the drive is protected with Fundamental power factor cos phi IEC 629 appropriate fuses US 100 000 AIC Frequency 48 63 Hz Imbalance Max x 3 of nominal phase to phase input voltage 0 98 at nominal load Cable temperature rating 90 C 194 F rating minimum Disconnecting device for isolation Install a hand operated input disconnecting device disconnecting means between the AC power source and the drive The disconnecting device must be of a type that can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenance work Europe To meet the European Union Directives according to standard EN 60204 1 Safety of Machinery
129. 0 rpm 1 rpm Size dependent Y 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER 0 2 3 0 Pha U1 0 1 hp 1 0 Pha Y 9910 D RUN O OFF IDMAGN 1 ON 1 O OFF IDMAGN Y 9915 MOTOR COSPHI O IDENTIFIED 0 01 0 97 0 01 O IDENTIFIED Y Group 01 OPERATING DATA 0101 SPEED amp DIR 30000 30000 rpm 1 rpm n 0102 SPEED 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0104 CURRENT 0 0 2 0 long 0 1A 0105 TORQUE 200 0 200 0 0 1 0106 POWER 2 0 2 0 Phd 0 1 kw 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0 2 5 Van 1V 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0 2 0 Van 1V 0110 DRIVE TEMP 0 0 150 0 C 0 1 C 0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm l 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque 0 1 0113 CTRL LOCATION 0 LOCAL 1 EXT1 2 EXT2 1 0114 RUN TIME R 0 9999 h 1h 0115 KWH COUNTER R 0 65535 kWh 1 kWh 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque 0 1 0118 Di 1 3 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 Parameters 70 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User 0119 DI 4 6 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0120 a 1 0 0 100 0 0 1 0121 Al2 0 0 100 0 0 1 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0124 lao 1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0125 Ao2 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0126
130. 08C A CSA mark is attached to ACQ550 U1 type drives to verify that the drive follows the provisions of C22 2 NO 14 The ACQ550 is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA RMS symmetrical amperes 600 V maximum The ampere rating is based on tests done according to UL 508 Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with local codes The ACQ550 has an electronic motor protection feature that complies with the requirements of UL 508C and for ACQ550 U1 C22 2 No 14 When this feature is selected and properly adjusted additional overload protection is not required unless more than one motor is connected to the drive or unless additional protection is required by applicable safety regulations See parameters 3005 MOT THERM PROT and 3006 MOT THERM RATE The drives are to be used in a controlled environment See section Ambient conditions on page 276 for specific limits Note For open type enclosures i e drives without the conduit box and or cover for IP21 UL type 1 drives or without the conduit plate and or hood for IP54 UL type 12 drives the drive must be mounted inside an enclosure in accordance with National Electric Code and local electrical codes Brake choppers when applied with appropriately sized brake resistors will allow the drive to dissipate regenerative energy normally associated with quickly decelerating a motor Frame sizes R1 and R2 have a built in brake chopper as
131. 1 100 4122 SLEEP SELECTION 6 7 1 O NOT SEL 4123 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 0 HZ O rpm 4124 PID SLEEP DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 60 0 s 4125 WAKE UP DEV Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 0 0 4107 4126 WAKE UP DELAY 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s Group 42 EXT TRIM PID 4201 GAIN 0 1 100 0 0 1 1 0 4202 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 3600 0 s 0 1s 60 0 s 4203 DERIVATION TIME 0 0 10 0s 0 1s 0 0s 4204 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 1 0s 4205 ERROR VALUE INV 0 NO 1 YES 1 O NO 4206 UNITS 0 127 1 4 4207 UNIT SCALE 0 4 1 1 4208 096 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 0 0 4207 4209 100 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 100 0 4207 4210 SET POINT SEL 0 2 8 17 19 20 1 1 A1 Y 4211 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 40 0 4207 4212 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 0 4213 SETPOINT MAX 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 0 4214 FBK SEL 1 13 1 1 ACT1 4215 FBK MULTIPLIER 0 000 NOT SEL 32 768 32 767 0 001 0 000 NOT SEL 4216 JACT1 INPUT 1 7 1 2 A12 Y 4217 ACT2 INPUT 1 7 1 2 A12 Y 4218 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4219 ACT1 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4220 ACT2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 Parameters 80 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolutio
132. 132 PID 1 DEVIATION The difference between the PID 1 controller reference value and actual value e Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0133 PID 2 DEVIATION The difference between the PID 2 controller reference value and actual value e Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0134 0135 COMM RO WORD Free data location that can be written from serial link e Used for relay output control e See parameter 1401 COMM VALUE 1 Free data location that can be written from serial link Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 87 Code Description 0136 COMM VALUE 2 Free data location that can be written from serial link 0137 PROCESS VAR 1 Process variable 1 Defined by parameters in Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 0138 PROCESS VAR 2 Process variable 2 Defined by parameters in Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 0139 PROCESS VAR 3 Process variable 3 e Defined by parameters in Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 0140 RUN TIME The drive s accumulated running time in thousands of hours kh e Cannot be reset 0141 MWH COUNTER The drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours e The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0 e Cannot be reset 0142 REVOLUTION CNTR The motor s accumulated revolutions in millions of revolutions Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the
133. 132 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY This group defines the content for control panel display middle area when the control panel is in the Output mode Code Description 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM P 3404 P 3405 Selects the first parameter by number displayed on the control panel Loc Y y AALA e Definitions in this group define display content when the control P 3401 137 ft 49 Y 1 HZ panel is in the control mode Any parameter number in Group 01 OPERATING DATA can be P 3108 5138 A selected P3415 2139 10 7 96 Using the following parameters the display value can be scaled DIR 00 00 MENU converted to convenient units and or displayed as a bar graph e The figure identifies selections made by parameters in this group LOC iz e If just one or two parameters are selected for display that is just HENENENENM 07 one or two of the values of parameters 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 3408 P 344A 0 AA SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM are other than 100 NOT 2 4 4 SELECTED the number and name of each displayed parameter are DIR 1 MENU shown in a to the value oe DIR 00 00 MENU 100 NOT SELECTED First parameter not displayed 101 178 Displays parameter 0101 0178 If parameter does not exist the display shows n a 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the first display parameter Use parameters 3402 3403 3406 and 3407 fo
134. 2 SQUARED 1 1 LINEAR 2606 SWITCHING FREQ 1 2 4 8 12 kHz 4 kHz 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL O OFF 1 2 ON 1 1 ON 2608 ISLIP COMP RATIO 0 200 1 0 2609 NOISE SMOOTHING O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE 2619 DC STABILIZER O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE 2625 OVERMODULATION O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 0 disables 0 1 kh 0 0 kh 2902 COOLING FAN ACT 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 kh 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG 0 65535 Mrev 0 disables 1 Mrev 0 Mrev 2904 REVOLUTION ACT 0 65535 Mrev 1 Mrev 0 Mrev 2905 RUN TIME TRIG 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 0 disables 0 1 kh 0 0 kh 2906 RUN TIME ACT 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 kh 2907 USER MWh TRIG 0 0 6553 5 MWh 0 0 disables 0 1 MWh 0 0 MWh 2908 UsER MWh ACT 0 0 6553 5 MWh 0 1 MWh 0 0 MWh Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 75 Code Name Range Resolution Default User Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION 0 3 1 O NOT SEL 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 1 3 1 1 FAULT 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 6 6 1 O NOT SEL 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 6 6 1 O NOT SEL 3005 MOT THERM PROT O NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 ALARM 1 1 FAULT 3006 MOT THERM TIME 256 9999 s 1s 500 s 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE 50 150 1 100 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD 25 150 1 70 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ 1 250 Hz 1 Hz 35
135. 2 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Preparing for installation Lifting the drive Lift the drive only by the metal chassis Unpacking the drive 1 Unpack the drive 2 Check for any damage and notify the shipper immediately if damaged components are found IP2040 3 Check the contents against the order and the shipping label to verify that all parts have been received Drive identification Drive labels To determine the type of drive you are installing refer to either e serial number label attached on upper part of the chokeplate between the mounting holes or ACQ550 U1 08A8 4 amp Type designation eno eo RII O PN Phd 4 0 3 0 k Serno Serial number type designation label attached on the heat sink on the right side of the drive cover Two examples of the type designation label are given below Input U1 3 380 480 V 1P21 UL type 1 NEMA 1 n 8 8A a ABB Oy f1 48 63 Hz C QQ Output U2 3 0 U1 V INO CONT Q N713 I2N I2hd 8 8 6 9 A ADT ANA AAAI kW Motor PN Phd 4 0 3 sem 1065006704 lt a Serial number ACQ550 U1 08A8 4 lt amp Type designation For more information see User s Manual 3PH 48 63 Hz 1 PH 4 63 Hz ABB INC IP24 UL TYPE 1 208 240 Vac 208 240 Vac MTR OL INCL SEE MANUAL 462A 46 24 100 kA RMS Symetrical 600V max GP Jos kd 3 PH 0 500 Hz Ka 0 U1 Vac 22A ge USTED i pet 04 obra 2013 Orig Firmware V 343A ibd ULL UL
136. 2 SEL 7 COMM Source for ramp pair selection is 40031 bit 10 the fieldbus Embedded fieldbus ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 183 Relay output control Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires drive parameter values set as defined below e fieldbus controller supplied binary coded relay command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol reference Drive parameter Value Description ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 COMM Relay Output 1 controlled 40134 bit O or 00033 by fieldbus 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 35 COMM Relay Output 2 controlled 40134 bit 1 or 00034 by fieldbus 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 35 COMM Relay Output 3 controlled 40134 bit 2 or 00035 by fieldbus 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 35 COMM Relay Output 4 controlled 40134 bit 3 or 00036 by fieldbus 14111 RELAY OUTPUT 5 35 COMM Relay Output 5 controlled 40134 bit 4 or 00037 by fieldbus 14121 RELAY OUTPUT 6 35 COMM Relay Output 6 controlled 40134 bit 5 or 00038 by fieldbus More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module Note Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below Modbus protocol Drive parameter Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Relay 1 3 status 40122 012
137. 20 distribution 6416 AL1RANGE20T030 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current l n 20 30 distribution 6417 6418 AAL1RANGE30T0O40 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current lay 30 40 distribution ALTRANGE40TO50 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current lay 40 50 distribution 6419 ALTRANGE50TO60 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current l n 50 60 distribution 6420 6421 ALTRANGE60TO70 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current lay 60 70 distribution ALTRANGE70TO80 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current l n 70 80 distribution 6422 ALTRANGE80TO90 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current l n 80 90 distribution 6423 6424 6425 AL1RANGE90TO Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current lay over 90 distribution AL2RANGEOTO10 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 0 10 distribution AL2RANGE10TO20 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 10 20 distribution 6426 AL2RANGE20T030 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 20 30 distribution 6427 AL2RANGE30T040 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 30 40 distribution 6428 AL2RANGE40TO50 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 40 50 distribution 642
138. 21 RFG OUTPUT ENABLED CW xxxx x1xx xx11 1111 i e Bit 5 1 RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED CW xxxx x1xx x111 1111 i e Bit 6 1 OPERATING SW Bit8 1 Embedded fieldbus 206 Reference scaling ABB Drives and DCU profiles The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives and DCU ACQ550 U1 User s Manual profiles ABB Drives and DCU profiles Reference Range decreta Scaling Remarks ype REF1 32767 Speed or 20000 par 1105 Final reference limited by is frequency 020 1104 1105 Actual motor 32767 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 2001 2002 20000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency REF2 32767 Speed or 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by Sa frequency 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 132767 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 2001 2002 10000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency Torque 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 2015 2017 torque1 or 2016 10000 par 1108 2018 torque2 10000 corresponds to 100 PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by Reference 0 0 4012 4013 PID set1 or 10000 par 1108 10000 corresponds to 100 4112 4113 PID set2 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM AI1 or COMM AI1 the reference
139. 3 EFB 3 FF94h 34 MOTOR PHASE FF56h 35 OUTP WIRING FF95h 36 INCOMPATIBLE SW 630Fh 37 CB OVERTEMP 4110h 38 USER LOAD CURVE FF6Bh 101 SERF CORRUPT FF55h 102 Reserved FF55h 103 SERF MACRO FF55h 104 Reserved FF55h 105 Reserved FF55h 201 DSP T1 OVERLOAD 6100h 202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 6100h 203 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 6100h 204 DSP STACK ERROR 6100h 205 Reserved obsolete 5000h 206 CB ID ERROR 5000h 207 EFB LOAD ERROR 6100h 1000 PAR HZRPM 6320h 1001 PAR PFC REF NEG 6320h 1002 Reserved obsolete 6320h 1003 PAR Al SCALE 6320h 1004 PAR AO SCALE 6320h 1005 PAR PCU 2 6320h 1006 PAR EXT RO 6320h 1007 PAR FIELDBUS MISSING 6320h 1008 PAR PFC MODE 6320h 1009 PAR PCU 1 6320h 1012 PAR PFCIO 1 6320h 1013 PAR PFC IO 2 6320h 1014 PARPFCIO3 6320h 1016 PAR USER LOAD C 6320h ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Fieldbus adapter ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 219 Serial communication diagnostics Besides the drive fault codes the FBA module has diagnostic tools Refer to the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Fieldbus adapter 220 ABB Drives profile technical data Overview ACQ550 U1 User s Manual The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple protocols including protocols available on the FBA module This section describes the ABB Drives profile implemented for FBA modules Control Word As described earlier in section Control interface on page 210 the CONTROL WORD is t
140. 3 RO 4 6 STATUS Relay 4 6 status 40123 Analog output control Using the fieldbus for analog output control e g PID setpoint requires drive parameter values set as defined below e fieldbus controller supplied analog value s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 135 COMM VALUE 1 Analog Output 1 controlled by writing to 0135 COMM VALUE 1 parameter 0135 40135 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 136 COMM VALUE 2 Analog Output 2 controlled by writing to 0136 COMM VALUE 2 parameter 0136 40136 Embedded fieldbus PID control setpoint source ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID loops Modbus protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 4010 SET POINT SEL 8 COMM VALUE 1 Setpoint is input reference 2 40003 Set 1 9 COMM AI1 Al1 4110 SET POINT SEL 10 COMM AI1 Set 2 4210 SET POINT SEL Ext Trim Communication fault When using fieldbus control specify the drive s action if serial communication is lost Drive parameter 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Value O NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 CONST SP7 3 LAST SPEED Description Se
141. 301 MINIMUM Al1 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 1303 FiLTER AI 0 0 10 0s 0 1 s 0 15 1304 MINIMUM Al2 0 0 100 0 0 1 20 0 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 1306 FILTER Al2 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 0 1s Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 0 44 46 47 52 1 1 READY 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 0 44 46 47 52 1 2 RUN 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 0 44 46 47 52 1 3 FAULT 1 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1405 Ro OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0s 1406 RO 2 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0s 1407 RO 2 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1408 RO 3 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0 s 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 0 44 46 47 52 1 O NOT SEL 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 0 44 46 47 52 1 O NOT SEL 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 0 44 46 47 52 1 O NOT SEL 1413 RO 4 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0s 1414 RO4 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1415 RO 5 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0s 1416 RO 5 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1417 RO 6 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0s 1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0s Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS 1501 A01 CONTENT SEL 99 178 1 102 parameter 0102 OUTPUT SPEED 1502 O1 CONTENT MIN Depends on the signal selected with par 1501 15083 AO1 CONTENT MAX Depends on the signal selected with par 1501 1504 MINIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0 0 mA 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 0 0
142. 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 76 8 9 6 kbits s kbits s 5304 EFB PARITY 0 2 8 NONE 1 1 8 NONE 2 O 8 NONE 1 2 2 8 EVEN 1 3 2 8 ODD 1 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE O ABB DRV LIM 1 DCU PROFILE 1 O ABB DRV LIM 2 ABB DRV FULL 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES 0 65535 1 0 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS 0 65535 1 0 5308 EFB UART ERRORS 0 65535 1 0 5309 EFB STATUS 0 7 1 O IDLE 5310 EFB PAR 10 0 65535 1 0 Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 81 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 5311 EFB PAR 11 0 65535 1 0 5312 EFB PAR 12 0 65535 1 0 5313 EFB PAR 13 0 65535 1 0 5314 EFB PAR 14 0 65535 1 0 5315 JEFB PAR 15 0 65535 1 0 5316 EFB PAR 16 0 65535 1 0 5317 EFB PAR 17 0 65535 1 0 5318 EFB PAR 18 0 65535 1 0 5319 EFB PAR 19 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 5320 EFB PAR 20 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 Group 64 LOAD ANALYZER 6401 PVL SIGNAL 100 178 1 103 parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 6402 PVL FILTER TIME 0 0 120 0 s 0 1s 0 1s 6403 LOGGERS RESET 6 7 1 O NOT SEL 6404 AL2 SIGNAL 101 178 1 103 parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 6405 AL2 SIGNAL BASE Depends on the signal selected with par 6404 6406 PEAK VALUE 6407 PEAK TIME 1 Date dd mm yy power on time in days 1 d 6408 PEAK TIME 2 Time hh mm ss 2s 6409 CURRENT AT PEAK 0 0 6553 5 A 0 1A
143. 5 3610 START TIME 3 Defines timer 3 daily start time See parameter 3602 3611 STOP TIME 3 Defines timer 3 daily stop time See parameter 3603 Parameters 140 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 3612 START DAY 3 Defines timer 3 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3613 STOP DAY 3 Defines timer 3 weekly stop day e See parameter 3605 3614 START TIME 4 Defines timer 4 daily start time e See parameter 3602 3615 STOP TIME 4 Defines timer 4 daily stop time e See parameter 3603 3616 3617 START DAY 4 Defines timer 4 weekly start day e See parameter 3604 STOP DAY 4 Defines timer 4 weekly stop day e See parameter 3605 3622 3623 BOOSTER SEL Selects the source for the booster signal O NOT SEL Booster signal is disabled 1 DI1 Defines DI1 as the booster signal 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines DI2 DI6 as the booster signal 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input D11 as the booster signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the booster signal BOOSTER TIME Defines the booster ON time Time is started when booster sel signal is released If parameter value is 01 30 00 booster is active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after activation DI is released Activation DI Booster active lt j jm Booster time 3626 TIMED F
144. 5 041A 6 R4 907 3096 280 165 052A 6 R4 1120 6820 280 165 062A 6 R4 1295 4420 280 165 077A 6 R6 1504 5136 404 238 099A 6 R6 1821 6219 404 238 125A 6 R6 2442 8339 404 238 144A 6 R6 2813 9607 404 238 00467918 xls C Technical data ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Dimensions and weights 273 The dimensions and mass for the ACQ550 depend on the frame size and enclosure type If unsure of the frame size first find the Type designation on the drive labels see sections Type designation on page 13 and Drive labels on page 12 Then look up that type designation in the rating tables see chapter Technical data page 247 to determine the frame size Mounting dimensions we See detail A oo i ial See detail B AP o Detail A 2 Detail B X0032 IP21 UL type 1 and IP54 UL type 12 Dimensions for each frame size Rai R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in w1 98 0 3 9 98 0 3 9 160 6 3 160 6 3 238 9 4 263 10 4 w2 98 0 3 9 980 39 Hit 318 125 418 16 4 473 18 6 578 228 588 23 2 1675 266 a 5 5 0 2 5 5 0 2 6 5 0 25 6 5 0 25 6 5 0 25 9 0 0 35 b 10 0 0 4 10 0 0 4 13 0 0 5 13 0 0 5 140 0 55 18 0 0 71 lc 55 o2 55 o so los 80 jos 85 los 85 fos d 5 5 0 2 5 5 0 2 6 5 0 25 6 5
145. 5 TORQ CURVE Low 1 LOW 2 Low 3 Low 4 Low 5 Hz Hz Hz 26 Hz Hz 9 EU US EU US EU US EU US EU US 1 5 6 10 32 38 17 41 50 23 50 60 30 500 500 30 2 5 6 20 31 37 30 42 50 40 50 60 50 500 500 50 3 5 6 30 31 37 43 42 50 57 50 60 70 500 500 70 4 5 6 10 73 88 17 98 117 23 120 144 30 500 500 30 5 5 6 20 71 86 30 99 119 40 120 144 50 500 500 50 Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 145 Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 This group defines a set of parameters used with the Process PID PID1 controller Typically only parameters in this group are needed PID controller Basic set up In PID control mode the drive compares a reference signal setpoint to an actual signal feedback and automatically adjusts the speed of the drive to match the two signals The difference between the two signals is the error value Typically PID control mode is used when the speed of a motor needs to be controlled based on pressure flow or temperature In most cases when there is only 1 transducer signal wired to the ACQ550 only parameter group 40 is needed The following is a schematic of setpoint feedback signal flow using parameter group
146. 75A 2 74 8 18 5 25 59 4 15 20 R4 088A 2 88 0 22 30 74 8 18 5 25 R4 114A 2 114 30 40 88 0 22 30 R4 143A 2 143 37 50 114 30 40 R6 178A 2 178 45 60 150 37 50 R6 221A 2 221 55 75 178 45 60 R6 248A 2 248 75 100 192 55 75 R6 00467918 xls C Technical data 248 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Ratings 380 480 V drives Abbreviated column headers are described in section Symbols on page 249 Type Normal use Heavy duty use Frame ACQ550 x1 lon PN PN bha Pha Pha size see below A kW hp A kW hp Three phase supply voltage 380 480 V 03A3 4 3 3 1 1 1G 2 4 0 75 1 R1 04A1 4 4 1 1 5 2 3 3 1 1 18 R1 06A9 4 6 9 3 3 5 4 2 2 3 R1 08A8 4 8 8 4 5 6 9 3 3 R1 012A 4 11 9 5 5 7 5 8 8 4 5 R1 015A 4 15 4 7 5 10 11 9 5 5 7 5 R2 023A 4 23 11 15 15 4 7 5 10 R2 031A 4 31 15 20 23 11 15 R3 038A 4 38 18 5 25 31 15 20 R3 045A 4 45 22 30 38 18 5 25 R3 059A 4 59 30 40 44 22 30 R4 072A 4 72 37 50 59 30 40 R4 078A 4 77 Note 1 60 72 Note 1 50 R4 097A 4 97 Note 1 75 77 Note 1 60 R4 125A 4 125 Note 1 100 87 45 75 R5 157A 4 157 75 125 124 55 100 R6 180A 4 180 90 150 156 75 125 R6 246A 4 246 110 200 192 110 150 R6 00467918 xIs C 1 Not available in ACQ550 U1 series Technical data ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 249 Ratings 500 600 V drives Abbreviated column headers are described in section Symbols on page 249
147. 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 Free Not allowed DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI3 DI6 Free 1 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DIS First PFC Relay DI3 DI6 Free DI4 DI6 Free 2 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI4 DIG Free DI5 DI6 Free 3 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DIS First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI5 Third PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 4 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DIS First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI5 Third PFC Relay DI5 Fourth PFC Relay DI6 Fourth PFC Relay DI6 Free 5 Not allowed DI1 Free DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI5 Fourth PFC Relay DIG Fifth PFC Relay 6 Not allowed Not allowed Parameters 172 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 3 DIS Enables the Interlocks function and assigns a digital input starting with DI3 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Aut
148. 9 AL2RANGE50TO60 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 50 60 distribution 6430 6431 AL2RANGE60TO70 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 60 70 distribution AL2RANGE70TO80 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 70 80 distribution Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 163 Code Description 6432 AL2RANGE80TO90 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 80 9096 distribution 6433 AL2RANGE90TO Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 over 90 distribution Parameters 164 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Group 81 PFC CONTROL This group defines a Pump Fan Control PFC mode of operation The major features of PFC control are The ACQ550 controls the motor of pump no 1 varying the motor speed to control the pump capacity This motor is the speed regulated motor Direct line connections power the motor of pump no 2 and pump no 3 etc The ACQ550 switches pump no 2 and then pump no 3 etc on and off as needed These motors are auxiliary motors The ACQ550 PID control uses two signals a process reference and an actual value feedback The PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference When demand defined by the process reference exceeds the first motor s capacity user defined as a
149. A 2 R4 1014 3463 280 165 143A 2 R6 1268 4431 404 238 178A 2 R6 1575 5379 404 238 221A 2 R6 1952 6666 404 238 248A 2 R6 2189 7474 404 238 00467918 xls C The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 380 480 V drives Drive Heat loss Air flow ACQ550 x1 Frame size BTU hr m3 h ft min 03A3 4 R1 40 137 44 26 04A1 4 R1 52 178 44 26 06A9 4 R1 97 331 44 26 08A8 4 R1 127 434 44 26 012A 4 R1 172 587 44 26 015A 4 R2 232 792 88 52 023A 4 R2 337 1151 88 52 031A 4 R3 457 1561 134 79 Technical data 272 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Drive Heat loss Air flow ACQ550 x1 Frame size BTU hr m3 h ft min 038A 4 R3 562 1919 134 79 045A 4 R3 667 2278 280 165 059A 4 R4 907 3098 280 165 072A 4 R4 1120 3825 280 165 078A 4 R4 1295 4423 280 165 097A 4 R4 1440 4918 250 147 125A 4 R5 1940 6625 404 238 157A 4 R6 2310 7889 404 238 180A 4 R6 2810 9597 404 238 246A 4 R6 3260 11134 540 318 00467918 xls C Air flow 500 600 V drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 500 600 V drives Drive Heat loss Air flow ACQ550 U1 Frame size BTU hr m3 h ft min 02A7 6 R2 46 157 88 52 03A9 6 R2 68 232 88 52 06A1 6 R2 124 423 88 52 09A0 6 R2 170 581 88 52 011A 6 R2 232 792 88 52 017A 6 R2 337 1150 88 52 022A 6 R3 457 1560 134 79 027A 6 R3 562 1918 134 79 032A 6 R4 667 2276 280 16
150. A1 4 470 120 90 160 235 390 1500 05A4 4 320 120 125 235 345 570 2200 06A9 4 235 80 170 320 470 775 3000 08A8 4 192 80 210 400 575 950 4000 012A 4 128 80 315 590 860 1425 5500 015A 4 94 63 425 800 1175 1950 7500 023A 4 64 63 625 1175 1725 2850 11000 1 Resistor time constant specification must be gt 85 seconds 500 600 V drives Resistance Resistor minimum continuous power rating Tupe Deceleration to zero rating P cont ACQ550 Pra Prio Pr30 Preo Continuous ON Ui Bmax Fm 35 0N__ lt 10sON 30sON lt 60sON_ gt 60SON see below gt 27 s OFF gt 50s OFF gt 180 s OFF gt 180 s OFF lt 10 Duty lt 17 Duty lt 14 Duty lt 25 Duty gt 25 Duty ohm ohm W W W W W Three phase supply voltage 500 600 V 02A7 6 548 80 93 175 257 425 1462 03A9 6 373 80 137 257 377 624 2144 06A1 6 224 80 228 429 629 1040 3573 09A0 6 149 80 342 643 943 1560 5359 011A 6 110 60 467 877 1286 2127 7308 017A 6 75 60 685 1286 1886 3119 10718 Resistor time constant specification must be gt 85 seconds WARNING Never use a brake resistor with a resistance below the minimum value specified for the particular drive The drive and the internal chopper are not able to handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance Symbols Ruin Minimum allowed resistance of the braking resistor Rmax Maximum resistance allowed if maximum braking torque is necessary Technica
151. ABLE External Run Enable signal received o No External Run Enable signal received 15 13 Unused Embedded fieldbus 202 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual DCU profile The following tables describe the STATUS WORD content for the DCU profile DCU profile STATUS WORD See parameter 0303 Bit Name Value Status O READY 1 Drive is ready to receive start command 0 Drive is not ready 1 ENABLED 1 External run enable signal received 0 No external run enable signal received 2 STARTED 1 Drive has received start command 0 Drive has not received start command 3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating 0 Drive is not modulating 4 ZERO SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed 0 Drive has not reached zero speed 5 ACCELERATE 1 Drive is accelerating 0 Drive is not accelerating 6 DECELERATE 1 Drive is decelerating 0 Drive is not decelerating 7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint 0 Drive has not reached setpoint 8 LIMIT 1 Operation is limited by Group 20 LIMITS settings 0 Operation is within Group 20 LIMITS settings 9 SUPERVISION 1 A supervised parameter Group 32 SUPERVISION is outside its limits All supervised parameters are within limits 10 REV_REF 1 Drive reference is in reverse direction 0 Drive reference is in forward direction 11 REV ACT 1 Drive is running in reverse direction 0 Drive is running in forward direct
152. ACCELERATION ENABLED Force ramp function generator output to Zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force Fieldbus adapter ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 221 ABB Drives profile FBA CONTROL WORD Bit Name Value Commanded state Comments RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held RAMP IN ZERO a RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation Enter OPERATING RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero RESET 0 51 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if 1604 COMM OPERATING Continue normal operation 8 9 10 Unused REMOTE_CMD Fieldbus control enabled e CW OorRef 0 Retain last CW and Ref e CW 0 and Ref 0 Fieldbus control enabled e Refand deceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRL LOC EXT2 SELECT EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 2 EXT2 Effective if 1102 2 COMM Select external control location 1 EXT1 Effective if 1102 2 COMM 12 15 Status Word Unused As described earlier in section Control interface on page 210 the contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station The following table and t
153. ACQ550 User s Manual ACQ550 U1 Drives 1 200 hp List of related manuals GENERAL MANUALS ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 1 200 hp Safety Installation Start up control with I O and ID Run Control panels Application macros Parameters Embedded fieldbus Fieldbus adapter Diagnostics Maintenance Technical data Flange Mounting Instructions Kit IP21 UL type 1 Frame size Code English FMK A R1 R1 100000982 FMK A R2 R2 100000984 FMK A R3 R3 100000986 FMK A R4 R4 100000988 AC8 FLNGMT R5 R5 ACS800 AC8 FLNGMT R6 R6 PNTGO1U EN Kit IP54 UL type 12 Frame size Code English REPL 01 Ethernet POWERLINK Adapter Module User s Manual 3AUA0000052289 English RETA 01 Ethernet Adapter Module User s Manual 3AFE64539736 English RETA 02 Ethernet Adapter Module User s Manual 3AFE68895383 English RPBA 01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter User s Manual 3AFE64504215 English SREA 01 Ethernet Adapter User s Manual 3AUA0000042896 English Typical contents Safety Installation Programming Start up Diagnostics Technical data MAINTENANCE MANUALS FMK B R1 R1 100000990 FMK B R2 R2 100000992 FMK B R3 R3 100000994 FMK B R4 R4 100000996 OPTION MANUALS delivered with optional equipment OHDI 01 115 230 V Digital Input Module User s Manual 3AUA0000003101 English OREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module User s Manual 3AUA0000001935 English RCAN 01 CANopen Adapter User s Manual 3AFE64504231 English
154. AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 reduction on carbon dioxide emissions in tn 4507 CO2 CONV FACTOR Conversion factor for converting energy into CO2 emissions kg kWh or tn MWh Used for multiplying the saved energy in MWh to calculate the value of parameter 0178 SAVED CO2 reduction on carbon dioxide emissions in tn 4508 4509 PUMP POWER Pump power as a percentage of the nominal motor power when connected directly to supply DOL Used for reference when energy savings are calculated e See parameters 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 e Itis possible to use this parameter as the reference power also for other applications than pumps The reference power can also be some other constant power than a motor connected directly online ENERGY RESET Resets energy calculators 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 157 Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE This group defines set up variables for a fieldbus adapter FBA communication module For more information on these parameters refer to the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Code Description 5101 FBA TYPE Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module O NOT DEFINED Module not found or not properly connected or parameter 9802 is not set to 4 EXT FBA 1 PROFIBUS DP 32 CANopen
155. AX Depends on the signal selected with par 3408 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT 3413 DUTPUT2 MIN 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX 0 127 9 DIRECT Depends on the signal selected with par 3408 Depends on the signal selected with par 3408 Depends on the signal selected with par 3408 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 105 parameter 0105 TORQUE 3416 SIGNAL3 MIN Depends on the signal selected with par 3415 3417 SIGNAL3 MAX Depends on the signal selected with par 3415 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT 3419 DUTPUTS UNIT 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX 0 127 Depends on the signal selected with par 3415 Depends on the signal selected with par 3415 Depenas on the signal selected with par 3415 Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 77 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 3501 SENSOR TYPE 0 6 1 O NONE 3502 INPUT SELECTION 1 8 1 1 A1 3503 ALARM LIMIT Par 3501 1 3 10 200 C 1 110 C 1500 ohm 0 Par 3501 4 0 5000 ohm Par 3501 5 6 0 1 3504 FAULT LIMIT Par 3501 1 3 10 200 C 1 130 C 4000 ohm O Par 3501 4 0 5000 ohm Par 3501 5 6 0 1 Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 3601 TIMERS ENABLE 6 7 1 O NOT SEL 3602 START T
156. CELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1 s 5 0s 2203 DECELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1 s 5 0s 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 0 0 LINEAR 0 1 1000 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1 s 60 0 s 2206 DECELER TIME 2 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1 s 60 0 s 2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 0 0 LINEAR 0 1 1000 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 2208 EMERG DEC TIME 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 1 0s 2209 RAMP INPUT O 6 7 1 O NOT SEL Group 23 SPEED CONTROL 2301 PROP GAIN 0 00 200 00 0 01 5 00 2302 INTEGRATION TIME 0 00 600 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s 2303 DERIVATION TIME 0 10000 ms 1ms 0 ms 2304 ACC COMPENSATION 0 00 600 00 s 0 01 s 0 00 s 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN O OFF 1 2 ON 1 0 OFF Group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL O OFF 1 2 ON 1 0 OFF 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 0 Hz 0 rpm 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 0 Hz 0 rpm 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 0 Hz 0 rpm 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 0 Hz 0 rpm 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 0 HZ O rpm 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 HI 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 0 Hz 0 rpm Group 26 MOTOR CONTROL 2601 FLUX OPT ENABLE O OFF 1 2 ON 1 O OFF 2602 FLUX BRAKING O OFF 1 ON 1 O OFF 2603 IR COMP VOLT 0 0 100 0 V 0 1V Size dependent 2604 IR COMP FREQ 0 100 1 80 2605 U F RATIO 1 LINEAR
157. CHNG LEVEL O NOT SEL 1 TIMED FUNC 1 Enables autochange when Timed function 1 is active 2 4 TIMED FUNC 2 4 Enables autochange when Timed function 2 4 is active MOTORS Sets the actual number of PFC controlled motors maximum 7 motors 1 speed regulated 3 connected direct on line and 3 spare motors This value includes also the speed regulated motor This value must be compatible with the number of relays allocated to PFC if the Autochange function is used e If Autochange function is not used the speed regulated motor does not need to have a relay output allocated to PFC but it needs to be included in this value 8128 AUX START ORDER Sets the start order of the auxiliary motors 1 EVEN RUNTIME Time sharing is active Evens out the cumulative run time of the auxiliary motors The start order depends on the run time The auxiliary motor whose cumulative run time is shortest is started first then the motor whose cumulative run time is the second shortest etc When the demand drops the first motor to be stopped is the one whose cumulative run time is longest 2 RELAY ORDER The start order is fixed to be the order of the relays Parameters 176 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Group 98 OPTIONS This group configures for options in particular enabling serial communication with the drive Code Description 9802 COMM PROT SEL Selects the communication protocol O NOT S
158. D Run at any time by pressing CQ After the ID Run is completed the alarm display is not shown LOC YU FAULT any more FAULT 11 If the ID Run fails the fault display presented on the right is ID RUN FAIL SHOW 100 00 Start up control with I O and ID Run 42 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Start up control with I O and ID Run ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 43 Control panel W WW control panel features The ACQ550 W WW control panel ACQ CP AQ features Status LED x Green when normal ta Water A if flashing or red see Diagnostics HELP always available x0201 Language selection for the display Drive connection that can be made or detached at any time Start up assistant to facilitate drive commissioning e Copy function for moving parameters to other ACQ550 drives e Backup function for saving parameter sets Context sensitive help Real time clock General display features Soft key functions The soft key functions are defined by text displayed just above each key Display contrast To adjust display contrast simultaneously press bw and lt 4 gt or S v as appropriate Control panel 44 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual W WW control panel modes The W WW control panel has several different modes for configuring operating and diagnosing the drive The modes are e Standard Display Mode Shows drive status information and operates the drive
159. EED Check for and correct Parameter settings for 2001 and 2002 e Adequacy of motor braking torque e Applicability of torque control Brake chopper and resistor 25 RESERVED Not used 26 DRIVE ID Internal fault Configuration Block Drive ID is not valid Contact your local ABB representative 27 CONFIG FILE Internal configuration file has an error Contact your local ABB representative Diagnostics ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Fault Fault name in ae code panel Description and recommended corrective action 28 SERIAL 1 ERR Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct e Fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME e Communication settings Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE or Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL as appropriate e Poor connections and or noise on line 29 EFB CON FILE Error in reading the configuration file for the embedded fieldbus 30 FORCE TRIP Fault trip forced by the fieldbus See the fieldbus User s Manual 31 EFB 1 Fault code reserved for the embedded fieldbus EFB protocol application 32 EFB 2 The meaning is protocol dependent 33 EFB 3 34 MOTOR PHASE Fault in the motor circuit One of the motor phases is lost Check for and correct e Motor fault e Motor cable fault Thermal relay fault if used Internal fault 35 OUTP WIRING Possible power wiring error detected When the drive is not running it moni
160. EL No communication protocol selected 1 STD MODBUS The drive communicates with Modbus via the RS485 channel X1 communications terminal See also Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL 4 EXT FBA The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in option slot 2 of the drive See also Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 177 Embedded fieldbus Overview The ACQ550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard serial communication protocols When using serial communication the ACQ550 can either receive all of its control information from the fieldbus or e be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available control locations such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel Fieldbus controller Fieldbus Other devices Connect using either e standard embedded fieldbus EFB at terminals X1 28 32 A e fieldbus adapter FBA module mounted DSL in slot 2 option Rxxx Two basic serial communications configurations are available e embedded fieldbus EFB Using the RS485 interface at terminals X1 28 32 on the control board a control system can communicate with the drive using the Modbus protocol For protocol and profile descriptions see sections Modbus protocol technical data and ABB control profiles techni
161. ER OF TRIALS Example Three faults have occurred in Sets the number of allowed automatic resets within a trial period defined the trial time The last is reset only if the by 3102 TRIAL TIME value for 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS is 3 or e If the number of automatic resets exceeds this limit within the trial more time the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains stopped Trial time Starting then requires a successful reset performed from the control A Time panel or from a source selected by 1604 FAULT RESET SEL x A E Ste TIAE TIME x Automatic reset Sets the time period used for counting and limiting the number of resets i e See 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS 3103 DELAY TIME Sets the delay time between a fault detection and attempted drive restart e If DELAY TIME zero the drive resets immediately 3104 AR OVERCURRENT Sets the automatic reset for the overcurrent function on or off O DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault OVERCURRENT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE Sets the automatic reset for the overvoltage function on or off O DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault DC OVERVOLT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE Sets the automatic reset for the
162. ERUIT ERR 255 input power 2 2 0 nnn 254 1010 Le ii a EO CERCA es 262 capacitor reforming 00 eee eee eee eee 245 replacement 00 e eee ee 245 category IEC EN 61800 3 definition DA Shh ai auld AN ape ng wei PA gece NR 281 C3 A ae Rid E RE Se Rm 281 CB see control board CE marking 3a elk bed ode ge RES 279 chopper see braking clock see time amp date 53 CO2 conversion factor see energy saving communication see EFB embedded fieldbus see EFB drive parameters see FBA fieldbus adapter see FBA drive parameters conduit Kita inv a o ee aaea 19 config file CPI firmware revision parameter 157 faulticode sex rere Ama AN 234 id revision parameter 157 revision parameter 157 connections CONTON sce ti KA LLANA ere eer UR ue 24 diagram a EA A ee 24 EFB COMM enoe e e ak A a aa 178 FBA module 212 A achat ona bot hla Maso ed chalets 24 constant speed see speed constant construction code eee eee 13 contamination levels environmentlimit 277 shipping liMit o ooooooo o o 277 contrast control panel 43 control connection specifications 269 location data parameter 85 terminal specifications 270 through I O interface 39 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual control board overtemperature fault code
163. ES Contains a count of valid Modbus messages received by the drive e During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly 5205 PARITY ERRORS Contains a count of the characters with a parity error that is received from the bus For high counts check Parity settings of devices connected on the bus they must not differ e Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors 5206 FRAME ERRORS Contains a count of the characters with a framing error that the bus receives For high counts check Communication speed settings of devices connected on the bus they must not differ e Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors 5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS Contains a count of the characters received that cannot be placed in the buffer Longest possible message length for the drive is 128 bytes e Received messages exceeding 128 bytes overflow the buffer The excess characters are counted 5208 CRC ERRORS Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error that the drive receives For high counts check e Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors e CRC calculations for possible errors Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 159 Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL This group defines set up variables used for an embedded fieldbus EFB communication protocol The standard EFB protocol in the ACQ550 is Modbus See chapter Embedded fieldbus page 177
164. Hz 3010 STALL FUNCTION O NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 ALARM 1 O NOT SEL 3011 STALL FREQUENCY 0 5 50 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 20 0 Hz 3012 STALL TIME 10 400 s 1s 20s 3017 EARTH FAULT O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 ENABLE Y 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 CONST SP 7 1 O NOT SEL 3 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM FAULT TIME 0 0 600 0 s 0 1s 3 0s 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 3023 WIRING FAULT O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 ENABLE Y 3024 CB TEMP FAULT O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 ENABLE 3028 EARTH FAULT CONFIG 0 100 1 100 Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS 0 5 1 0 3102 TRIAL TIME 1 0 600 0 s 0 1 s 30 0 s 3103 DELAY TIME 0 0 120 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s 3104 AR OVERCURRENT O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE 3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE 3106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE 3107 AR Al lt MIN O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE 3108 AR EXTERNAL FLT O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE Group 32 SUPERVISION 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 1 102 parameter 0102 OUTPUT SPEED 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO Depends on the signal selected with par 3201 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Depends on the signal selected with par 3201 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 1 104 parameter 0104 CURRENT 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM L
165. I1 DI3 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI4 First PFC Relay DI5 First PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI6 Second PFC Relay DI6 Free 3 Not allowed DI1 DI3 Free DI4 First PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI6 Third PFC Relay 4 6 Not allowed Not allowed Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 173 Code Description 5 DI5 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI5 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 and otherwise enabled DI5 Speed Reg Motor DIG Free DI1 DI4 Free DI5 Speed Reg Motor DI6 First PFC Relay No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI4 Free Not allowed DI1 DI4 Free DI5 First PFC Relay DI6 Free 2 Not allowed DI1 DI4 Free DI5 First PFC Relay DI6 Second PFC Relay 3 6 Not allowed Not allowed motor e Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 6 DI6 Enables the Interlock function and assigns digital input DI6 to the interlock signal for the speed regulated No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays 0 DI1 DI5 Free Not allowed DI6 Speed Reg Motor 1 Not
166. IME 1 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3603 STOP TIME 1 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3604 START DAY 1 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3605 STOP DAY 1 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3606 START TIME 2 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3607 STOP TIME 2 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3608 START DAY 2 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3609 STOP DAY 2 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3610 START TIME 3 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3611 STOP TIME 3 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3612 START DAY 3 Tu 1 1 MONDAY 3613 sTOP DAY 3 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3614 START TIME 4 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3615 STOP TIME 4 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3616 START DAY 4 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3617 STOP DAY 4 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3622 BOOSTER SEL 6 6 1 O NOT SEL 3623 BOOSTER TIME 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 4 SRC 0 31 1 O NOT SEL 3629 Group 37 USER LOAD CURVE 3701 USER LOAD C MODE 0 3 1 O NOT SEL 3702 USER LOAD C FUNC 1 FAULT 2 ALARM 1 1 FAULT 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 10 400 s 1s 20s 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 5 Hz 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 0 600 1 10 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 0 600 1 300 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz 3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 0 600 1 15 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 0 600 1 300 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 43 Hz 3711 LOAD TORQ Low 3 0 600 1 25 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 0 600 1 300 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 50 Hz Parameters
167. IRECT 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM Selects the second parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 3409 SIGNAL2 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3402 3410 SIGNAL2 MAX Defines the maximum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3403 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Defines the decimal point location for the second display parameter See parameter 3404 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT Selects the units used with the second display parameter See parameter 3405 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3406 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3407 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM Selects the third parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 3416 SIGNAL3 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3402 3417 SIGNAL3 MAX Defines the maximum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3403 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM Defines the decimal point location for the third display parameter See parameter 3404 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT Selects the units used with the third display parameter See parameter 3405 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter 3406 Parameters 134 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description
168. NABLE 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE TIME 1 1 ENABLE TIME 2 ENABLE 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 500 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Y 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz U1 60 0 62 0 Hz Y 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL 6 7 1 O MIN TORQUE 1 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL 6 7 1 O MAX TORQUE 1 2015 IMIN TORQUE 1 600 0 0 096 0 196 300 0 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 600 0 0 0 0 1 300 0 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 0 0 600 0 0 1 300 0 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 0 0 600 0 0 1 300 0 Group 21 START STOP 2101 START FUNCTION Vector control modes 1 2 8 1 8 RAMP Y Scalar control mode 1 5 8 2102 STOP FUNCTION 1 COAST 2 RAMP 1 1 COAST 2103 DC MAGN TIME 0 00 10 00 s 0 01 s 0 30 s 2104 DCHOLD CTL 0 NOT SEL 1 DC HOLD 1 O NOT SEL Y 2 DC BRAKING 2105 DC HOLD SPEED 0 360 rpm 1 rpm 5 rpm 2106 DC CURR REF 0 100 1 30 2107 DC BRAKE TIME 0 0 250 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s 2108 START INHIBIT 0 2 oFF 1 2 ON 1 O OFF 2109 EMERG STOP SEL 6 6 1 O NOT SEL 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR 15 300 1 100 2112 ZERO SPEED DELAY 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 60 0 s 0 1s 0 0 s NOT SEL 2113 START DELAY 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 s 0 00 s Parameters 74 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User Group 22 ACCEL DECEL 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL 6 7 1 O NOT SEL 2202 AC
169. NOT SEL Not selected 1 p11 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the speed to O e Activating the digital input forces the speed to zero after which the speed will stay at 0 e De activating the digital input speed control resumes normal operation 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the speed to O e See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 13 of the Command Word 1 as the control for forcing the speed to O The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines inverted digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the speed to O De activating the digital input forces the speed to O Activating the digital input speed control resumes normal operation 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the speed to O e See DH INV above Parameters 118 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Group 23 SPEED CONTROL This group defines variables used for speed control operation Code Description 2301 PROP GAIN Sets the relative gain for the speed controller e Larger values may cause speed oscillation e The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step error remains constant Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set the proportional gain Controller output Controller output kag
170. NV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input e See DI1 INV above 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 Defines the External Fault 2 signal input and the drive response to an external fault e See parameter 3003 above 3005 MOT THERM PROT Defines the drive response to motor overheating O NOT SEL No response and or motor thermal protection not set up 1 FAULT When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 110 C displays a fault 9 MOT OVERTEMP and the drive coasts to stop 2 ALARM When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 125 Code Description 3006 MOT THERM TIME Motor load 4 Sets the motor thermal time constant for the motor temperature model e This is the time required for the motor to reach 63 of the final t temperature with steady load For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA Temp rise class motors use the rule of thumb MOTOR THERM TIME equals 10090 f Pa 35 times t6 where t6 in seconds is specified by the motor 63 t J manufacturer as the time that the motor can safely operate at six times its rated current The thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s for a Class P 3006 20 trip curve 700 s and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s 3007 MOT LOAD CU
171. Na ANG dr Pan Ne EM MS 177 Planning s 2e Vide tuu ew NG artis Pee Ria Pa eles 178 Mechanical and electrical installation EFB o o o o oooooooo 178 Communication set up EFB 0 ccc eens 179 Activate drive control functions EFB 0 000 cece eee nooo 181 Feedback from the drive EFB 0 000 cece eee eee 185 Table of contents ACS550 U1 User s Manual Diagnostics EFB n estais anti bei Ren e t wd Re n eo e cts 186 Modbus protocol technical data llle 189 ABB control profiles technical data llli 197 Fieldbus adapter OVerViGW Nana sex LE vene erbe sese TR REM NERA RA Keds 209 Planning 5t crias te ORC MIU qm vi qae X iP Rd e 211 Mechanical and electrical installation FBA sluuun 212 Communication set up FBA 0 e ce eee 213 Activate drive control functions FBA 0 00 e cece eee 213 Feedback from the drive FBA 002 cee eee eee 216 Diagnoses FEBA 2 24 da sas ann e a aa 217 ABB Drives profile technical data llli 220 Generic profile technical data llle 228 Diagnostics DidgHosuc dISDIdys na rne siue AA 231 C rrecting faults Tors vut mec epus NU ae a aa mU eles ees 232 Correcting alarmS ui tee Ad tei s vada e usu dada S ade 238 Maintenance Maintenance intervals llle 241 Heatsink teen or Oe ae ed e RUD e KANA n i T e a 241 Main fan replacement aa aaa 242 Internal encl
172. O Depends on the signal selected with par 3204 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI Depends on the signal selected with par 3204 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 1 105 parameter 0105 TORQUE Parameters 76 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO Depends on the signal selected with par 3207 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI Depends on the signal selected with par 3207 Group 33 INFORMATION 3301 FIRMWARE 0000 FFFF hex 1 Firmware version 3302 LOADING PACKAGE 0000 FFFF hex 1 Type dependent 3303 TEST DATE yy ww 0 01 3304 DRIVE RATING Type dependent 3305 PARAMETER TABLE 0000 FFFF hex 1 Type dependent Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 102 parameter 0102 OUTPUT SPEED 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Depends on the signal selected with par 3401 3403 SIGNAL1 MAX Depends on the signal selected with par 3401 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT 0 127 Depends on the signal selected with par 3401 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Depends on the signal selected with par 3401 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Depends on the signal selected with par 3401 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 104 parameter 0104 CURRENT 3409 SIGNAL2 MIN Depends on the signal selected with par 3408 3410 SIGNAL2 M
173. O2 Output current 0 20 mA Note 3 1119 AGND Analog output circuit common The sensor for AI2 is powered exter nally See the manufacturer s instruc 10124V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC tions To use sensors supplied by the 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common drive aux voltage output see page 65 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start Stop Hand Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 EXT1 EXT2 selection Activation selects PID control 15 DI3 Constant speed selection 1 Not used in PID control 16 DI4 Constant speed selection 2 Not used in PID control 17 DI5 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 18 DI6 Start Stop PID Activation starts the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A js Default operation Note 2 Code 21 RO1B i Ready gt 19 connected to 21 0 open 1 connected 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable DI3 D4 Output 23 RO2A Default operation 0 o Reference through AT 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 TO CONST SPEED 1 1202 Rose malay Kai a programmable 5 71 coNSTSPEED2 1203 efault operation 27 RO3B E Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 1 1 CONST SPEED SOM Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting e Analog reference Al1 e Analog output AO1 Speed J1 Actual value Al2 Analog output AO2 Current Sp Al1 0 10V e Start stop hand PID DI1 6 e Relay output 1 Ready 9 p A12 0 4 20 mA e E
174. ON 11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location 2 EXT2 selected 0 External control location 1 ExT1 selected 12 EXT RUN ENABLE 1 External Run Enable signal received 0 No External Run Enable signal received 13 15 Unused Fieldbus adapter ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 223 The state diagram below describes the start stop function of CONTROL WORD CW and STATUS WORD SW bits From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit1 0 T OFF3 OFF2 FAULT SW Bit3 1 SW Bit5 0 ACTIVE ACTIVE SW Bit4 0 i CW Bit7 1 n f 0 I 0 y L L From any state OFF1 CW BitO 0 EUN MAINS OFF i SW Bit6 1 SW Bit1 0 OFF1 INHIBITED ACTIVE n f 0 I 0 Power ON E CW Bit0 0 ABCD NOT READY png TO SWITCH on SW Bit0 0 CW Bit3 0 CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x110 T OPERATION READY TO HO SW Bit2 0 INHIBITED SWITCH ON SW Bit0 1 OPERATION INHIBITED CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x111 oo Be SW Bitt 1 OPERATE CW Bit4 0 CW Bit3 1 and SW Bit12 1 OPERATION ou ENABLED SW Bit2 1 A 1 CW Bit5 0 CW xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111 RFG OUTPUT ENABLED CW Bit6 0 B lt KEY E State mm State change RFG ACCELERATOR CW CONTROL WORD ENABLED SW STATUS WORD C 1 D CW xxxx x1xx xx11 1111 CW xxxx x1xx x111 1111 lt RFG Ramp Function Generator Param 0104 CURRENT f Param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ n Speed Fie
175. PFC or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is enabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV value gt 0 0 Parameter setting ACQ550 Relay assignment 1 Autochange enabled 2 RO1 RO2 ROS RO4 RO5 ROG 2 1 31 1 31 X 31 Ohm PFC PFC X PFC PFC PFC X PFC PFC XX X X X PFC 31 31 PFC PFC X No auxiliary motors but the autochange function is in use Working as a standard PID control C3 C2 Qa m a o x9 x gt lt Depas If gt lt X X X A x 2 x x x o a x x L Ol x w o a gt lt TI X x lt gt lt gt lt gt lt Xx X lt gt lt TI gt lt gt lt 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets the Cd interval between changes The Autochange time interval only applies to the time when AGQS50 the speed regulated motor is running e See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of the Autochange function El The drive always coasts to stop when autochange is im performed e Autochange enabled requires parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS 1 value gt 0 0 1 TEST MODE Forces the interval to value 36 48 s 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the Autochange function A 0 1 336 The operating time interval the time when the start signal is on between automatic motor changes J WARNING When enabled the Autochange function mr r
176. R 16 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40011 5317 EFB PAR 17 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40012 5318 EFB PAR 18 For Modbus Sets additional delay in milliseconds before the ACQ550 begins transmitting response to the master request 5319 EFB PAR 19 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Control Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Control Word 5320 EFB PAR 20 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Status Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Status Word Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 161 Group 64 LOAD ANALYZER This group defines the load analyzer which can be used for analyzing the customer s process and sizing the drive and the motor The peak value is logged at 2 ms level and the distribution loggers are updated on 0 2 s 200 ms time level Three different values can be logged 1 Amplitude logger 1 The measured current is logged continuously The distribution as a percentage of the nominal current 2y is shown in ten classes 2 Peak value logger One signal in group 1 can be logged for the peak maximum value The peak value of the signal peak time time when the peak value was detected as well the frequency current and DC voltage at the peak time are shown 3 Amplitude logger 2 One signal in group 1 can be logged for amplitude distribution The base value 100 value can be set by the user The first logger ca
177. R6 300 980 150 490 12 kHz switching frequency is not available WARNING Using a motor cable longer than specified in the table above may cause permanent damage to the drive Motor thermal protection According to regulations the motor must be protected against thermal overload and the current must be switched off when overload is detected The drive includes a motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current when necessary Depending on a drive parameter value see parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE the function either monitors a calculated temperature value based on a motor thermal model see parameters 3005 MOT THERM PROT 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ or an actual temperature indication given by motor temperature sensors see Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS The user can tune the thermal model further by feeding in additional motor and load data Technical data 262 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual The most common temperature sensors are motor sizes IEC180 225 thermal switch e g Klixon e motor sizes IEC200 250 and larger PTC or PT100 Ground fault protection ACQ550 internal fault logic detects ground faults in the drive motor or motor cable This fault logic e is NOT a personal safety or fire protection feature can be disabled using parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT Note Disabling earth fault ground fault may void the warranty could be tripped by leakage currents
178. REF Uses appropriate REF MAX SWITCH A OR B e 1105 REF1 MAX when REF1 is active A 1108 REF2 MAX when REF2 is active B 2 PID2OUTPUT Uses the absolute maximum speed or frequency Switch C e 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED if 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ if 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ Add Ramped ref WET Trimmed ref Switch LL par 4230 Trim scale Mul Mul 3 y gt Ext ref 1 max A Lua off x X aa gt Ext ref 2 max B proportional Abs max speed direct Select freq C par 4232 y Trimming PID2 ref PID2 ret 1 PID 2 Trimming PID2 out Parameters 156 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Group 45 ENERGY SAVING This group defines the setup of calculation and optimization of energy savings Note The values of saved energy parameters 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 are derived from subtracting the drive s energy consumed from the direct on line DOL consumption calculated on the basis of parameter 4508 PUMP POWER As such the accuracy of the values is dependent on the accuracy of the power estimate entered in that parameter Code Description 4502 ENERGY PRICE Price of energy per kWh Used for reference when energy savings are calculated See parameters 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED
179. REF1 Reference 2 REF2 Status Word oO a A Oj N Actual Value 1 ACT1 Actual Value 2 ACT2 Fieldbus adapter 228 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Generic profile technical data Overview The generic profile aims to fulfill the industry standard drive profile for each protocol e g PROFIdrive for PROFIBUS AC DC Drive for DeviceNet Control Word As described earlier in section Control interface on page 210 the CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system For specific CONTROL WORD content see the user s manual provided with the FBA module Status Word As described earlier in section Control interface on page 210 the contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station For specific STATUS WORD content see the user s manual provided with the FBA module Reference As described earlier in section Control interface on page 210 the REFERENCE word is a speed or frequency reference Note REF2 is not supported by the Generic Drive profiles Reference scaling REFERENCE scaling is fieldbus type specific However at the drive the meaning of a 100 REFERENCE value is fixed as described in the table below For a detailed description on the range and scaling of the REFERENCE see the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Generic profile Reference Range jpegs Scaling Remarks ype REF Fieldb
180. RELAY STATUS Group 14 Damper open I I I Damper Damper closed closed DAMPER amp gt gt STATUS Damper Damper opening closing time time AA RUN ENABLE SIGNAL from the damper end switch when the damper is fully opened Parameter 1601 MOTOR STATUS 1 l l l A Acceleration Drive coasts _ _ gt gt time to stop Par 2202 Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 109 Code Description 1609 DISPLAY ALARMS 1610 START ENABLE 2 Selects the source of the start enable 2 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality O NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal 1 Di Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal This digital input must be activated for start enable 2 signal e f the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2022 on the panel display The drive will not start until start enable 2 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal e See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 2 signal Bit 3 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 2 signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted
181. REQ 1 Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor starts if No auxiliary motors are running f Hz ACQ550 output frequency exceeds the limit E 8109 1 Hz A P8115 lt e Output frequency stays above a relaxed limit MAX 8109 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D P 8109 1 After the first auxiliary motor starts P 8109 Output frequency decreases by the value 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 P8112 1 e In effect the output of the speed regulated motor drops to E compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor MIN See the figure where e A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 e B Output frequency increase during the start delay C 4 e C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency 1 increases 1 On 0 t te Note 8109 START FREQ 1 value must be between 8112 LOW FREQ 1 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 1 8110 START FREQ 2 Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary motor See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The second auxiliary motor starts if One auxiliary motor is running ACQ550 output frequency exceeds the limit 8110 1 Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8110 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D 8111 START FREQ 3 Sets the frequency limit used to start the third auxiliary motor See 8109
182. REQ AT FLT The frequency Hz at the time the last fault occurred 0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT The DC bus voltage V at the time the last fault occurred 0407 CURRENT AT FLT The motor current A at the time the last fault occurred 0408 TORQUE AT FLT The motor torque at the time the last fault occurred 0409 STATUS AT FLT The drive status hex code word at the time the last fault occurred 0410 DI 1 3 AT FLT The status of digital inputs 1 3 at the time the last fault occurred 0411 DI 4 6 AT FLT The status of digital inputs 4 6 at the time the last fault occurred 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 Fault code of the second last fault Read only 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 Fault code of the third last fault Read only Parameters 92 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Group 10 START STOP DIR This group defines external sources EXT1 and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and direction changes e locks direction or enables direction control To select between the two external locations use the next group parameter 1102 Code Description 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS Defines external control location 1 ExT1 the configuration of start stop and direction commands O NOT SEL No external start stop and direction command source 1 DI1 Two wire Start Stop e Start Stop is through digital input DI1 DI1 activated Start DIT de activated Stop Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3
183. ROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD requires that The drive is in remote REM control e The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands set using parameters such as 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 ExT2 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL The serial communication channel used is configured to use an ABB control profile For example to use the control profile ABB DRV FULL requires both parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 1 STD MODBUS and parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 2 ABB DRV FULL Embedded fieldbus 198 ABB Drives profile The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ACQ550 U1 User s Manual ABB Drives profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 5319 Commanded Name Value state Comments 0 OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE CONTROL z 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205 Normal command sequence Enter OFF1 ACTIVE Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF2 inactive CONTROL gt 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence Enter OFF2 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED 2 OFF3 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF3 inactive CONTROL a eas m 0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within
184. ROT SEL 4 EXT FBA The external plug in fieldbus adapter is configured to use the drive profile mode or drive profile objects The content of the CONTROL WORD depends on the protocol profile used See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or section ABB Drives profile technical data on page 220 Status Word The STATUS WORD is a 16 bit word containing status information sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller The content of the STATUS WORD depends on the protocol profile used See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or section ABB Drives profile technical data on page 220 Reference The contents of each REFERENCE word can be used as speed or frequency reference isa 16 bit word comprised of a sign bit and a 15 bit integer e Negative references indicating reversed rotation direction are indicated by the two s complement of the corresponding positive reference value The use of a second reference REF2 is supported only when a protocol is configured for the ABB Drives profile Reference scaling is fieldbus type specific See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or the following sections as appropriate e Reference scaling on page 224 ABB Drives profile technical data e Reference scaling on page 228 Generic profile technical data Actual Values Planning Actual Values are 16 bit words containing information on selected operations of the drive Drive Actua
185. RT ENABLE 2 MISSING 6 Al2 LOSS EMERGENCY STOP 7 PANEL LOSS ENCODER ERROR 8 DEVICE OVERTEMP FIRST START 9 MOTOR TEMP Reserved 10 Reserved USER LOAD CURVE 11 MOTOR STALL START DELAY 12 AUTORESET Reserved 13 AUTOCHANGE Reserved 14 PFCILOCK Reserved 15 Reserved Reserved Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 91 Group 04 FAULT HISTORY This group stores a recent history of the faults reported by the drive Code Description 0401 LAST FAULT O Clear the fault history on panel NO RECORD n Fault code of the last recorded fault The fault code is displayed as a name See section Fault listing on page 232 for the fault codes and names The fault name shown for this parameter may be shorter than the corresponding name in the fault listing which shows the names as they are shown in the fault display 0402 FAULT TIME 1 The day on which the last fault occurred Either as A date if real time clock is operating The number of days after power on if real time clock is not used or was not set 0403 FAULT TIME 2 The time at which the last fault occurred Either as Real time in format hh mm ss if real time clock is operating The time since power on minus the whole days reported in 0402 in format hh mm ss if real time clock is not used or was not set 0404 SPEED AT FLT The motor speed rpm at the time the last fault occurred 0405 F
186. RVE Output current relative to Sets the maximum allowable operating load of the motor 4 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR With the default value 100 motor overload protection is functioning when the constant current exceeds 127 of the parameter 9906 150 MOTOR NOM CURR value The default overloadability is at the same level as what motor manufacturers typically allow below 30 C 86 F ambient a des temperature and below 1000 m 3300 ft altitude When the ambient 127 temperature exceeds 30 C 86 F or the installation altitude is over p 3999 50 1000 m 3300 ft decrease the parameter 3007 value according to the motor manufacturer s recommendation l Example If the constant protection level needs to be 115 of the motor nominal current set parameter 3007 value to 91 P 3009 115 127 100 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD Sets the maximum allowable current at zero speed Value is relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ Sets the break point frequency for the motor load curve Example Thermal protection trip times when parameters 3006 MOT THERM TIME 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD have default values o h A p 1 on 3 0 1 60s 251 lo Output current f 90 s In Nominal motor current 2 0 4 fo Output frequency 180 s fank Break point frequency 1 5 4 300 s A Trip time 600 s Wi e E 0 5 4 fol fark 0 r r a
187. Requirements Checking and conclusions R3 frame size 4 kHz fsw Category C3 300 m 980 ft cable Check operational limits for R3 and 4 kHz gt a 300 m 980 ft cable cannot be used even with a du dt filter A sine filter must be used and the voltage drop of the cable must be taken into account in the installation Check EMC limits gt EMC requirements for Category C3 are met with a 300 m 980 ft cable R5 frame size 8 kHz fsw Category C3 150 m 490 ft cable R6 frame size 4 kHz fsw EMC limits not applicable 150 m 490 ft cable Check operational limits for R5 and 8 kHz gt for a 150 m 490 ft cable the basic unit is sufficient Check EMC limits gt EMC requirements for Category C3 cannot be met with a 300 m 980 ft cable The installation configuration is not possible An EMC plan is recommended to overcome the situation Check operational limits for R6 and 4 kHz gt for a 150 m 490 ft cable the basic unit is sufficient EMC limits do not need to be checked as there are no EMC requirements Motor cable length for 600 V drives The table below shows the maximum motor cable lengths for 600 V drives with different switching frequencies As the 600 V drives are not CE approved cable lengths for EMC limits are not given Maximum cable length for 600 V drives Operational limits 1 4 kHz 8 12 kHz Frame size m ft m ft R2 100 330 100 330 R3 R4 200 660 100 330
188. ST 1 FORWARD 1 FORWARD 1102 ExT1 EXT2 SEL O ExT1 0 EXT 0 EXT O EXT1 3 DI3 2 DI2 3 DI3 1103 REF1 SELECT 1 AI1 1 AI1 1 AI1 12 12A 124A 1 Al1 DI3U 4D NC 1106 REF2 SELECT 2 Al2 2 Al2 2 Al2 2 Al2 2 2A2 19 PID1OUT 19 PID1OUT 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 9 DI3 4 10 D14 5 9 DI3 4 5 DI5 O NOT SEL 9 DI3 4 O NOT SEL 1304 MINIMUM AI2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1 READY 1 READY 1 READY 1 READY 1 READY 1 READY 2 RUN 1402 RELAY OUTPUT2 2 RUN 2 RUN 2 RUN 2 RUN 2 RUN 2 RUN 3 FAULT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 3 FAULT 1 8 FAULT 1 3 FAULT 1 8 FAULT 1 8 FAULT 1 3 FAULT 1 31 PFC 1501 JAO1 CONTENT SEL 10320103 102 0102 10220102 102 0102 310220102 102 0102 10320103 OUTPUT FREQ SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED OUTPUT FREQ 1507 A02 CONTENT SEL 104 104 104 104 104 104 130 CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT PID 1 FBK 1510 MINIMUM A02 0 0 mA 0 0 mA 0 0 mA 0 0 mA 0 0 mA 0 0 mA 4 0 mA 1601 RUN ENABLE O NOT SEL 0 NOT SEL 6 DIG 6 DI6 4 DI4 5 DI5 2 DI2 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL 5 DI5 0 NOT SEL 5 DI5 O NOT SEL 0 NOT SEL 0 NOT SEL 0 NOT SEL 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 10320103 102 0102 102 0102 102 0102 102 0102 102 0102 103 0103 OUTPUT FREQ SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED OUTPUT FREQ 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 10320103 102 0102 10220102 10220102 102 0102 102 0102 103 0103 OUTPUT FREQ SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED OUTPUT FREQ 4001
189. START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The third auxiliary motor starts if Two auxiliary motors are running ACQ550 output frequency exceeds the limit 8111 1 Hz Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8111 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D Parameters 166 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 8112 LOW FREQ 1 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor stops if Only one the first auxiliary motor is running f Hz e ACQB550 output frequency drops below the limit A 8112 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8112 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D z E 09 E After the first auxiliary motor stops baga O Output frequency increases by the value P 8112 A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 N e In effect the output of the speed regulated motor increases to P 8112 1 compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor MIN See the figure where e A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 B Output frequency decrease during the stop delay C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency C decreases 1 On j e Grey path Shows hysteresis if time is reversed the path 1 t backwards is not the same For details on the path for starting 0 see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1 Note 8112 LOW FREQ 1 value must be between 2007
190. START TIME 3 3611 STOP TIME 3 3612 START DAY 3 3613 STOP DAY 3 Time Period 4 3614 START TIME 4 3615 STOP TIME 4 3616 START DAY 4 3617 STOP DAY 4 Booster 3622 BOOSTER SEL 3623 BOOSTER TIME Timer 1 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC Timer 2 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC Timer 3 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC Timer 4 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC A parameter can be connected to only one timer Timer 1 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS Timer 2 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Available if OREL 01 is installed 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 4228 ACTIVATE 8126 TIMED AUTOCHNG You can use the Timed functions assistant for easy configuring For more information on the assistants see section Start Up Assistant Mode on page 47 Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 139 Code Description 3601 TIMERS ENABLE Selects the source for the timer enable signal O NOT SEL Timed functions are disabled 1 Di Defines digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal The digital input must be activated to enable the timed function 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the timed function enable signal 7 ACTIVE Timed functions are enabled 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the timed functio
191. See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT for EXT1 s reference definitions 1 DI1 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 DI1 activated EXT2 DI1 de activated EXT1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 above 7 EXT2 Selects external control location 2 EXT2 e See parameter 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS for EXT2 s Start Stop Dir definitions e See parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT for EXT2 s reference definitions 8 COMM Assigns control of the drive via external control location EXT1 or EXT2 based on the fieldbus control word Bit 5 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 defines the active external control location EXT1 or EXT2 See Fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 9 TIMED FUNC 1 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the Timed Function Timed Function activated EXT2 Timed Function de activated EXT1 See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 10 12 TIMED FUNC 2 4 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the Timed Function See TIMED FUNC 1 above 1 DI1 INV Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 DI1 activated EXT1 DIT de activated EXT2 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 INV above 1103 REF1 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF1 EXT REF 1 max
192. UNC 1 SRC Defines the time periods used by the timer O NOT SEL No time periods have been selected 1 T1 Time Period 1 selected in the timer 2 T2 Time Period 2 selected in the timer 3 T11 T2 Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer 4 T3 Time Period 3 selected in the timer 5 T1 T98 Time Periods 1 and 3 selected in the timer 6 T2 T3 Time Periods 2 and 3 selected in the timer 7 11 T2 T3 Time Periods 1 2 and 3 selected in the timer 8 14 Time Period 4 selected in the timer 9 T1 T4 Time Periods 1 and 4 selected in the timer 10 12 14 Time Periods 2 and 4 selected in the timer 11 11 T2 T4 Time Periods 1 2 and 4 selected in the timer 12 13 14 Time Periods 3 and 4 selected in the timer 13 11 T3 T4 Time Periods 1 3 and 4 selected in the timer 14 T2 13 T4 Time Periods 2 3 and 4 selected in the timer 15 T11412413414 Time Periods 1 2 3 and 4 selected in the timer 16 BOOSTER Booster selected in the timer 17 11 B Booster and Time Period 1 selected in the timer 18 T2 B Booster and Time Period 2 selected in the timer 19 11 T2 B Booster and Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer 20 T3 B Booster and Time Period 3 selected in the timer Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 141 Code Description 21 T11 T3 B Booster and Time Periods 1 and 3 selected in the timer 22 T2 T3 B Booster and Time Periods 2
193. US Parameter values are inconsistent Check for the following Extension relay module not connected and e 1410 1412 RELAY OUTPUTS 4 6 have non zero values Parameter values are inconsistent Check for and correct A parameter is set for fieldbus control e g 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 COMM but 9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 1008 PAR PFC MODE Parameter values are inconsistent 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE must be 3 SCALAR FREQ when 8123 PFC ENABLE is activated 1009 1010 1011 PAR PCU 1 RESERVED Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal frequency or speed Check for both of the following e 1x 60 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED lt 16 0 8 lt 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 120 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Motor Poles lt 0 992 Not used 1012 PAR PFC IO 1 IO configuration is not complete not enough relays are parameterized to PFC Or a conflict exists between Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS parameter 8117 NR OF AUX MOT and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 1013 PAR PFC IO 2 IO configuration is not complete the actual number of PFC motors parameter 8127 MOTORS does not match the PFC motors in Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV Diagnostics ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 237 Fault Fault pamean Description and recommended corrective action code panel 1014 PAR PFC IO 3 IO configuration is not comp
194. XT1 EXT2 selection DI2 e Relay output 2 Running or e Constant speed selection DI3 4 Relay output 3 Fault 1 1 Run enable DI5 o AIT 0 10 V v 217 Al2 0 4 20 mA Note Use the following switch on order 1 EXT1 EXT2 2 Run Enable 3 Start Application macros 64 PFC macro ACQ550 U1 User s Manual This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control PFC applications To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 7 PFC CONTROL Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF Connection example id p SCR X1 Al1 AGND t 2 D gt 10V Al2 AGND T1 He Y AO2 AO1 CO CO NI 01 A Go PO AGND 10 24V 12 DCOM 13 DI1 11 GND 14 DI2 15 DI3 16 DI4 18 DI6 17 DI5 20 RO1A 21 RO1B 19 RO1C 22 RO2C 23 RO2A 24 RO2B 26 RO3A Analog ref and actual Al1 2 Start stop manual PFC DI1 6 27 ROS3B 25 RO3C Input signals Run enable DI2 e EXT1 EXT2 selection DI3 e Interlock DI4 5 C 0 10 Signal cable shield screen External ref 1 Manual or Ext ref 2 PID PFC 0 10 V Analog input circuit common Note 1 Reference voltage 10 V DC Manual O 10V gt 0 50 Hz Actual signal PID
195. able on the right for tightening torques Note For R6 frame size refer to section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 257 7 Route the control cable through the conduit 8 Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the 10 copper shield into a bundle pig tail ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 1 I rio 9 4 a 2 do 3 1 Frame size R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 1P5007 Tightening torque N m Ib ft 1 4 1 2 5 1 8 5 6 PE 2 4 PE 1 5 15 11 40 PE 8 30 PE 6 Connect the ground shield bundle pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at the drive end Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See section Control terminals table on page 24 Use a tightening torque of 0 4 N m 0 3 Ib ft Installation ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 31 Check installation Before applying power perform the following checks v Check Installation environment conforms to the drive s specifications for ambient conditions The drive is mounted securely Space around the drive meets the drive s specifications for cooling The motor and driven equipment are ready for start For IT systems and corner grounded TN systems The internal EMC filter is disconnected see section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 23 The drive
196. al Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED as the 100 reference and that 9908 1500 rpm 2 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ as the 100 reference and that 9907 500 Hz Actual Value mapping See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Fieldbus adapter 230 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Fieldbus adapter ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 231 Diagnostics WARNING Do not attempt any measurement parts replacement or other service procedure not described in this manual Such action will void the warranty may endanger correct operation and increase downtime and expense WARNING All electrical installation and maintenance work described in this chapter should only be undertaken by qualified service personnel The safety instructions in chapter Safety on page 5 must be followed Diagnostic displays The drive detects error situations and reports them using e the green and red LED on the body of the drive e the status LED on the control panel if an ACQ Control Panel is attached to the drive e the control panel display if a control panel is attached to the drive e the Fault Word and Alarm Word parameter bits parameters 0305 to 0309 See Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS on page 89 for the bit definitions The form of the display depends on the severity of the error You can specify the severity for many errors by directing the drive to e ignore the err
197. al speed range 2 e See parameter 2503 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 3 e See parameter 2502 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 HI Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 3 e See parameter 2503 Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 121 Group 26 MOTOR CONTROL This group defines variables used for motor control Code Description 2601 FLUX OPT ENABLE Changes the magnitude of the flux depending on the actual load Flux Optimization can reduce the total energy consumption and noise and it should be enabled for drives that usually operate below nominal load 0 OFF Disables the feature 1 ON Enables the feature 2602 FLUX BRAKING Brakin Provides faster deceleration by raising the level of ordue 2 Rated motor power magnetization in the motor when needed instead of 120 3 1 2 2 kW limiting the deceleration ramp By increasing the flux in Without flux braking 2 15 kW the motor the energy of the mechanical system is 3 37 kW changed to thermal energy in the motor 80 4 75 kW Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 or2 VECTOR SPEED O OFF Disables the feature 1 ON Enables the feature 5 250 kW 2603 IR COMP VOLT IR compensation Sets the IR compensation voltage used for O Hz When enabled IR compensation provides an extra e Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE voltage boost to th
198. aling Where required REFERENCES can be scaled See the following as appropriate e Modbus Register 40002 in section Modbus protocol technical data on page 189 e Reference scaling in section ABB control profiles technical data on page 197 Miscellaneous drive control Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires e drive parameter values set as defined below e fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1601 RUN ENABLE 7 COMM Run enable by fieldbus 40001 bit 3 40031 bit 6 inverted 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 COMM Fault reset by fieldbus 40001 bit 7 40031 bit 4 1606 LOCAL LOCK 8 COMM Source for local lock selection is Does not 40031 bit 14 the fieldbus apply 1607 PARAM SAVE 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to 41607 memory then value returns to 0 1608 START ENABLE 1 7 COMM Source for start enable 1 is the Does not 40032 bit 2 fieldbus Command word apply 1609 START ENABLE 2 7 comm Source for start enable 2 is the 40032 bit 3 fieldbus Command word 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL 7 COMM Source for minimum torque 40031 bit 15 selection is the fieldbus 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL 7 COMM Source for maximum torque selection is the fieldbus 2201 ACC DEC 1
199. all parameters are saved 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to permanent memory Parameters 108 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 1608 START ENABLE 1 Selects the source of the start enable 1 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality O NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal This digital input must be activated for start enable 1 signal f the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2021 on the panel display The drive will not start until start enable 1 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 1 signal Bit 2 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 1 signal e See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal See DI1 INV above Drive started START STOP po COMMAND i Group 10 START ENABLE SIGNAL Parameters 1608 amp 1609 l l Relay energized Relay STARTED de energized
200. allowed DI1 DI5 Free DI6 First PFC Relay 2 6 Not allowed Not allowed Parameters 174 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL Selects Regulator by pass control When enabled Regulator by pass control provides a simple control mechanism without a PID regulator e Use Regulator by pass control only in special Gur applications N O NO Disables Regulator by pass control The drive Max uses the normal PFC reference 1106 REF2 SELECT 1 YES Enables Regulator by pass control e The process PID regulator is bypassed Actual value of PID is used as the PFC reference input Normally EXT REF2 is used as the PFC reference e The drive uses the feedback signal defined by 4014 FBK SEL or 4114 for the PFC frequency reference e The figure shows the relation between the control signal 4014 FBK SEL OR 4114 and the speed regulated motor s frequency in a three motor system Example In the diagram below the pumping station s P 4014 outlet flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow A lt A gt a Bo C 95 Y A No auxiliary motors running B One auxiliary motor running C Two auxiliary motors running Mains 3 3 Contactors Inlet pipe 8122 PFC START DELAY Sets the start delay for speed regulated motors in the system Using the delay the drive works as follows e Switches on the contactor of th
201. always stops the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A Fx Default operation 21 RO1B_ Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Note 1 For DI3 and DI4 23 RO2A MR Default operation If both are active or inactive the 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 speed reference is unchanged 2 Rose napa Nah programmable The existing speed reference is efault operation 57 RO3B DS ES CAY 2225 ci aie Ibo stored during stop or power down E Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Note 2 Settings of the ramp times with acceleration and deceleration time 2 parameters 2205 and 2206 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting e Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output AO1 Speed J1 Reference up down DI3 4 Analog output AO2 Current Sp Al1 0 10V Constant speed selection DI5 Relay output 1 Ready 9 p AI2 0 4 20 mA Run enable DI6 Relay output 2 Running or Relay output 3 Fault 1 v1 Eo AH 0 10 V v 207 Al2 0 4 20 mA Application macros 62 Hand Auto macro ACQ550 U1 User s Manual This macro provides an I O configuration that is typically used in WW W applications To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 5 HAND AUTO Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF Connection example
202. ame size on page 257 to install the appropriate cable lugs Installation 20 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual For drives using braking optional refer to the following as appropriate Frame size Terminal Description Braking accessory R1 R2 BRK BRK Braking resistor Braking resistor See section Brake components on page 265 R3 R4 R5 RE UDC UDC DC bus Contact your ABB representative to order either braking unit or chopper and resistor When installing control wiring refer to the following chapters or sections as appropriate Control terminals table on page 24 Control connections on page 269 Application macros on page 57 Complete parameter descriptions on page 83 Embedded fieldbus on page 177 Fieldbus adapter on page 209 Installation ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 21 Power connection diagrams The following diagram shows the terminal layout for frame size R3 which in general applies to frame sizes R1 R6 except for the R5 R6 power and ground terminals J1 DIP switches for analog inputs two types can be used J1 J1 o gt Sala AI in voltage position 2 TI Al2 in current position Diagram shows the R3 frame Other frames have similar layouts Panel connector X1 Digital inputs and 24 V aux voltage output Power LED green Fault LED red
203. ameter 149 feedback select parameter 149 feedback data parameter 86 gain parameter a 146 integration time parameter 147 internal setpoint parameter 149 offset parameter 154 output data parameter 86 parameter set select parameter 152 scaling 0 100 parameters 148 setpoint maximum parameter 149 setpoint minimum parameter 149 setpoint select parameter 148 setpoint source EFB comm activate 184 setpoint source FBA comm activate 216 setpoint data parameter 86 sleep delay parameter 151 sleep level parameter 151 sleep selection parameter 150 trim mode parameter 154 trim scale parameter 154 units actual signal parameter 147 wake up delay parameter 151 wake up deviation parameter 151 PID controller advanced set up aaa 146 basic set up aa 145 planning EFB COMM ic cages ad AA WAN 178 FBA COMM adaa mad kay aa mba ete nd 211 PNP 5 utar BA RR REM EAE 25 power consumption MWh maintenance trigger 123 data parameter a 85 previous faults history parameters 91 process PID sets parameter groups 145 process variables data parameter
204. ameter 5132 lt 5128 4 OFF LINE Adapter is off line 5 ON LINE Adapter is on line 6 RESET Adapter is performing a hardware reset 5132 FBA CPI FW REV Contains the revision of the module s CPI program Format is xyz where x major revision number e y minor revision number e z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 5133 FBA APPL FW REV Contains the revision of the module s application program Format is xyz see parameter 5132 Parameters 158 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Group 52 PANEL COMM This group defines the communication settings for the control panel port on the drive Normally when using the supplied control panel there is no need to change settings in this group In this group parameter modifications take effect on the next power up Code Description 5201 STATION ID Defines the address of the drive e Two units with the same address are not allowed on line e Range 1 247 5202 BAUD RATE Defines the communication speed of the drive in kbits per second kb s 9 6 kb s 19 2 kb s 38 4 kb s 57 6 kb s 115 2 kb s 5203 PARITY Sets the character format to be used with the panel communication 0 8 NONE 1 8 data bits no parity one stop bit 1 8 NONE 2 8 data bits no parity two stop bits 2 8 EVEN 1 8 data bits even parity one stop bit 3 8 ODD 1 8 data bits odd parity one stop bit 5204 OK MESSAG
205. aracteristics automatically using identification magnetization when the drive is started for the first time and after any motor parameter Group 99 START UP DATA is changed This is valid when parameter 9910 ID RUN has value O OFF IDMAGN and parameter 9904 1 or 2 VECTOR SPEED or parameter 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2101 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST In most applications there is no need to perform a separate ID Run 9970 ID RUN 1 ON The ID Run should be selected if e vector control mode is used parameter 9904 1 or 2 VECTOR SPEED and or e the operation point is near zero speed and or operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required Note If motor parameters Group 99 START UP DATA are changed after the ID Run it must be repeated ID Run procedure The general parameter setting procedure is not repeated here For ACQ Control Panel see page 47 in chapter Control panel PRE CHECK T WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80 of the nominal speed during the ID Run The motor will rotate in the forward direction Ensure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the ID Run De couple the motor from the driven equipment Check that the values of the motor data parameters 9905 9909 are equivalent to those on the motor nameplate as shown in the steps on page 36 If
206. ay of an alarm code and or name in the Fault mode Alarm messages disappear from the control panel display after a few seconds The message returns periodically as long as the alarm condition exists The recommended corrective action for faults is Use the table in section Fault listing below to find and address the root cause of the problem e Reset the drive See section Fault resetting on page 237 Fault listing The following table lists the faults by code number and describes each The fault name is the long form shown in the Fault mode of the ACQ Control Panel when the fault occurs The fault names shown for ACQ Control Panel only in the Fault Logger mode see page 49 and the fault names for parameter 0401 LAST FAULT may be shorter Fault code 1 Fault name in panel OVERCURRENT DC OVERVOLT Description and recommended corrective action Output current is excessive Check for and correct Excessive motor load Insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Faulty motor motor cables or connections Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive Check for and correct Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply Insufficient deceleration time parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Undersized brake chopper if present Verify that overvoltage controller is ON using parameter 2005 Diagnostics ACQ550
207. be caused by multiple sources Some of these sources are loose connections incorrect wiring including swapped wires bad grounding duplicate station numbers incorrect setup of drives or other devices on the network The major diagnostic features for fault tracing on an EFB network include Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters 5306 5309 Section Complete parameter descriptions on page 83 describes these parameters in detail Embedded fieldbus ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 187 Diagnostic situations The sub sections below describe various diagnostic situations the problem symptoms and corrective actions Normal operation During normal network operation 5306 5309 parameter values act as follows at each drive e 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES advances advances for each message properly received and addressed to this drive e 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS does not advance at all advances when an invalid message CRC is received 5308 EFB UART ERRORS does not advance at all advances when character format errors are detected such as parity or framing errors e 5309 EFB STATUS value varies depending on network traffic Loss of communication The ACQ550 behavior if communication is lost was configured earlier in section Communication fault on page 184 The parameters are 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Section Complete parameter descriptions on page 83 describes these parameters in detail No master station on l
208. board fulfil the Protective Extra Low Voltage PELV requirements stated in EN 50178 provided that the external circuits connected to the terminals also fulfil the requirements and the installation site is below 2000 m 6562 ft You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration PNP connection source NPN connection sink X1 X1 10 24V MO 174v m GND 411 GND 12 DCOM 12 DCOM 13 DI1 M3IDM 1114 DI2 14 DI2 U 15 DI3 15 DI3 16 DI4 16 DI4 17 DI5 I 417 DI5 18 DI6 18 DI6 Installation 26 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Install the wiring Checking motor and motor cable insulation A WARNING Check the motor and motor cable insulation before connecting the drive to input power For this test make sure that motor cables are NOT connected to the drive Complete motor cable connections to the motor but NOT to the drive output terminals U2 V2 W2 Measure the insulation resistance between each phase conductor and the Protective Earth conductor using a measuring voltage of 500 V DC The insulation resistance of an ABB motor must exceed Gh 10 Mohm reference value at 25 C or 77 F For the insulation resistance of other motors please consult the manufacturer s instructions Note Moisture inside the motor casing will reduce the insulation resistance I
209. cal data later in this chapter e fieldbus adapter FBA See chapter Fieldbus adapter on page 209 Control interface In general the basic control interface between Modbus and the drive consists of e Output words Control Word Reference1 Reference2 e Input words Status Word Actual value 1 Actual value 2 Embedded fieldbus 178 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Actual value 3 Actual value 4 Actual value 5 Actual value 6 Actual value 7 Actual value 8 The content of these words is defined by profiles For details on the profiles used sees section ABB control profiles technical data on page 197 Note The words output and input are used as seen from the fieldbus controller point of view For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view Planning Network planning should address the following questions What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network What control information must be sent down to the drives What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling system Mechanical and electrical installation EFB the power source A WARNING Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from Drive terminals 28 32 are for R8485 communications Use Belden 9842 or equivalent Belden 9842 is a dual twiste
210. cale Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 95 Code Description 5 DI3U 4D R Defines digital inputs as the speed reference source motor potentiometer control e Digital input DI3 increases the speed the U stands for up e Digital input DI4 decreases the speed the D stands for down A Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset e Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change 6 DI3U 4D Same as above DI3U 4D R except A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored When the drive restarts the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference 7 DIBU 6D Same as above DI3U 4D except that DI5 and DI6 are the digital inputs used 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as the reference source 9 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 10 COMM A1l1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 11 DI3U 4D RNC Same as DI3U 4D R above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 12 DI3U 4D NC Same as DI3U 4D above except that e Changing the control source EXT to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not cop
211. cation macros it is possible to save two user parameter sets into the permanent memory and load them at a later time A user parameter set consists of the user parameter settings including Group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification The panel reference is also saved if the user parameter set is saved and loaded in local control The remote control setting is saved into the user parameter set but the local control setting is not The steps below show how to save and load User Parameter Set 1 The procedure for User Parameter Set 2 is identical only the parameter 9902 values are different To save User Parameter Set 1 Adjust the parameters Perform the motor identification if it is needed in the application but it is not done yet e Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification to the permanent memory by changing parameter 9902 to 1 USER S1 SAVE Press 37 ACQ Control Panel To load User Parameter Set 1 Change parameter 9902 to O USER S1 LOAD Press 37 ACQ Control Panel The user parameter set can also be switched through digital inputs see parameter 1605 Note Loading the user parameter set restores the parameter settings including Group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification Check that the settings correspond to the motor used Hint The user can for example switch the drive between two motors without having to adjust the motor para
212. cations not saved are cancelled e Each individual parameter setting is valid immediately after pressing SAVE Select EXIT to return to the listing of parameter groups and again to return to 7 7 the main menu CZ For detailed hardware description see the Technical data section on page 247 Note The current parameter value appears below the highlighted parameter Note To view the default parameter value press the UP DOWN buttons simultaneously Note The most typical and necessary parameters to change are parameter groups 99 Start up data 10 Start Stop Dir 11 Reference Select 20 Limits 21 Start Stop 22 Accel Decel 26 Motor Control and 30 Fault Functions Note To restore the default factory settings select the application macro PID CONTROL Default Control panel ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 47 Start Up Assistant Mode To start the Start Up Assistant follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu Select ASSISTANTS with the UP DOWN buttons and select ENTER Scroll to START UP ASSISTANT with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL 3 Select to answer Do you want to use the START UP ASSISTANT YES or NO Change the values suggested by the assistant to your preferences and then 4 Press SAVE after every change AGRA GB la 66 The Start up Assistant will guide you through the start up The Start up Assistant guides you through the basic
213. ce Minimum requirement CE amp C Tick The motor cable must be a symmetrical three conductor cable with a concentric PE conductor or a four conductor cable with a concentric shield however a symmetrical constructed PE conductor is always recommended The following figure shows the minimum requirement for the motor cable shield for example MCMK Draka NK Cables Insulation jacket Copper wire shield Inner insulation Cable core Recommendation for conductor layout The following figure compares conductor layout features in motor cables Recommended CE amp C Tick Allowed CE amp C Tick Symmetrical shielded cable three phase A separate PE conductor is required if the conductors and a concentric or otherwise conductivity of the cable shield is lt 50 of the symmetrically constructed PE conductor and a conductivity of the phase conductor shield Shield PE Shield conductor and shield ES ePE Shield Not allowed for motor cables CE 8 C Tick A four conductor system three phase conductors and a protective conductor without a shield Allowed for motor cables with phase P conductor cross section up to 10 mm ZAO Technical data 264 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Effective motor cable shields The general rule for cable shield effectiveness is the better and tighter the cable s shield the lower the radiated emission level The following figure shows an example of an effecti
214. col sets this parameter automatically The format is XXYY where XX protocol ID and YY program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID Set each drive on the network with a Defines the node address of the RS485 link unique value for this parameter When this protocol is selected the default value for this parameter is 1 Note For a new address to take affect the drive power must be cycled or 5302 must first be set to O before selecting a new address Leaving 5302 O places the RS485 channel in reset disabling communication 5303 EFB BAUD RATE When this protocol is selected the Defines the communication speed of the RS485 default value for this parameter is 9 6 link in kbits per second kbits s 1 2 kb s 19 2 kb s 2 4 kb s 38 4 kb s 4 8 kb s 57 6 kb s 9 6 kb s 76 8 kb s 5304 EFB PARITY When this protocol is selected the Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be default value for this parameter is 1 used with the RS485 communication The same settings must be used in all on line stations O 8 NONE 1 8 data bits no parity one stop bit 1 8 NONE 2 8 data bits no parity two stop bits 2 8 EVEN 1 8 data bits even parity one stop bit 3 8 ODD 1 8 data bits odd parity one stop bit 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE When this protocol is selected the Selects the communication profile used by the default value for this parameter is O EFB protocol 0 ABB DRV LIM Operation of Control Status Words c
215. control panel is in the Parameters mode 0143 DRIVE ON TIME HI The drive s accumulated power on time in days e Cannot be reset 0144 DRIVE ON TIME LO The drive s accumulated power on time in 2 second ticks 30 ticks 60 seconds e Shown in format hh mm ss e Cannot be reset 0145 MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature in degrees Celsius PTC resistance in ohms e Applies only if motor temperature sensor is set up e See parameter 3501 0150 CB TEMP Temperature of the drive control board in degrees Celsius 0153 MOT THERM STRESS Estimated rise of the motor temperature Value equals to the estimated motor thermal stress as a percentage of the motor temperature trip level 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 0174 SAVED KWH Energy saved in kWh compared to the energy used when the pump is connected directly to the supply See the note on page 156 e The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 999 9 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0 0 e Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time e See Group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0175 SAVED MWH Energy saved in MWh compared to the energy used when the pump is connected directly to the supply See the note on page 156 The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls o
216. conversion factor is set with parameter 4507 CO2 CONV FACTOR e See Group 45 ENERGY SAVING Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS This group monitors fieldbus communications 89 Code Description 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 Read only copy of the Fieldbus Bit 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 Command Word 1 The fieldbus command is the principal A EBEOGAL ETE means for controlling the drive from a 1 START FBLOCAL_REF fieldbus controller The command 2 REVERSE START DISABLE1 consists of two Command Words Bit coded instructions in the Command 3 LOCAL START DISABLE2 Words switch the drive between 4 RESET Reserved states To control the drive using the MAE Heserad Command Words an external location 6 RUN DISABLE Reserved EXT1 or EXT2 must be active and set 7 STPMODE R Reserved to COMM See parameters 1001 and 1002 ere 8 STPMODE EM Reserved The control panel displays the word in 9 STPMODE C Reserved hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displays as 0001 All zeros and a 10 RAMP Reserved 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 11 RAMP OUT 0 REF CONST 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 12 RAMP HOLD REF AVE Read only copy of the Fieldbus 13 RAMP IN O LINK ON Command Word 2 14 RREQ LOCALLOC REQ STARTINH e See parameter 0301 15 TORQLIM2 OFF INTERLOCK 0303 FB STS WORD 1 Reet onl
217. ction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table Value setting Calculation of the Al reference C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value 50 of reference value B value C B C value 50 of reference value B value Where C Main reference value 1207 COMM for values 9 10 and All for values 14 17 e B Correcting reference AI1 for values 9 10 and Al2 for values 14 17 Example The figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where e C 25 e P 4012 SETPOINT MIN 0 e P 4013 SETPOINT MAX O e B varies along the horizontal axis INTERNAL SETPNT 4011 Sets a constant value used for the process reference e Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 4012 SETPOINT MIN Sets the minimum value for the reference signal source e See parameter 4010 4013 SETPOINT MAX Sets the maximum value for the reference signal source e See parameter 4010 4014 FBK SEL Defines the PID controller feedback actual signal e You can define a combination of two actual values ACT1 and ACT2 as the feedback signal Use parameter 4016 to define the source for actual value 1 ACT1 Use parameter 4017 to define the source for actual value 2 ACT2 1 ACT1 Actual value 1 ACT1 provides the feedback signal 2 ACT1
218. ctions 5 qualified installer 5 Weight esie er Re ERRARE EEE 275 wiring COMO nos wi Ae vg eee iw pepe md 24 fault parameter a 127 installation llle 26 installation steps IP21 cables 27 installation steps IP21 conduit 28 installation steps IP54 cables 29 installation steps IP54 conduit 30 OVEIVIOW 2 pa cc brake GR eR Rr p RR PL 19 requirements general 19 XYZ zero speed delay parameter 115 load fault parameter 125 Index 294 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Index Further information Product and service inquiries Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative quoting the type designation and serial number of the unit in question A listing of ABB sales support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www abb com drives and selecting Sales Support and Service Network Product training For information on ABB product training navigate to www abb com drives and select Training courses Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals Your comments on our manuals are welcome Go to www abb com drives and select Document Library Manuals feedback form LV AC drives Document library on the Internet You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet Go to www abb com drives and select Document L
219. d shielded pair cable with a wave impedance of 120 ohm Use one of these twisted shielded pairs for the RS485 link Use this pair to connect all A terminals together and all B terminals together Use one of the wires in the other pair for the logical ground terminal 31 leaving one wire unused Do not directly ground the RS485 network at any point Ground all devices on the network using their corresponding earthing terminals As always the grounding wires should not form any closed loops and all the devices should be earthed to a common ground Connect the RS485 link in a daisy chained bus without dropout lines Embedded fieldbus ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 179 To reduce noise on the network terminate the RS485 network using 120 Q resistors at both ends ofthe network Use the DIP switch to connect or disconnect the termination resistors See the following diagram Terminated Terminated station Station Station station 00000 00000 00000 00000 Drive RS485 Terminal block X1 See Note 1 ON ON AGND B Positive B2 SCR Screen e S A Negative S SCR Screen hb e See Note 2 Shield Notes 1 Set switch J2 to OFF ON position would make the F network active pull up amp pull down BIAS resistors Paa ien 19 BOL are on board the drive r
220. d CO2 data parameter 88 saved kWh data parameter 87 saved MWh data parameter 87 error value inversion PID parameter 147 exception codes EFB modbus 196 external comm module parameter group see FBA drive parameters external commands selection parameter 92 external control selection parameter 94 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual external fault automatic reset parameter 128 fault codes a 234 parameters socer ANN Re 124 external reference data parameter 85 F F1 and F2 screws locatioriz e tog aoe E um 22 on corner grounded TN system 23 on IT systems 1 2 00 23 on symmetrically grounded TN systems 23 warming ooo 22 255 256 fan maintenance a 242 244 fault functions parameter group 124 history parameter group 91 eee nets ean he deer t iua 232 comm failure EFB 184 current at history parameter 91 digital input status at history parameter 91 FBA COMM y ta bed We ee 216 frequency at history parameter 91 HISTORY ache kie eon a 237 last history parameter 91 E AA aed Re ey og 232 mode ACQ Control Panel 231 232 previous history parameter 91 FESO ia Bu a bows Slee 237 reset select parameter 106 speed at history parameter
221. d as a fault reset source Do not use this option when fieldbus communication provides the start stop and direction commands 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as a fault reset source The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The bit 4 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 resets the drive 1 DH INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a fault reset source De activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source e See DI INV above Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 107 Code Description 1605 1607 USER PAR SET CHG Defines control for changing the user parameter set See parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO The drive must be stopped to change User Parameter Sets e During a change the drive will not start Note Always save the User Parameter Set after changing any parameter settings or performing a motor identification Whenever the power is cycled or parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO is changed the drive loads the last settings saved Any unsaved changes to a user parameter set are lost Note The value of this parameter 1605 is not included in the User Parameter Sets and it does not change if User Parameter Sets change Note You can use a relay output to supervise the selection of User Parameter Set 2 See parameter 1401 O NOT SEL Defines the control panel usin
222. d reference If Al is used Setting analog input Al1 limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits Setting the speed frequency limits Setting the acceleration and deceleration times Speed control EXT2 Selecting the source for the speed reference If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al1 limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Selecting the source for start and stop signals of the two external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 Defining the direction control Defining the start and stop modes Selecting the use of Run Enable signal Setting the timed functions Selecting the timed start stop control for external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting timed EXT1 EXT2 control Activation of timed constant speed 1 Selecting timed function status indicated through relay output RO Selecting timed PID1 parameter set 1 2 control Setting the current and torque limits Output signals Selecting the signals indicated through relay output RO Selecting the signals indicated through analog output AO Setting the minimum maximum scaling and inversion Changed Parameters Mode To view and edit a listing of all parameters that have been changed from macro default values follow these steps Select MENU to enter the menu 1 bw Select CHANGED PAR with the UP R DOWN buttons and select ENTER CT Nu
223. d row column or use the Continuous ON column 208 240 V drives 1 Resistor time constant specification must be gt 85 seconds Resistance Resistor minimum continuous power rating Deceleration to zero rating P Type i rcont ACQ550 P 3 Pup Pao P 60 Continuous ON 01 01 R Bau lt 3SON lt 10sON lt 30sON z60s0N gt 60SON seebelow MAX MN 5 275 OFF gt 50s OFF gt 180s OFF gt 180 s OFF F lt 10 Duty lt 17 Duty 2 14 Duty lt 25 Duty gt 25 Duty ohm ohm W W W W W Three phase supply voltage 208 240 V 04A6 2 234 80 45 80 120 200 1100 06A6 2 160 80 65 120 175 280 1500 07A5 2 117 44 85 160 235 390 2200 012A 2 80 44 125 235 345 570 3000 017A 2 48 44 210 390 575 950 4000 024A 2 32 30 315 590 860 1425 5500 031A 2 23 22 430 800 1175 1940 7500 Technical data ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 267 380 480 V drives Resistance Resistor minimum continuous power rating Type Deceleration to zero rating Pisi ACQ550 P 3 Pag P 30 P 60 Continuous ON 01 U1 Rimax Ruy 35 ON 210s0N 30sON lt 60SON gt 80SsON see below gt 27 s OFF gt 50s OFF gt 180s OFF gt 180 s OFF lt 10 Duty lt 17 Duty lt 14 Duty lt 25 Duty gt 25 Duty ohm ohm W W W W W Three phase supply voltage 380 480 V 03A3 4 641 120 65 120 175 285 1100 04
224. d value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1mA 0 1mA 10 0 1 10 0 1 1 Where parameters are in percent the Complete parameter descriptions section specifies what parameter corresponds to 100 In such cases to convert from percent to engineering units multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100 and divide by 100 Embedded fieldbus 186 For example ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Feedback Parameter integer resolution Value of the parameter that defines 100 Feedback integer Parameter resolution Value of 100 ref 100 Scaled value 10 100 0 1 1500 rpm 10 0 1 1500 RPM 100 15 rpm 0 1 500 Hz 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 50 Hz 1 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED as the 100 reference and that 9908 1500 rpm 2 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ as the 100 reference and that 9907 500 Hz Diagnostics EFB Fault queue for drive diagnostics For general ACQ550 diagnostics information see chapter Diagnostics on page 231 The three most recent ACQ550 faults are reported to the fieldbus as defined below Drive parameter Modbus protocol reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0401 LAST FAULT 40401 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 40412 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 40413 Serial communication diagnostics Network problems can
225. dropping below the underload curve 2 OVERLOAD Supervision for the torque exceeding the overload curve 3 BOTH Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload curve or exceeding the overload curve Motor torque A Overload area P3706 P3709 P3712 53715 P3714 P3718 P3717 Allowed operating area P3705 Underload area P3 08 P3707 P3704 P3710 P3713 P3716 Output frequency Hz 3702 3703 3704 3705 3706 USER LOAD C FUNC Action wanted during load supervision 1 FAULT A fault is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 2 ALARM An alarm is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME USER LOAD C TIME Defines the time limit for generating a fault Half of this time is used as the limit for generating an alarm LOAD FREQ 1 Defines the frequency value of the first load curve definition point Must be smaller than 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 Defines the torque value of the first underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 Defines the torque value of the first overload curve definition point 3707 3708 LOAD FREQ 2 Defines the frequency value of the second load curve definition point e Must be smaller
226. e Decrease the INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the feedback signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation e Increase INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the oscillation stops e Set INTEGRATION TIME 4002 to 1 15 to 1 5 times the above value e If the feedback signal contains high frequency noise increase the value of parameter 1303 FILTER Al1 or 1306 FILTER AI2 until the noise is filtered from the signal Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 147 Code Description 4002 INTEGRATION TIME A Defines the PID controller s integration time e Integration time is by definition the time required to increase the B output by the error value D P 4001 10 Error value is constant and 100 e Gain 1 C P 4001 1 Integration time of 1 second denotes that a 100 change is achieved in 1 second t 0 0 NOT SEL Disables integration I part of controller 0 1 3600 0 Integration time seconds i _ P4002 See 4001 for adjustment procedure A Error B Error value step C Controller output with Gain 1 D Controller output with Gain 10 4003 DERIVATION TIME Errori Process error value Defines the PID controller s derivation time e You can add the derivative of the error to the PID controller 100 4 output The derivative is the error value s rate of change For example if
227. e decimal point location and the units of measure 8 Bar meter displayed 9 Decimal point location and units as for the source signal Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 133 Code Description 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Selects the units used with the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT O NO UNIT 9 C 18 MWh 27 1t 36 I s 45 Pa 54 lb m 63 Mrev 1 A 10 Ib ft 19 m s 28 MGD 37 1l min 46 GPS 55 Ib h 64 d 2 V 11 mA 20 m h 29 inHg 38 lh 47 gals 56 FPS 65 inWC 3 Hz 12 mV 21 dm s 30 FPM 39 m s 48 gallm 57 fUs 66 m min 4 13 kW 22 bar 31 kb s 40 m m 49 galh 58 inH 0 67 Nm 5 s 14 W 23 kPa 32 kHz 41 kg s 50 ft s 59 inwg 68 Km h 6 h 15 kWh 242 GPM 33 ohm 42 kg m 51 ft m 60 ft wg 7 rpm 16 F 25 PSI 34 ppm 43 kg h 52 ft h 61 Ibsi 8 kh 17 hp 26 CFM 35 pps 44 mbar 53 lb s 62 ms The following units are useful for the bar display 117 ref 119 dev 121 SP 123 lout 125 Fout 127 Vdc 118 act 120 LD 122 FBK 124 Vout 126 Tout 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 D
228. e information The minimum space requirements for the drive are the outside dimensions see section Outside dimensions on page 274 plus air flow space around the drive see section Cooling on page 271 The distance between the motor and the drive is limited by the maximum motor cable length See section Motor connection specifications on page 259 The mounting site must support the drive s modest weight See section Weight on page 275 Installation 16 Installing the drive ACQ550 U1 User s Manual WARNING Before installing the ACQ550 ensure the input power supply to the drive is off For flange mounting mounting the drive in a cooling air duct see the appropriate Flange Mounting Instructions Not available in ACQ550 U1 IP54 UL type 12 Prepare the mounting location The ACQ550 should only be mounted where all of the requirements defined in section Preparing for installation on page 72 are met 1 Mark the position of the mounting holes with the help of the mounting template provided with the drive 2 Drill the holes 4 Frame 1P21 UL type 1 1P54 UL type 12 size Kit Code English Kit Code English R1 FMK A R1 100000982 FMK B R1 100000990 R2 FMK A R2 100000984 FMK B R2 100000992 R3 FMK A R3 100000986 FMK B R3 100000994 R4 FMK A R4 100000988 FMK B R4 100000996 R5 AC8 FLNGMT R5 ACS800 PNTGO1U EN Re AC8 FLNGMT R6 X0002 Note Frame si
229. e motor at low speeds Use IR 3 SCALAR FREQ compensation for example in applications that require a Keep IR compensation as low as possible to prevent high breakaway torque overheating 4 Motor Typical IR compensation values are voltage 380 480 V drives Py KW 3 175 15 37 132 IRcomp V 18 15 12 8 3 A IR compensated B No compensation P 2603 2604 IR COMP FREQ f Hz Sets the frequency at which IR compensation is O V in B of motor frequency P 2604 2605 U F RATIO Selects the form for the U f voltage to frequency ratio below field weakening point 1 LINEAR Preferred for constant torque applications 2 SQUARED Preferred for centrifugal pump and fan applications SQUARED is more silent for most operating frequencies Parameters 122 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 2606 SWITCHING FREQ Sets the switching frequency for the drive Also see parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL and section Switching hie side derating on page 250 e Higher switching frequencies mean less noise e 12 kHz switching frequency is available in scalar control mode that is when parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ See the availability of switching frequencies for different drive types in the table below 1 2 4 and 8 kHz 12 kHz 208 240 V All types Frame sizes R1 R4 in scalar
230. e speed controller is switched off The drive modulation is stopped and the motor coasts to standstill With Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the motor actual speed falls below an internal limit called Zero Speed the zero speed delay function activates During the delay the functions keeps the speed controller live The drive modulates motor is magnetized and drive is ready for a quick restart Note Parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION must be 2 RAMP for zero speed delay to operate 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the Zero Speed Delay function 2113 START DELAY Defines the Start delay After the conditions for start have been fulfilled the drive waits until the delay has elapsed and then starts the motor Start delay can be used with all start modes If START DELAY zero the delay is disabled During the Start delay alarm 2028 START DELAY is shown Parameters 116 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Group 22 ACCEL DECEL This group defines ramps that control the rate of acceleration and deceleration You define these ramps as a pair one for acceleration and one for deceleration You can define two pairs of ramps and use a digital input to select one or the other pair Code Description 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL Defines control for selection of acceleration deceleration ramps Ramps are defined in pairs one each for acceleration and deceleration See below for the ramp definition pa
231. e speed regulated motor connecting the motor to the ACQ550 power output Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFC START DELAY e Starts the speed regulated motor e Starts auxiliary motors See parameter 8115 for delay AN WARNING Motors equipped with star delta starters require a PFC Start Delay After the ACQ550 relay output switches a motor on the star delta starter must switch to the star connection and then back to the delta connection before the drive applies power e So the PFC Start Delay must be longer than the time setting of the star delta starter 8123 PFC ENABLE Selects PFC control When enabled PFC control e Switches in or out auxiliary constant speed motors as output demand increases or decreases Parameters 8109 START FREQ 1 to 8114 LOW FREQ 3 define the switch points in terms of the drive output frequency e Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down as auxiliary motors are added and adjusts the speed regulated motor output up as auxiliary motors are taken off line e Provides Interlock functions if enabled e Requires 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ O NOT SEL Disables PFC control 1 ACTIVE Enables PFC control Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 175 Code Description 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP Sets the PFC acceleration time for a zero to maximum frequency ramp This PFC acceleration ramp Applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor i
232. e speed regulated motor s interlock is active the control panel displays an alarm 2015 PFC I LOCK Wire each Interlock circuit as follows Wire a contact of the motor s On Off switch to the Interlock circuit the drive s PFC logic can then recognize that the motor is switched off and start the next available motor Wire a contact of the motor thermal relay or other protective device in the motor circuit to the Interlock input the drive s PFC logic can then recognize that a motor fault is activated and stop the motor O NOT SEL Disables the Interlock function All digital inputs are available for other purposes Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 The Autochange function must be disabled if Interlock function is disabled 1 DI1 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with D11 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on e the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 Speed Reg Motor Not allowed DI2 DI6 Free 1 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 DI6 Free DI3 DI6 Free 2 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 First
233. e validation of changes to parameters 5102 5126 If parameter 5127 is not used changes to parameters 5102 5126 take affect only after the drive power is cycled Parameters 5128 5133 provide data about the FBA module currently installed e g component versions and status See Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE for parameter descriptions Activate drive control functions FBA Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sections describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function The last column in each table below is deliberately blank See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module for the appropriate entry Start Stop Direction control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction control of the drive requires drive parameter values set as defined below e fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent HG Protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference 1001 EXT1 10 COMM Start Stop controlled by fieldbus with COMMANDS Ext1 selected Fieldbus adapter 214 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual A M Protocol Drive paramet
234. eans 251 specifications o ooooooooooooo 251 Index 288 input power connection IT SYStOM ociosa yu eerte XXE 256 lugs for RE Aa 257 terminal size a 256 torque eub UE pee E 256 installation check list EHE eR 31 compatibility 14 environment Loco 14 flow chart ic Shasta RE qe 11 location 2a a eer Eee NGA 15 mounting drive 0 eee eee ee 18 preparation cee eee 12 procedures eee eee 11 TOOIS i uibs ehh aie RAD plate OE 14 wiring overview eee ee 19 insulation check ee eres 26 integration time PID parameter 147 integration time parameter 118 interlocks parameter 170 internal setpoint PID parameter 149 Internet information 0N 295 IR compensation frequency parameter 121 parameters a 121 voltage parameter 121 isolation between AC power source and drive 251 IT system Connections 256 warning about filters 6 264 warning about screws at EM1 EM3 21 warning about screws at F1 F2 22 J jogging activation parameter 93 K keypad see control panel keypad reference select parameter 94 kWh counter data parameter 85 L label serial number 0 12 type designation 12 language paramet
235. ecommended corrective action 1000 1001 1002 PAR HZRPM PAR PFC REF NEG RESERVED Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following 2001 MINIMUM SPEED gt 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 2007 MINIMUM FREQ gt 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside proper range gt 50 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside proper range gt 50 cur ia FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range 50 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range gt 50 Parameter values are inconsistent Check for the following 2007 MINIMUM FREQ is negative when 8123 PFC ENABLE is active Not used 1003 PAR AI SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following e 1301 MINIMUM Al1 gt 1302 MAXIMUM Alf e 1304 MINIMUM AI2 gt 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 1004 PAR AO SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following e 1504 MINIMUM A01 gt 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 e 1510 MINIMUM A02 gt 1511 MAXIMUM AC2 1005 1006 1007 PAR PCU 2 PAR EXT RO PAR FIELDBUS MISSING Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal kVA or motor nominal power Check for the following e 1 1 lt 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 1 73 Py lt 3 0 where Py 1000 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are kW or Py 746 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are hp e g in
236. ed the U stands for up DI4 decreases the reference the D stands for down e Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change R Stop command resets the reference to zero e NC Reference value is not copied 12 DI3U 4D NC Same as DI3U 4D RNC above except e Stop command does not reset reference to zero At restart the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference 13 DI5U 6D NC Same as DI3U 4D NC above except Uses digital inputs DI5 and DI6 14 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 15 Ald AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A1 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 16 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 17 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 19 INTERNAL A constant value set using parameter 4011 provides reference 20 PID20UT Defines PID controller 2 output parameter 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT as the reference source Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 149 Code Description Analog input reference corre
237. equency equal to the value of parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ or 2007 MINIMUM FREQ if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT Defines the nominal motor voltage Must equal the value on the motor rating plate Output voltage The ACQ550 cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater than the input A power mains voltage 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR P 9905 Defines the nominal motor current Must equal the value on the motor rating plate e Range allowed 0 2 2 0 long where long is drive current 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Defines the nominal motor frequency P 9907 e Range 10 500 Hz typically 50 or 60 Hz e Sets the frequency at which output voltage equals the MOTOR NOM VOLT Field weakening point Nom Freq Supply Volt Mot Nom Volt Output frequency Parameters 84 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED Defines the nominal motor speed Must equal the value on the motor rating plate 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER Defines the nominal motor power Must equal the value on the motor rating plate 9910 9915 ID RUN This parameter controls a self calibration process called the Motor ID Run During this process the drive operates the motor motor rotating and makes measurements in order to identify motor characteristics and create a model used for internal calculations An ID Run
238. equires the interlocks 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt 0 enabled During autochange the power output is lt interrupted and the drive coasts to stop preventing l damage to the contacts PFC with Autochange mode H Relay logic Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 169 Code Description 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Sets an upper limit as a percent of output capacity for the autochange logic When the output from the PID PFC control block exceeds this limit autochange is prevented For example use this parameter to deny autochange when the Pump Fan system is operating near maximum capacity Autochange overview The purpose of the autochange operation is to equalize duty time between multiple motors used in a system At each autochange operation A different motor takes a turn connected to the ACQ550 output the speed regulated motor The starting order of the other motors rotates The Autochange function requires External switchgear for changing the drive s output power connections Parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt 0 Autochange is performed when The running time since the previous autochange reaches the time set by 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV The PFC input is below the level set by this parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Note The ACQ550 always coasts to stop when autochange is performed In an autochange the A
239. er a 83 LED on ACQ Control Panel 231 232 on drive body 21 231 232 library document o 295 limits parameter group 110 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual load analyzer parameter group 00 161 amplitude logger 1 distribution 162 amplitude logger 2 signal base value par 161 amplitude logger 2 signal parameter 161 amplitude logger 2 distribution 162 loggers reset date 162 loggers reset time 162 loggers reset parameter 161 peak value logger filter time parameter 161 peak value logger signal parameter 161 peak value logger current at peak value 162 peak value logger detected peak value 161 peak value logger frequency at peak value 162 peak value logger peak value date 161 peak value logger peak value time 161 peak value logger voltage at peak value 162 load curve see user load curve load frequency see user load curve load torque see user load curve loading package version parameter 131 lock control panel access IP54 32 parameters s clase RR RR Eres 106 loggers see load analyzer low frequency PFC parameters 166 lugs for R6 power cables 257 ring CriMp ON 0 EERTE ESNE 257 terminal SCrew 0N o oo ooooooooo 258 M macros IMM a See dates A
240. er You can use External PID PID2 defined in Group 42 EXT TRIM PID in two different ways e Instead of using additional PID controller hardware you can set outputs of the ACQ550 to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve In this case set parameter 4230 to value O O is the default value e You can use External PID PID2 to trim or fine tune the speed of the ACQ550 Code Description 4001 GAIN Defines the PID controller s gain The setting range is 0 1 100 e At 0 1 the PID controller output changes one tenth as much as the error value e At 100 the PID controller output changes one hundred times as much as the error value Use the proportional gain and integration time values to adjust the responsiveness of the system A low value for proportional gain and a high value for integral time ensures stable operation but provides sluggish response If the proportional gain value is too large or the integral time too short the system can become unstable Procedure e Initially set 4001 GAIN 0 1 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 20 seconds e Start the system and see if it reaches the setpoint quickly while maintaining stable operation If not increase GAIN 4001 until the actual signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation e Reduce GAIN 4001 until the oscillation stops e Set GAIN 4001 to 0 4 to 0 6 times the above valu
241. er Value Description reference 1002 ExT2 10 COMM Start Stop by controlled fieldbus with COMMANDS Ext2 selected 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction controlled by fieldbus Input reference select Using the fieldbus to provide input reference to the drive requires drive parameter value set as defined below e fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent 7 po Protocol Drive parameter Value Description referent 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 8 COMM Ref selected by fieldbus Required only if 2 references used 1103 REF1 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 1supplied by fieldbus 9 COMM AI1 10 COMM A11 1106 REF2 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 2 supplied by fieldbus 9 COMM AI Required only if 2 references used 10 COMM AI Note Multiple references are supported only when using the ABB Drives profile Scaling Where required REFERENCES can be scaled See the following sections as appropriate e Reference scaling on page 224 ABB Drives profile technical data e Reference scaling on page 228 Generic profile technical data System control Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires drive parameter values set as defined below e fieldbus controller command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference
242. er pressure in a pipe e 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant pressure reference that controls the pressure in the pipe The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water consumption levels As water consumption increases first one constant speed pump operates then the second As flow increases the pressure at the output end of the pipe drops relative to the pressure measured at the input end As auxiliary motors step in to increase the flow the adjustments below correct the reference to more closely match the output pressure When the first auxiliary pump operates increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 When two auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 When three auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 165 Code Description 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least two auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least three auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 8109 START F
243. esistance grounded over 30 ohm power system otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors This may cause danger or damage the drive Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on a corner grounded TN system otherwise the drive will be damaged Note When the internal EMC filter is disconnected the drive is not EMC compatible See section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 23 Also see sections IT systems on page 256 and Corner grounded TN systems on page 255 WARNING Do not attempt to install or remove EM1 EM3 F1 or F2 screws while power is applied to the drive s input terminals WARNING Do not control the motor with the disconnecting device disconnecting means instead use the control panel start and stop keys lt lt gt gt and Q or commands via the I O board of the drive The maximum allowed number of charging cycles of the DC capacitors i e power ups by applying power is five in ten minutes WARNING The ACQ550 U1 is not field repairable Never attempt to repair a malfunctioning drive contact the factory or your local Authorized Service Center for replacement WARNING The ACQ550 will start up automatically after an input voltage interruption if the external run command is on WARNING The heat sink may reach a high temperature See chapter Technical data on page 247 Note For more technical information c
244. eter values e This lock does not limit parameter changes made by macros e This lock does not limit parameter changes written by fieldbus inputs e This parameter value can be changed only if the correct pass code is entered See parameter 1603 PASS CODE O LOCKED You cannot use the control panel to change parameter values The lock can be opened by entering the valid pass code to parameter 1603 1 OPEN You can use the control panel to change parameter values 2 NOT SAVED You can use the control panel to change parameter values but they are not stored in permanent memory Set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to 1 SAVE to store changed parameter values to memory 1603 1604 PASS CODE Entering the correct pass code allows you to change the parameter lock e See parameter 1602 above e The code 358 allows you to change the value of the parameter 1602 once This entry reverts back to O automatically FAULT RESET SEL Selects the source for the fault reset signal The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists O KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the only fault reset source Fault reset is always possible with control panel 1 DI1 Defines digital input DIT as a fault reset source Activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source See DI1 above 7 START STOP Defines the Stop comman
245. eters 000 159 160 parity parameter 159 protocol id parameter 159 protocol select parameter 176 relay output word data parameter 86 station id parameter 159 status words data parameters 89 status parameter 159 UART errors count parameter 159 values data parameter 86 A AA 270 ELV Extra Low Voltage 25 EM1 and EM3 screws location 2 uc mel Ide 21 on corner grounded TN system 23 on IT systems tenie et 23 on symmetrically grounded TN systems 23 warning 21 255 256 embedded fieldbus see EFB see EFB drive parameters EMC CE marking cee eee 279 C Tick marking 00 0005 279 motor cable requirements 263 EMC filter external a 256 EMC filter internal 6 23 255 256 281 282 emergency deceleration time parameter 117 stop devices aa 253 stop select parameter 114 enclosure protection class code 13 AA 276 energy saving parameter group 156 CO2 conversion factor parameter 156 energy price parameter 156 energy reset parameter 156 pump power parameter 156 saved amount 1 data parameter 88 saved amount 2 data parameter 88 save
246. eters to the drive including motor parameters Only use this function to restore a drive or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system Download Application Copies a partial parameter set from the Control Panel to a drive The partial set does not include internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any Group 51 and 53 parameters Use this option to transfer parameters to systems that use similar configurations the drive and motor sizes do not need to be the same Upload Download to Maa Mia Control Rr Panel IP2100 1P2101 To download application to drive follow these steps Select MENU to enter the menu Select PAR BACKUP with the UP DOWN buttons A 2 QE Scroll to DOWNLOAD APPLICATION and select SEL NE 3 The text Downloading parameters partial is displayed Select ABORT EY 4 if you want to stop the process The text Parameter download successful is displayed and the EY control panel returns to PAR BACKUP menu Select EXIT to return to the main menu 5 Download User Set 1 Copies USER s1 parameters user sets are saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO from the Control Panel to the drive Download User Set 2 Copies USER S2 parameters from the Control Panel to the drive Control panel 52 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Handling inexact downloads In some situations an exact copy of
247. etization is suitable for most applications It is applied in this basic start up procedure Note however that this requires that parameter 9904 is set to 1 or 2 VECTOR SPEED or parameter 9904 is set to 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2707 is set to 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST If your selection is O OFF IDMAGN move to the next step Value 1 ON which performs a separate ID Run should be selected if vector control mode is used parameter 9904 1 or 2 VECTOR SPEED the operation point is near zero speed and or operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required If you decide to do the ID Run value 1 ON continue by following the separate instructions given on page 40 in section How to perform the ID Run and then return to step DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION on page 38 Start up control with I O and ID Run 38 DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION Check the direction of the motor rotation If the drive is in AUTO control switch to OFF control by pressing cv e Go to parameter 1003 to check direction of motor Default is 1 FORWARD Press lt lt gt gt to start the motor e Check that the actual direction of the motor is the same as indicated on the display FWD means forward and REV reverse Press CQ to stop the motor To change the direct
248. ev Activation reverses rotation direction 16 DI4 Constant speed selection 1717 DI5 Constant speed selection 18 DI6 Not used 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A Fx Default operation 21 R01B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 Mie BARO d 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A Fx Default operation DI4 DI5 Output 24 RO2B ft Running gt 22 connected to 24 f D JO Reference through Alf 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 0 CONST SPEED 1 1202 26 RO3A A Default operation O i CONST SPEED 2 1203 27 ROSB Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 1 CONST SPEED 3 1204 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference Al1 e Analog output AO1 Speed J1 Start stop and direction DI1 2 3 Analog output AO2 Current 9 Al1 0 10 V e Constant speed selection DI4 5 Relay output 1 Ready 9 p AI2 0 4 20 mA Relay output 2 Running or Relay output 3 Fault 1 v1 m o Al1 0 10 V n 217 Al2 0 4 20 mA Application macros 60 Alternate macro ACQ550 U1 User s Manual This macro provides an I O configuration adopted to a sequence of DI control signals used when alternating the rotation direction of the motor To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 3 ALTERNATE Connection example
249. every 1 C 1 8 F above 40 C 104 F Calculate the output current by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor Example If the ambient temperature is 50 C 122 F the derating factor is 100 1 C 10 C 90 or 0 90 The output current is then 0 90 oy or 0 90 long Altitude derating In altitudes 1000 4000 m 3300 13 200 ft above sea level the derating is 1 for every 100 m 330 ft If the installation site is higher than 2000 m 6600 ft above sea level please contact your local ABB distributor or office for further information Single phase supply derating For 208 240 V series drives a single phase supply can be used In that case the derating is 50 Switching frequency derating When using the 8 kHz switching frequency parameter 2606 derate all rated currents and powers including drive s overload currents to 80 When using the 12 kHz switching frequency parameter 2606 derate all rated currents and powers including drive s overload currents to 65 to 50 for 600 V R4 frame sizes that is for ACQ550 U1 032A 6 ACQ550 U1 062A 6 derate ambient temperature maximum to 30 C 86 F e Note The continuous maximum current is limited to long Note Setting parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL 1 ON allows the drive to reduce the switching frequency if when the drive s internal temperature exceeds 80 C with 12 kHz switching frequency or 9
250. f moisture is suspected dry the motor and repeat the measurement Installation ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Wiring IP21 UL type 1 enclosure with cables 1 Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduit gland box See section Conduit Gland kit on page 19 Install the cable clamps for the power motor cables On the input power cable strip the sheathing back far enough to route individual wires On the motor cable strip the sheathing back far enough to expose the copper wire shield so that the shield can be twisted into a bundle pig tail Keep the bundle not longer than five times its width to minimize noise radiation 360 grounding under the clamp is recommended for the motor cable to minimize noise radiation In this case remove the sheathing at the cable clamp 5 Route both cables through the clamps 6 Strip and connect the power motor wires and the 8 Install conduit gland box and tighten the cable clamps power ground wire to the drive terminals See the table on the right for tightening torques Note For R6 frame size refer to section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 257 Connect the bundle pig tail created from the motor cable shield to the GND terminal 9 Install the cable clamp s for the control cable s 10 11 12 13 14 Power motor cables and clamps not shown in the figure Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper shield in
251. ference scaling REF1 COMM AI1 100 0 5 Par 1105 100 0 5 par 1105 COMM Al 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference 100709 7 7 A correction coefficient 0 Al input signal o p g 50 1009 Fieldbus adapter ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 225 ABB Drives profile FBA Reference Value setting Al reference scaling REF1 COMM AI1 COMM 9 Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference Acorrection coefficient 200 100 Al input signal 0 50 100 100 0 5 par 1105 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM 9 Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference A correction coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1108 1 100 Al1 input signal 100 0 5 par 1108 096 50 1009k REF2 COMM A11 COMM 9 Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference A correction coefficient 200 100 0 0 50 100 Fieldbus adapter 226 Reference handling ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Use Group 10 START STOP DIR parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location EXT1 and EXT2 The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 and REF2 Note fieldbus references are bipolar that is they can be positive or negative ABB Drives profile
252. frequency limit the PFC control automatically starts an auxiliary pump The PFC also reduces the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s addition to total output Then as before the PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference If demand continues to increase PFC adds additional auxiliary pumps using the same process When demand drops such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit user defined by a frequency limit the PFC control automatically stops an auxiliary pump The PFC also increases the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s missing output e An Interlock function when enabled identifies off line out of service motors and the PFC control skips to the next available motor in the sequence An Autochange function when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear equalizes duty time between the pump motors Autochange periodically increments the position of each motor in the rotation the speed regulated motor becomes the last auxiliary motor the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed regulated motor etc Code Description 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least one auxiliary constant speed motor is running Default value is 0 Example An ACQ550 operates three parallel pumps that maintain wat
253. g and let the casing lean down against the limiters 3 Slide out the cable connector and disconnect it 4 Take off the casing and replace the fan onto the casing s pins 5 Reinstall the casing in reverse order 6 Restore power Maintenance 244 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Internal enclosure fan replacement Frame sizes R1 R4 2 Remove the front cover 5 Disconnect the fan cable Remove power from the drive IP54 UL type 12 enclosures have an additional internal fan to circulate air i enclosure To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R1 to R3 located at the top of the drive and R4 located in front of the drive The housing that holds the fan in place has barbed retaining clips at each corner Press all four clips toward the center to release the barbs When the clips barbs are free pull the housing up to remove from the drive Install the fan in reverse order noting that The fan air flow is up refer to the arrow on fan The fan wire harness is toward the front The notched housing barb is located in the right rear corner e The fan cable connects just forward of the fan at the top of the drive Frame sizes R5 and R6 Qu de su To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R5 or R6 Remove power from the drive Remove the front cover Lift the fan out and disconnect t
254. g output control Using the fieldbus for analog output control e g PID setpoint requires drive parameter values set as defined below e fieldbus controller supplied analog value s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol i meter Val Description Drive paramete ue escriptio reference 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 135 COMM VALUE 1 Analog Output 1 controlled by writing to parameter 0135 0135 COMM VALUE 1 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling n e values 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 1506 FILTER AO1 Filter time constant for AO1 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 136 COMM VALUE 2 Analog Output 2 controlled by writing to parameter 0136 0136 COMM VALUE 2 1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling ape Js values 1511 MAXIMUM AO2 1512 FILTER AO2 Filter time constant for AO2 Fieldbus adapter 216 PID Control setpoint source ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID loops Drive parameter Value Setting Protocol reference 4010 SET POINT SEL Set 1 4110 SET POINT SEL Set 2 9 COMM AI1 4210 SET POINT SEL Ext Trim Communication fault When using fieldbus control specify the drive s action if serial communication is l
255. g parameter 9902 as the only control for changing User Parameter Sets 1 011 Defines digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the falling edge of the digital input The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the rising edge of the digital input The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets e See DIT above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the rising edge of the digital input The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the falling edge of the digital input The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets e See DH INV above PARAM SAVE Saves all altered parameters to permanent memory Parameters altered through a fieldbus are not automatically saved to permanent memory To save you must use this parameter If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 2 NOT SAVED parameters altered from the control panel are not saved To save you must use this parameter f 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 1 OPEN parameters altered from the control panel are stored immediately to permanent memory O DONE Value changes automatically when
256. ght sprays or splashing water from all directions Note UL type 12 enclosure is not available for type ACQ550 01 290A 4 Compared to the IP21 UL type 1 enclosure the IP54 UL type 12 enclosure has the same internal plastic shell as the IP21 enclosure a different outer plastic cover an additional internal fan to improve cooling e larger dimensions the same rating does not require a derating Ambient conditions The following table lists the ACQ550 environmental requirements Ambient environment requirements Altitude Installation site 0 1000 m 0 3 300 ft e 1000 2000 m 3 300 6 600 ft if Py and hy derated 1 every 100 m above 1000 m 300 ft above 3 300 ft Storage and transportation in the protective package Ambient temperature Relative humidity e Min 15 C 5 F no frost allowed e Max fsw 1 or 4 40 C 104 F 50 C 122 F if Px and hi derated to 90 Max fsw 8 40 C 104 F if Py and hi derated to 80 Max fsw 12 30 C 86 F if Py and hn derated to 65 to 50 for 600 V R4 frame sizes that is for ACQ550 U1 032A 6 ACQ550 U1 062A 6 5 95 no condensation allowed 40 70 C 40 158 F Technical data ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 277 Ambient environment requirements Installation site Storage and transportation in the protective package Contamination levels IEC 721 3 3
257. he LCD display can be configured to display Oneto three parameter values The default display shows parameters 0102 OUTPUT SPEED 0104 CURRENT in amperes and 0105 TORQUE in percentage Use parameters 3401 3408 and 3415 to select the parameters from Group 01 to display Entering parameter 0100 results in no parameter displayed For example if 3401 2 0100 and 3415 0100 then only the parameter specified by 3408 appears in the Control Panel display You can also scale each parameter in the display for example to convert the Control panel ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 45 motor speed to a display of conveyor speed Parameters 3402 3405 scale the parameter specified by 3401 parameters 3409 3412 scale the parameter specified by 3408 etc A bar meter rather than one of the parameter values Enable bar graph displays using parameters 3404 3411 and 3418 Bottom The bottom of the LCD display shows e Lower corners show the functions currently assigned to the two soft keys e Lower middle displays the current time if configured to show the time Operating the drive AUTO HAND The very first time the drive is powered up it is in the auto control AUTO mode and is controlled from the Control terminal block X1 To switch to hand control HAND and control the drive using the control panel press and hold the gt or QQ button Pressing the HAND button switches the drive to ha
258. he cable Install the fan in reverse order Restore power nside the A 3AUA000000404 Maintenance ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 245 Capacitors Reforming The drive DC link capacitors need to be reformed re aged if the drive has been non operational for more than one year Without reforming capacitors may be damaged when the drive starts to operate lt is therefore recommended to reform the capacitors once a year See section Serial number on page 13 for how to check the date of manufacture from the serial number shown on the drive labels For information on reforming the capacitors refer to Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 ACS55 ACS150 ACS310 ACS320 ACS350 ACS550 ACH550 and ACQ550 3AFE68735190 English available on the Internet go to www abb com and enter the code in the Search field Replacement The drive intermediate circuit employs several electrolytic capacitors Their life span is from 35 000 90 000 hours depending on drive loading and ambient temperature Capacitor life can be prolonged by lowering the ambient temperature Itis not possible to predict a capacitor failure Capacitor failure is usually followed by a input power fuse failure or a fault trip Contact ABB if capacitor failure is suspected Replacements for frame size R5 and R6 are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts Control pa
259. he drive For high counts check Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors e CRC calculations for possible errors 5308 EFB UART ERRORS Contains a count of the messages with a character error received by the drive 5309 EFB STATUS Contains the status of the EFB protocol O IDLE EFB protocol is configured but not receiving any messages 1 EXECUT INIT EFB protocol is initializing 2 TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between the network master and the EFB protocol 3 CONFIG ERROR EFB protocol has a configuration error 4 OFF LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT addressed to this drive 5 ON LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to this drive 6 RESET EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset 7 LISTEN ONLY EFB protocol is in listen only mode 5310 EFB PAR 10 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40005 Parameters 160 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 5311 EFB PAR 11 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40006 5312 EFB PAR 12 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40007 5313 EFB PAR 13 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40008 5314 EFB PAR 14 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40009 5315 EFB PAR 15 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40010 5316 EFB PA
260. he high limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above Parameters 130 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM Selects the third supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 131 Group 33 INFORMATION This group provides access to information about the drive s current programs versions and test date Code 3301 3302 Description FIRMWARE Contains the version of the drive s firmware LOADING PACKAGE Contains the version of the loading package 3303 TEST DATE Contains the test date yy ww 3304 3305 DRIVE RATING Indicates the drive s current and voltage rating The format is XXXY where e XXX The nominal current rating of the drive in amperes If present an A indicates a decimal point in the rating for the current For example XXX 8A8 indicates a nominal current rating of 8 8 A e Y The voltage rating of the drive where Y 2 indicates a 208 240 V rating 4 indicates a 380 480 V rating 6 indicates a 500 600 V rating PARAMETER TABLE Contains the version of the parameter table used in the drive Parameters
261. he motor is overheated See the connection figure on page 135 3502 INPUT SELECTION Defines the input used for the temperature sensor 1 al1 PT100 and PTC 2 AI2 PT100 and PTC 3 8 DI1 DI6 Thermistor and PTC 3503 ALARM LIMIT Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement e At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP For thermistors or PTC connected to a digital input O de activated 1 activated Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 137 Code Description 3504 FAULT LIMIT Defines the fault limit for motor temperature measurement At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays a fault 9 MOT OVERTEMP and stops the drive For thermistors or PTC connected to a digital input O de activated 1 activated Parameters 138 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS This group defines the timed functions The timed functions include e four daily start and stop times e four weekly start stop and boost times e four timers for collecting selected periods together A timer can be connected to multiple time periods and a time period can be in multiple timers Time Period 1 3602 START TIME 1 3603 STOP TIME 1 3604 START DAY 1 3605 STOP DAY 1 Time Period 2 3606 START TIME 2 3607 STOP TIME 2 3608 START DAY 2 3609 STOP DAY 2 Time Period 3 3610
262. he principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives profile FBA CONTROL WORD Name Value Commanded state Comments OFF1 CONTROL OFF2 CONTROL OFF3 CONTROL 1 0 READY TO OPERATE EMERGENCY OFF OPERATING Enter READY TO OPERATE Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205 Normal command sequence Enter OFF1 ACTIVE Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active Continue operation OFF2 inactive EMERGENCY OFF OPERATING Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence Enter OFF2 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED Continue operation OFF3 inactive EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within in time specified by parameter 2208 Normal command sequence Enter OFF3 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Be sure motor and driven equipment can be stopped using this mode INHIBIT OPERATION OPERATION ENABLED Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note the Run enable signal must be active See 1601 If 1601 is set to COMM this bit also actives the Run Enable signal OPERATION INHIBITED Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED RAMP OUT ZERO NORMAL OPERATION RFG OUT ZERO Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR
263. he safety instructions given in chapter Safety must be followed during the start up procedure The drive will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on Check the installation See the checklist in chapter Installation page 31 Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger De couple the driven machine if there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation or e an ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start up ID Run is essential only in applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy Start up control with I O and ID Run 34 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual POWER UP Apply input power Select MENU to enter the main menu Select ASSISTANTS with keys A w and select ENTER Scroll to START UP ASSISTANT with keys AY vw SELECTING THE LANGUAGE L The display then asks you to select the language Scroll to the SAVE desired language with keys a v and press Sul to accept EXIT If you press CZ the Start up Assistant is stopped STARTING THE GUIDED SET UP The Start up Assistant now guides you through the set up tasks starting with the motor set up Set the motor data to exactly the same value as on the motor nameplate Scroll to the desired parameter value with keys an dv and press X to accept and continue with the Start up Assistant Note At any time if you press g
264. he state diagram later in this sub section describe the status word content ABB Drives profile FBA STATUS WORD Bit Mame Value Correspond to We Set the state diagram 0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON 0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON 1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE 0 OFF1 ACTIVE 2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED 0 OPERATION INHIBITED 3 TRIPPED 0 1 FAULT 0 No fault Fieldbus adapter 222 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual ABB Drives profile FBA STATUS WORD Bit Name Val e Correspond to a the state diagram 4 OFF 2 STA 1 OFF2 inactive 0 OFF2 ACTIVE 5 OFF 3 STA 1 OFF3 inactive 0 OFF3 ACTIVE 6 SWC ON INHIB 1 SWITCH ON INHIBIT ACTIVE 0 SWITCH ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE 7 ALARM 1 Alarm See section Alarm listing on page 238 for details on alarms No alarm 8 AT SETPOINT 1 OPERATING Actual value equals within tolerance limits the reference value 0 Actual value is outside tolerance limits not equal to reference value 9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 Or EXT2 0 Drive control location LOCAL 10 ABOVE LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit Bit remains 1 until supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit See Group 32 SUPERVISION 0 Supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit Bit remains 0 until supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit See Group 32 SUPERVISI
265. ibrary You can browse the library or enter selection criteria for example a document code in the search field AA ED ED FADED lt gt o am o v o LO o e e o c e o m o D T o Er O LL LL LL Lu ABB Inc Automation Technologies Drives amp Motors 16250 West Glendale Drive New Berlin WI 53151 USA Telephone 1 262 785 3200 Tech Support 1 800 752 0696 Fax 1 262 780 5135
266. ic noise and must be user tested to verify that EMC requirements are met Where long runs are required especially for runs longer than about 12 m 40 ft use a RS232 RS485 converter at each end and run RS485 cable Drive s control connection terminals The following table provides specifications for the drive s control terminals Control Frame size Maximum wire size Tightening torque mm AWG N m Ib ft All 1 5 16 0 4 0 3 Values given for solid wires For stranded wires the maximum size is 1 mm Efficiency Approximately 98 at nominal power level Technical data ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Cooling 271 Cooling specifications Method Internal fan flow direction from bottom to top Requirement Free space above and below the ACQ550 drive 200 mm 8 in Free space is not required on the drive s sides ACQ550 drives can be mounted side by side Air flow 208 240 V drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 208 240 V drives Air flow 380 480 V drives Drive Heat loss Air flow ACQ550 x1 Frame size BTU hr m3 h ft min 04A6 2 R1 55 189 44 26 06A6 2 R1 73 249 44 26 07A5 2 R1 81 276 44 26 012A 2 R1 116 404 44 26 017A 2 R1 161 551 44 26 024A 2 R2 227 776 88 52 031A 2 R2 285 973 88 52 046A 2 R3 420 1434 134 79 059A 2 R3 536 1829 134 79 075A 2 R4 671 2290 280 165 088A 2 R4 786 2685 280 165 114
267. imotor systems the calculated sum of all motor cable lengths must not exceed the maximum motor cable length given in the appropriate table below Technical data 260 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Motor cable length for 400 V drives The table below shows the maximum motor cable lengths for 400 V drives with different switching frequencies Examples for using the table are also given Maximum cable length for 400 V drives EMC limits Operational limits Second environment First environment category C3 category C2 Basic unit Min u Frame 1 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 1 kHz 4kHz 8kHz 1 4 kHz 8 12 kHz filters size m ftm ft m ft m ftm ftim ft m ft m ft m ft R1 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 100 330 100 330 150 490 R2 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 100 330 30 98 200 660 100 330 250 820 R3 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 75 245 75 245 200 660 100 330 250 820 R4 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 75 245 75 245 200 660 100 330 300 980 R5 100 330 100 330 100 330 100 330 100 330 100 330 300 980 1507 4902 300 980 R6 100 330 100 330 3 3 100 330 100 330 3 3 300 980 150 490 300 980 See the new terms in section IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions on page
268. ine If no master station is on line Neither the EFB OK MESSAGES nor the errors 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS increase on any of the stations To correct Check that a network master is connected and properly programmed on the network e Verify that the cable is connected and that it is not cut or short circuited Duplicate stations If two or more stations have duplicate numbers Two or more drives cannot be addressed Every time there is a read or write to one particular station the value for 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS or 5308 EFB UART ERRORS advances To correct Verify the station numbers of all stations Change conflicting station numbers Swapped wires If the communication wires are swapped terminal A on one drive is connected to terminal B on another The value of 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES does not advance The values of 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS are advancing To correct Check that the RS 485 lines are not swapped Embedded fieldbus 188 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Fault 28 Serial 1 Err If the drive s control panel shows fault code 28 SERIAL 1 ERR check for either of the following The master system is down To correct resolve problem with master system The communication connection is bad To correct check communication connection at the drive The time out selection for the drive is too short for the given installation The master is not polling the dri
269. ines the Timed function as the control for enabling external PID control Timed function active enables external PID control e See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 1 DH INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the digital input disables external PID control e De activating the digital input enables external PID control 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control e See DI1 INV above OFFSET Defines the offset for the PID output When PID is activated output starts from this value When PID is deactivated output resets to this value e Parameter is active when 4230 TRIM MODE 0 trim mode is not active 4230 TRIM MODE Selects the type of trim if any Using the trim it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference O NOT SEL Disables the trim function 1 PROPORTIONAL Adds a trim factor that is proportional to the rpm Hz reference 2 DIRECT Adds a trim factor based on the control loop s maximum limit 4231 TRIM SCALE Defines the multiplier as a percent plus or minus used in the trim mode Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 155 Code Description 4232 CORRECTION SRC Defines the trimming reference for the correction source 1 PID2
270. int for the motor s accumulated revolutions counter e Value is compared to parameter 2904 value O Disables the trigger 2904 REVOLUTION ACT Defines the actual value of the motor s accumulated revolutions counter When parameter 2903 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2903 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel O Resets the parameter 2905 2906 2907 RUN TIME TRIG Sets the trigger point for the drive s run time counter e Value is compared to parameter 2906 value 0 0 Disables the trigger RUN TIME ACT Defines the actual value of the drive s run time counter When parameter 2905 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2905 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 Resets the parameter USER MWh TRIG Sets the trigger point for the drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours counter e Value is compared to parameter 2908 value 0 0 Disables the trigger 2908 USER MWh ACT Defines the actual value of the drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours counter When parameter 2907 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2907 a maintenance notice is di
271. ion 12 PANEL LOCAL 1 Control is in control panel or PC tool local mode 0 Control is not in control panel local mode 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL 1 Control is in fieldbus local mode steals control panel local 0 Control is not in fieldbus local mode 14 EXT2 ACT 1 Control is in EXT2 mode 0 Control is in EXT1 mode 15 FAULT 1 Drive is in a fault state 0 Drive is not in a fault state Embedded fieldbus ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 203 DCU profile STATUS WORD See parameter 0304 Bit Name Value Status 16 ALARM 1 An alarm is on 0 No alarms are on 17 REQ_MAINT 1 A maintenance request is pending 0 No maintenance request is pending 18 DIRLOCK 1 Direction lock is ON Direction change is locked out 0 Direction lock is OFF 19 LOCALLOCK 1 Local mode lock is ON Local mode is locked out 0 Local mode lock is OFF 20 CTL_MODE 1 Drive is in vector control mode 0 Drive is in scalar control mode 21 25 Reserved 26 REQ_CTL 1 Copy the control word 0 no op 27 REQ_REF1 1 Reference 1 requested in this channel 0 Reference 1 is not requested in this channel 28 REQ_REF2 1 Reference 2 requested in this channel 0 Reference 2 is not requested in this channel 29 REQ_REF2EXT 1 External PID reference 2 requested in this channel 0 External PID reference 2 is not requested in this channel 30 ACK_STARTINH 1 A start inhibit from this channel is granted
272. ion defines two distinct transmission modes ASCII and RTU The ACQ550 supports RTU only Feature summary The following Modbus function codes are supported by the ACQ550 Function Code Hex Description Read Coil Status 0x01 Read discrete output status For the ACQ550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Holding Registers Read Discrete Input 0x02 Read discrete inputs status For the ACQ550 the individual bits Status of the status word are mapped to Inputs 1 16 or 1 32 depending on the active profile Terminal inputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Input 33 e g DI1 Input 33 Read Multiple 0x03 Read multiple holding registers For the ACQ550 the entire Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Multiple Input 0x04 Read multiple input registers For the ACQ550 the 2 analog Registers input channels are mapped as input registers 1 amp 2 Force Single Coil 0x05 Write a single discrete output For the ACQ550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Single 0x06 Write single holding register For the ACQ550 the entire Holding Register parameter set is mapped as holding regis
273. ion of the motor rotation Disconnect input power from the drive and wait 5 minutes for the intermediate circuit capacitors to discharge Measure the voltage between each input terminal U1 V1 and W1 and earth with a multimeter to ensure that the drive is discharged Exchange the position of two motor cable phase conductors at the drive output terminals or at the motor connection box Verify your work by applying input power and repeating the check as described above SPEED LIMITS AND ACCELERATION DECELERAT Set the minimum speed parameter 2001 Set the maximum speed parameter 2002 Set the acceleration time 1 parameter 2202 Note Check also acceleration time 2 parameter 2205 if two acceleration times will be used in the application Set the deceleration time 1 parameter 2203 Note Set also deceleration time 2 parameter 2206 if two deceleration times will be used in the application ACQ550 U1 User s Manual forward direction reverse direction ION TIMES SAVING A USER PARAMETER SET AND FINAL The start up is now completed However it might be useful at this stage to set the parameters required by your application and save the settings as a user parameter set as instructed in section User parameter sets on page 66 Check that the drive state is OK Check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display CHECK and that the panel LED is green and does not blink The drive is now
274. ircuit The figure below shows thermistor relay and PTC sensor connections using a digital input At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through eg a 3 3 nF capacitor If this is not possible leave the shield unconnected Thermistor relay PTC sensor 3501 SENSOR TYPE 5 THERM 0 or 6 THERM 1 3501 SENSOR TYPE 5 THERM 0 Thermistor relay Control board Control board DI6 24 V DC Na DIE 24 V DC T TA 3J Motor T 3 Motor S Parameters 136 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual For other faults or for anticipating motor overheating using a model see Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS Code Description 3501 SENSOR TYPE Identifies the type of the motor temperature sensor used PT100 C PTC ohm or thermistor See parameters 1501 A01 CONTENT SEL and 1507 A02 CONTENT SEL O NONE 1 1xPT100 Sensor configuration uses one PT100 sensor e Analog output A01 or AO2 feeds constant current through the sensor e The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises as does the voltage over the sensor e The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input Al1 or AI2 and converts it to degrees Celsius 2 2 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses two PT100 sensors e Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 3 3 x PT100 Sensor configurati
275. is in local control mode the control panel displays LOC or Drive is in remote control mode AUTO and is parameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check e Communication lines and connections Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Parameters in Group 10 START STOP DIR and Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT if drive operation is REM 2009 DEVICE OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is hot This alarm warns that a DEVICE OVERTEMP fault may be near R1 R4 100 C 212 F R5 R6 110 C 230 F Check for and correct Fan failure e Obstructions in the air flow e Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink Excessive ambient temperature Excessive motor load 2010 MOTOR TEMP Motor is hot based on either the drive s estimate or on temperature feedback This alarm warns that a MOT OVERTEMP fault trip may be near Check Check for overloaded motor Adjust the parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 Checkthe temperature sensors and Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 2011 2012 RESERVED MOTOR STALL Not used Motor is operating in the stall region This alarm warns that a MOTOR STALL fault trip may be near 2013 Note 1 2014 Note 1 AUTORESET AUTOCHANGE This alarm warns that the drive is about to perform an automatic fault reset which may start the motor To control automatic reset use Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET This alarm
276. is run after motor parameters are entered or changed See parameter 9910 ID RUN for a description of motor models 2026 RESERVED Not used 2027 USER LOAD This alarm warns that the condition defined by parameter 3701 USER CURVE LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 2028 START DELAY Shown during the Start delay See parameter 2113 START DELAY Note 1 Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions e g parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 5 ALARM or 16 FLT ALARM this alarm is not indicated by a relay output Diagnostics ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 241 Maintenance WARNING Read chapter Safety on page 5 before performing any maintenance on the equipment Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death Maintenance intervals If installed in an appropriate environment the drive requires very little maintenance This table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB Maintenance Interval Instruction Heatsink temperature check Depends on the dustiness of the See Heaisink on page 241 and cleaning environment every 6 12 months Main cooling fan replacement Every six years See Main fan replacement on page 242 Internal enclosure cooling fan Every three years See Internal enclosure fan replacement replacement on 244 IP54 UL type 12 drives Capacitor reforming Every year when stored See Heforming on
277. ivated DIT DI2 DIS Function 1 1 1 No constant speed 0 1 1 Constant speed 1 1202 1 O 1 Constant speed 2 1203 O O 1 Constant speed 3 1204 1 1 0 Constant speed 4 1205 O 1 O Constant speed 5 1206 1 0 O Constant speed 6 1207 O O O Constant speed 7 1208 13 DI3 4 5 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI3 DI4 and DI5 e See above D11 2 3 INV for code 14 DI4 5 6 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI4 DI5 and DI6 e See above D11 2 3 INV for code 1202 CONST SPEED 1 Sets value for Constant Speed 1 e The range and units depend on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Range 0 30000 rpm when 9904 1 or 2 VECTOR SPEED e Range 0 500 Hz when 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ 1203 1208 CONST SPEED 2 CONST SPEED 7 Each sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above Constant Speed 7 is used also as jogging speed See parameter 1004 JOGGING SEL Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 99 Code Description 1209 TIMED MODE SEL Defines timed function activated constant speed mode Timed function can be used to change between the external reference and constant speeds when parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 15 18 TIMED FUNC 1 4 or 19 TIMED FUN1 amp 2 1 EXT CS1 2 3 f parameter 1201 15 18 TIMED FUNC 1 4 selects an external speed whe
278. k 1 week 2 week 3 XXXXX Integer starting every week from 00001 Installation 14 Motor compatibility ACQ550 U1 User s Manual The motor drive and supply power must be compatible Motor specification Verify Reference Motor type 3 phase induction motor Nominal current Motor value is within this range 0 2 2 0 long long drive heavy duty current Type designation label on drive entry for Output long Or Type designation on drive and rating table in chapter Technical data on page 247 Nominal frequency 10 500 Hz Voltage range Motor is compatible with the ACQ550 voltage range 208 240 V for ACQ550 U1 XXXX 2 or 380 480 V for ACQ550 U1 XXXX 4 or 500 600 V for ACQ550 U1 XXXX 6 Insulation 500 600 V drives Either the motor complies with NEMA MG1 Part 31 ora du dt filter is used between the motor and drive For ACQ550 U1 XXXX 6 Tools required To install the ACQ550 you need the following screwdrivers as appropriate for the mounting hardware used wire stripper tape measure e drill for installations involving ACQ550 U1 frame sizes R5 or R6 and IP54 UL type 12 enclosures punch for creating conduit mounting holes e for installations involving ACQ550 U1 frame size R6 appropriate crimping tool for power cable lugs See section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 257 e mounting
279. known drive type fault code 235 unpacking drive a 12 unsymmetrically grounded networks see corner grounded TN system user load curve parameter group 142 fault code a 235 frequency parameters 142 143 function parameter 142 mode parameter 0 142 time parameter 00 142 torque parameters 142 143 user parameter set a o 66 change control parameter 107 download 51 293 V vector speed mode cere eee 83 version firmware parameter 131 loading package parameter 131 parameter table parameter 131 Vibration stress testing 277 voltage at fault history parameter 91 rating code eee ee 13 voltage frequency ratio parameter 121 W wake up delay PID parameter 151 deviation PID parameter 151 warning automatic start up aa 6 dangerous voltages 5 disconnecting device disconnecting means 6 ELV Extra Low Voltage 25 EM1 EM3 F1 and F2 screws 6 filter on corner grounded TN system 6 filter on IT system a 6 high temperatures a 6 liStinig AA A 5 not field repairable 6 parallel control conne
280. l ETTITI E 1P2009 pe FM 6 Optional Add a lock not supplied to secure the control panel window 7 Continue with start up See chapter Start up control with I O and ID Run on page 33 Installation ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Start up control with I O and ID Run The chapter instructs how to perform the start up start stop change the direction of rotation and adjust the speed of the motor through the I O interface e perform an Identification Run for the drive Using the control panel to do these tasks is explained briefly in this chapter For details on how to use the control panel refer to chapter Control panel starting on page 43 How to start up the drive You can either run the Start up Assistant see section How to perform the guided start up on page 33 or perform a limited start up see section How to perform the limited start up on page 35 The Start up Assistant guides you through all essential settings to be done In the 33 limited start up the drive gives no guidance you go through the very basic settings by following the instructions given in the manual How to perform the guided start up Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand A A SAFETY The start up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician T
281. l Values for example Group 10 START STOP DIR parameters can be mapped to Input Words using Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE parameters protocol dependent but typically parameters 5104 5126 Network planning should address the following questions e What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network e What control information must be sent down to the drives e What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling system Fieldbus adapter 212 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Mechanical and electrical installation FBA WARNING Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from the power source Overview The FBA fieldbus adapter is a plug in module that fits in the drive s expansion slot 2 The module is held in place with plastic retaining clips and two screws The screws also ground the shield for the module cable and connect the module GND signals to the drive control board On installation of the module electrical connection to the drive is automatically established through the 34 pin connector Mounting procedure Note Install the input power and motor cables first 1 Insert the module carefully into the drive expansion slot 2 until the retaining clips lock the module into position 2 Fasten the two screws included to the stand offs Note Correct installation of the screws is essential for fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation
282. l data 268 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Px Duty cycle based resistor power rating in deceleration braking where x is ONmax time Installing and wiring resistors All resistors must be installed outside the drive module in a place where they can dissipate heat the resistor is very hot Materials near the brake resistor must be non flammable WARNING The surface temperature of the resistor is very high and air flowing from Provide protection from accidental contact with the resistor To ensure that the input fuses protect the resistor cable use resistor cables with the same rating as used for the power input to the drive The maximum length of the resistor cable s is 10 m 33 ft See section Power connection diagrams on page 21 for the resistor cable connection points Mandatory circuit protection The following setup is essential for safety it interrupts the main supply in fault situations involving chopper shorts Equip the drive with a main contactor Wire the contactor so that it opens if the resistor thermal switch opens an overheated resistor opens the contactor Below is a simple wiring diagram example L1 L2 L3 1 Off Eus Fuses ll 1 3 5 18 3 BC p ees pow ie du MS ae a i e de ud A jr E E Er S LE nt 2 4 6 14 4 acoso L O O O O U1 V1 W1 i To Thermal switch standard in i ABB resistors K1 Parameter set up T
283. ldbus adapter 224 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Reference As described earlier in section Control interface on page 210 the REFERENCE word is a speed or frequency reference Reference scaling The following table describes REFERENCE Scaling for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives Profile FBA Reference Range ole Scaling Remarks REF 1 32767 Speed or 20000 par 1105 Final reference limited by 32767 frequency 0 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 2001 2002 20000 corresponds to 100 Speed or 2007 2008 frequency REF2 32767 Speed or 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 32767 frequency 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 2001 2002 10000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency Torque 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 0 0 2015 2017 torque1 or 10000 par 1108 2016 2018 torque2 10000 corresponds to 100 PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by Reference 0 0 4012 4013 PID set1 or 10000 par 1108 4112 4113 PID set2 10000 corresponds to 100 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM AI1 or COMM AI1 the reference is scaled as follows Reference Value setting ABB Drives profile FBA Al re
284. le Default not used Installation ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 25 X1 Hardware description 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable Default Ready 20 RO1A pa Maximum 250VAC 30VDC 2A NT Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA 21 RO1B E o 2 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Default Running 3 23 RO2A Maximum 250 V AC 30 V DC 2 A ka NT Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA amp 24 RO2B 1 o 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable Default Fault 1 26 RO3A m Maximum 250VAC 30VDC 2A NT Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA 27 RO3B 1 Digital input impedance 1 5 kohm Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V 2 Default values depend on the macro used Values specified are for the default macro See chapter Application macros on page 57 Note Terminals 3 6 and 9 are at the same potential Note For safety reasons the fault relay signals a fault when the ACQ550 is powered down WARNING All ELV Extra Low Voltage circuits connected to the drive must be used N within a zone of equipotential bonding i e within a zone where all simultaneously accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous voltages appearing between them This is accomplished by a proper factory grounding The terminals on the control board as well as on the optional modules attachable to the
285. le time 2 Duty cycle Cycle time the peak braking power requirement type of braking deceleration to zero vs overhauling load During deceleration to zero the generated power steadily decreases averaging half of the peak power For an overhauling load the braking is countering an external force gravity for example and the braking power is constant The total heat generated from an overhauling load is double the heat generated from deceleration to zero speed for the same peak torque and ON time Technical data 266 Power Avg braking power overhauling load Avg braking power during deceleration to zero Temperature Deceleration curve ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Overhauling load curve Time The many variables in the last requirement above are most easily dealt with using the following tables e First determine your maximum braking time ON ONyax minimum braking time OFF OFF ym and load type deceleration or overhauling load Calculate duty cycle Duty cycle ONmax ONmax OFF min 100 n the appropriate table find the column that best matches your data ONmax x column specification and Duty cycle column specification Find the row that matches your drive The minimum power rating for deceleration to zero is the value in the selected row column e For overhauling loads double the rating in the selecte
286. lete the drive is unable to allocate a digital input interlock for each PFC motor parameters 8120 INTERLOCKS and 8127 MOTORS 1015 RESERVED Not used 1016 PAR USER LOAD C Parameter values for the user load curve are inconsistent Check that the following conditions are met e 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 lt 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 lt 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 lt 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 lt 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 e 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 lt 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 e 3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 lt 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 e 3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 lt 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 lt 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 lt 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 Fault resetting The ACQ550 can be configured to automatically reset certain faults Refer to parameter Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET WARNING If an external source for start command is selected and it is active the ACQ550 may start immediately after fault reset Flashing red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a flashing red LED e Turn the power off for 5 minutes Red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a red LED on not flashing correct the problem and do one of the following Press RESET from the control panel Turn the power off for 5 minutes Depending on the value of 1604 FAULT RESET SEL the following could also be used to reset the drive e digital input e serial communication When the fault has been corrected the motor can
287. licable standards EN 50178 1997 Electronic equipment for use in power installations C IEC EN 60204 1 2005 Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 General requirements Provisions for compliance The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing an emergency stop device asupply disconnecting device IEC EN 60529 2004 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures IP code IEC 60664 1 2002 Insulation coordination for equipment within low voltage systems Part 1 Principles requirements and tests IEC EN 61800 5 1 2003 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5 1 Safety requirements Electrical thermal and energy IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods IEC EN 61000 3 12 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 3 12 Limits Limits for harmonic currents produced by equipment connected to public low voltage systems with input current gt 16 A and 75 A per phase IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods UL 508C UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment third t UL US edition LISTED C22 2 No 14 CSA Standard for Industrial Control Equipment for ACQ550 U1 GP o drives only CE marking C A CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive f
288. ls See the table on the right for tightening torques 29 IP5003 IP5004 Frame Tightening torque size N m Ib ft R1 R2 1 4 1 R3 2 5 1 8 R4 5 6 PE 2 4 PE 1 5 R5 15 11 R6 40 PE 8 30 PE 6 Note For R6 frame size refer to section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 257 Connect the bundle pig tail created from the motor cable shield to the GND terminal Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper shield into a bundle pig tail Route control cable s through clamp s and tighten clamp s Connect the ground shield bundle pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at the drive end Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See section Control terminals table on page 24 Use a tightening torque of 0 4 N m 0 3 Ib ft IP5005 Installation 30 Wiring IP54 UL type 12 enclosure with conduit 1 PL m 0 Remove and discard the cable seals where conduit will be installed The cable seals are cone shaped rubber seals on the bottom of the drive For each conduit run install water tight conduit connectors not supplied Route the power wiring through the conduit Route the motor wiring through the conduit Strip the wires Connect the power motor and ground wires to the drive terminals See the t
289. lt not used Resolution 0 1 accuracy 1 Analog I O Two different DIP switch types can be used J1 AI OFF 0 10 V R 312 kohm J1 Al2 ON 0 20 mA R 100 ohm 99 AGND Analog input circuit common connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 Mohm NO NO AO1 Analog output programmable Default frequency 0 20 mA load lt 500 ohm Accuracy 3 8 AO2 Analog output programmable Default current 0 20 mA load lt 500 ohm Accuracy 3 9 AGND Analog output circuit common connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 Mohm 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 250 mA reference to GND short circuit protected 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common connected internally as floating 12 DCOM Digital input common To activate a digital input there must be 2 10 V or lt 10 V between that input and DCOM The 24 V may be provided by the E ACQ550 X1 10 or by an external 12 24 V source of either polarity a 13 DI1 Digital input 1 programmable Default start stop 3 14 DI2 Digital input 2 programmable Default fwd rev 2 15 DI3 Digital input 3 programmable Default constant speed sel code 16 DI4 Digital input 4 programmable Default constant speed sel code 17 DI5 Digital input 5 programmable Default ramp pair selection code 18 DI6 Digital input 6 programmab
290. meter 114 magnetizing time parameter 113 overvoltage fault code 232 undervoltage fault code 233 voltage stabilizer parameter 122 deceleration parameter group 116 at aux start PFC parameter 175 emergency time parameter 117 ramp select parameter 116 ramp shape parameter 116 ramp time PFC parameter 175 ramp zero select parameter 117 time parameter 2 05 116 default values listing for macros cee eee 67 listing for parameters 69 derating adjustment example 250 altitude Ba bate ee ete a 250 single phase supply 250 switching frequency 250 temperature aaa ersen 250 derivation time PID parameter 147 derivation time parameter 118 device overtemperature fault code 233 GIAQNOSHICS AE 231 EFB comm occ 186 FBAcomm cuco Ka ee ae eee NA 217 differences list downloads 52 digital cable requirements 270 digital input at fault history parameters 91 connections 24 specificatiONS ooooooooooooo 25 status data parameter 86 digital output connections 24 specifications 00000 269 dimensions drive mounting
291. meter set 2 The operation of parameters 4101 4126 is analogous with set 1 parameters 4001 4026 PID parameter set 2 can be selected by parameter 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Code Description 4101 See 4001 4026 4126 Parameters 154 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Group 42 EXT TRIM PID This group defines the parameters used for the second PID controller PID2 which is used for the External Trimming PID The operation of parameters 4201 4221 is analogous with Process PID set 1 PID1 parameters 4001 4021 Code Description 4201 4221 4228 4229 See 4001 4021 ACTIVATE Defines the source for enabling the external PID function Requires 4230 TRIM MODE O NOT SEL O NOT SEL Disables external PID control 1 DI1 Defines digital input DIT as the control for enabling external PID control e Activating the digital input enables external PID control e De activating the digital input disables external PID control 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control e See DI1 above 7 DRIVE RUN Defines the start command as the control for enabling external PID control e Activating the start command drive is running enables external PID control 8 ON Defines the power on as the control for enabling external PID control e Activating power to the drive enables external PID control 9 12 TIMED FUNC 1 4 Def
292. meters and to repeat the motor identification every time the motor is changed The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the motor identification once for each motor and then to save the data as two user parameter sets When the motor is changed only the corresponding user parameter set needs to be loaded and the drive is ready to operate Application macros ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Macro default values for parameters 67 Parameter default values are listed in section Complete parameter liston page 69 Changing from the default macro ABB Standard that is editing the value of parameter 9902 changes the parameter default values as defined in the following tables Note Configured for 60 Hz NEMA compliance ACQ550 U1 ACQ550 U1 Motor Parameter ABB 2 wire 3 wire Alternate Potentio Hand auto PID Control PFC Control meter 9902 APPLIC MACRO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ABB STANDARD 3 WIRE ALTERNATE MOTOR POT HAND AUTO PID CONTROL PFC CONTROL 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR 1 VECTOR 1 VECTOR 1 2 VECTOR 1 2 VECTOR 1 2 VECTOR 3 2 SCALAR FREQ SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED FREQ 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 2 2DIl1 2 4 DI1P 2P 3 9 DI1F 2R 2 DI1 2 2 DI1 2 1 DI1 1 DI1 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS O NOTSEL 0 NOT SEL 0 NOT SEL 0 NOT SEL 7 DI6 5 6 DIG 6 DIG 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST 3 REQUEST 3 REQUEST 3 REQUEST 3 REQUE
293. motor is less than 20 of the nominal current of the drive when the drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected O Press keys 43 vw to change the parameter value Select SAVE to store the modified value or select CANCEL to leave the set mode Any modifications not saved are cancelled Select EXIT to return to the listing of parameter groups Similarly enter the motor data from the motor nameplate Note Set the motor data to exactly the same value as on ABB Motors CE G the motor nameplate For example if the motor nominal Speed ie Tor momia CO w 7 nameplate setting the value of po Pisa rss parameter 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED to 1500 rpm results in the 4000 50 30 1475 56 fosa sso v 50 30 1470 34 oss ss0D so so 1470 se joss lt 4150 50 30 1475 54 oss 4400 so 35 1770 58 joss oo e Motor nominal voltage parameter 9905 wrong operation of the drive 380 V supply voltage Start up control with I O and ID Run ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 37 Motor nominal current parameter 9906 Allowed range 0 2 2 0 long A e Motor nominal frequency parameter 9907 e Motor nominal speed parameter 9908 e Motor nominal power parameter 9909 O Select the motor identification method parameter 9910 The default value 0 OFF IDMAGN using the identification magn
294. n Default User 4221 ACT2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4228 ACTIVATE 6 12 1 O NOT SEL 4229 OFFSET 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 4230 TRIM MODE O NOT SEL 1 PROPORTIONAL 1 O NOT SEL 3 DIRECT 4231 TRIM SCALE 100 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 4232 CORRECTION SRC 1 PID2REF 2 PID2OUTPUT 1 1 PID2REF Group 45 ENERGY SAVING 4502 ENERGY PRICE 0 00 655 35 0 01 0 00 4507 CO2 CONV FACTOR 0 0 10 0 tn MWh 0 1 tn MWh 0 5 tn MWh 4508 PUMP POWER 0 0 1000 0 0 1 100 0 4509 ENERGY RESET O DONE 1 RESET 1 O DONE Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE 5101 FBA TYPE O NOT DEFINED 5102 FB PAR 2 26 0 65535 1 0 5126 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH O DONE 1 REFRESH 1 O DONE 5128 FILE CPI FW REV 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 5129 FILE CONFIG ID 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 5130 FILE CONFIG REV 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 5131 FBA STATUS 0 6 1 O IDLE 5132 FBA CPI FW REV 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 5133 FBA APPL FW REV 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 Group 52 PANEL COMM 5201 STATION ID 1 247 1 1 5202 BAUD RATE 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 115 2 kbits s 9 6 kbits s 5203 PARITY O 8 NONE 1 1 8 NONE 2 1 O 8 NONE 1 2 2 8 EVEN 1 3 2 8 ODD 1 5204 OK MESSAGES 0 65535 1 x 5205 PARITY ERRORS 0 65535 1 5206 FRAME ERRORS 0 65535 1 5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS 0 65535 1 5208 CRC ERRORS 0 65535 1 Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID 0 0xFFFF 1 0 5302 EFB STATION ID 0 65535 1 1 5303 EFB BAUD RATE 1 2 2
295. n enable signal This digital input must be de activated to enable the timed function 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the timed function enable signal 3602 START TIME 1 Defines the daily start time 20 30 00 q The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds Time period 2 If parameter value is 07 00 00 the timer is activated 17 00 00 at 7 a m Time period 4 The figure shows multiple timers on different 19 00 09 weekdays 13 00 00 Time period 3 12 00 00 10 30 00 Time period 1 09 00 00 00 00 00 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 3603 STOP TIME 1 Defines the daily stop time The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds e f the parameter value is 09 00 00 the timer is deactivated at 9 a m 3604 3605 START DAY 1 Defines the weekly start day 1 MONDAY 7 SUNDAY f parameter value is 1 timer 1 weekly is active from Monday midnight 00 00 00 STOP DAY 1 Defines weekly stop day 1 MONDAY 7 SUNDAY f parameter value is 5 timer 1 weekly is deactivated on Friday midnight 23 59 58 3606 3607 3608 START TIME 2 Defines timer2 daily start time e See parameter 3602 STOP TIME 2 Defines timer 2 daily stop time e See parameter 3603 START DAY 2 Defines timer 2 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3609 STOP DAY 2 Defines timer 2 weekly stop day See parameter 360
296. n this timed function 1 4 is not active and selects Constant speed 1 when it is active TIMED FUNCTION 1 4 Function 0 External reference 1 Constant speed 1 1202 f parameter 1201 19 TIMED FUN1 amp 2 selects an external speed when neither timed function is active selects Constant speed 1 when only Timed function 1 is active selects Constant speed 2 when only Timed function 2 is active and selects Constant speed 3 when both Timed functions 1 and 2 are active TIMED FUNCTION 1 TIMED FUNCTION 2 Function 0 0 External reference 1 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 Constant speed 3 1204 2 Cs1 2 3 4 f parameter 1201 15 18 TIMED FUNC 1 4 selects Constant speed 1 when this timed function 1 4 is not active and selects Constant speed 2 when it is active TIMED FUNCTION 1 4 Function 0 Constant speed 1 1202 1 Constant speed 2 1203 f parameter 1201 19 TIMED FUN1 amp 2 selects Constant speed 1 when neither timed function is active selects Constant speed 2 when only Timed function 1 is active selects Constant speed 3 when only Timed function 2 is active and selects Constant speed 4 when both Timed functions 1 and 2 are active TIMED FUNCTION 1 TIMED FUNCTION 2 Function 0 0 Constant speed 1 1202 1 0 Constant speed 2 1203 0 1 Constant speed 3 1204 1 1 Constant speed 4 1205
297. nal brake chopper Connect a chopper and a resistor or a brake unit to the DC link terminals on the drive Contact your ABB representative for appropriate parts Selecting the braking resistors frame sizes R1 and R2 Braking resistor must meet three requirements Resistance must be always higher than the minimum value Ryn defined for the drive type in the following tables Never use resistance below this value Resistance must be low enough to be able to produce the desired braking torque To achieve the maximum braking torque the larger of 150 of heavy duty or 110 of nominal duty the resistance must not exceed Ryax If maximum braking torque is not necessary resistor values can exceed Rmax The resistor power rating must be high enough to dissipate the braking power This requirement involves many factors the maximum continuous power rating for the resistor s the rate at which the resistor changes temperature resistor thermal time constant maximum braking time ON If the regeneration braking power is larger than the resistor rated power there is a limit to the ON time or the resistor overheats before the OFF period begins minimum braking time OFF If the regeneration braking power is larger than the resistor rated power the OFF time must be large enough for the resistor to cool between ON periods A Braking ON Time Braking OFF d ON time OFF time E 4 _ ON time Us Cyc
298. ncy ramp stop mode STPMODE_C no op Coast stop mode no op 10 O O RAMP_2 Ramp pair 2 Ramp pair 1 11 O RAMP OUT O Ramp output to 0 no op 12 o RAMP HOLD Ramp freeze no op 13 RAMP IN O Ramp input to 0 no op 14 15 Oj O RREQ LOCALL Local mode lock In lock drive will not switch to local mode OC O TORQLIM2 no op Torque limit pair 2 o Torque limit pair 1 DCU profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 0302 Bit Name Value Function Comments 27 16 26 REF CONST Reserved Constant speed ref no op 28 REF AVE Average speed ref no op These bits are only for supervision purposes 29 LINK ON Oj oO Master is detected in link Link is down 30 REQ_STARTINH Start inhibit request is pending Start inhibit request is OFF 31 OFF_INTERLOCK Panel OFF button pressed For the control panel or PC tool this is the OFF button interlock no op Status Word The contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station Embedded fieldbus ACQ550 U1 User s Manual ABB Drives profile The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the STATUS WORD content for the ABB Drives profile 201
299. nd control while keeping the drive running Pressing the OFF button switches to hand control and stops the drive To switch back to auto control AUTO press and hold the button Hand Auto Off To start the drive press the HAND or AUTO buttons to stop the drive press the OFF button Reference To modify the reference only possible if the display in the upper right corner is in reverse video press the UP or DOWN buttons the reference changes immediately The reference can be modified in the local control mode HAND OFF and can be parameterized using Group 11 reference select to also allow modification in the remote control mode Note The Start Stop Shaft direction and Reference functions are only valid in local control HAND OFF mode Parameters Mode To change the parameters follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu 1 WE Select the Parameters mode with the UP x DOWN buttons and select ENTER to EE 2 select the Parameters Mode wy Control panel 46 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Select the appropriate parameter group with the UP DOWN buttons and select kA b Select the appropriate parameter in a Pa group with the UP DOWN buttons Select cA 4 EDIT to change the parameter ww G Press the UP DOWN buttons to change the parameter value CA 5 NE Select SAVE to store the modified value or select CANCEL to leave the set mode NE 6 Any modifi
300. nel Cleaning Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display window Battery A battery is used for ACQ Control Panels The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during power interruptions The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years To remove the battery use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel Replace the battery with type CR2032 Note The battery is NOT required for any control panel or drive function except the clock Maintenance 246 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Maintenance ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Technical data Ratings 247 By type designation the table below provides ratings for the ACQ550 adjustable speed AC drive including e IEC ratings e NEMA ratings shaded columns e frame size Ratings 208 240 V drives Abbreviated column headers are described in section Symbols on page 249 Type Normal use Heavy duty use ACQ550 x1 lon PN PN bna Pha Pha name see below A kW hp A kw hp Three phase supply voltage 208 240 V 04A6 2 4 6 0 75 1 3 5 0 55 0 75 R1 06A6 2 6 6 1 1 1 5 4 6 0 75 1 R1 07A5 2 7 5 1 5 2 6 6 1 1 1 5 R1 012A 2 11 8 2 2 3 7 5 1 5 2 R1 017A 2 16 7 4 5 11 8 2 2 3 R1 024A 2 24 2 5 5 7 5 16 7 4 5 R2 031A 2 30 8 7 5 10 24 2 5 5 7 5 R2 046A 2 46 2 11 15 30 8 7 5 10 R3 059A 2 59 4 15 20 46 2 11 15 R3 0
301. ng pi 3 14159 2 00314 3 14 3 03142 3 142 4 31416 3 1416 Parameters 148 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 4008 0 VALUE l Units P4006 Defines together with the next parameter the scaling applied to Scale P4007 1000 0 the PID controller s actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 1 us and 0132 e Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 P 4009 4009 100 VALUE Defines together with the previous parameter the scaling applied to the PID controller s actual values P 4008 Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 2 T Cu 096 100 oe Internal scale 4010 SET POINT SEL Defines the reference signal source for the PID controller e Parameter has no significance when the PID regulator is by passed see 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL O KEYPAD Control panel provides reference 1 Al1 Analog input 1 provides reference 2 Al2 Analog input 2 provides reference 8 COMM Fieldbus provides reference 9 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 10 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 11 DI3U 4D RNC Digital inputs acting as a motor potentiometer control provide reference DIS increases the spe
302. nnot be reset The other two loggers can be reset by a user defined method They are also reset if either of the signals or the peak value filter time is changed Code 6401 Description PVL SIGNAL Defines by number the signal logged for the peak value Any parameter number in Group 01 OPERATING DATA can be selected Eg 102 parameter 0102 SPEED 100 NOT SELECTED No signal parameter logged for the peak value 101 178 Logs parameter 0101 0178 6402 PVL FILTER TIME Defines the filter time for peak value logging 0 0 120 0 Filter time seconds 6403 LOGGERS RESET Defines the source for the reset of peak value logger and amplitude logger 2 O NOT SEL No reset selected 1 DI1 Reset loggers on the rising edge of digital input DI1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Reset loggers on the rising edge of digital input DI2 DI6 7 RESET Reset loggers Parameter is set to NOT SEL 1 DI1 INV Reset loggers on the falling edge of digital input D11 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Reset loggers on the falling edge of digital input DI2 DI6 6404 AL2 SIGNAL Defines the signal logged for amplitude logger 2 Any parameter number in Group 01 OPERATING DATA can be selected Eg 102 parameter 0102 SPEED 100 NOT SELECTED No signal parameter logged for amplitude distribution amplitude logger 2 101 178 Logs parameter 0101 0178 6405 AL2 SIGNAL BASE Defines the base val
303. nput power mains fuses see below A IEC 60269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann type 02A7 6 2 7 10 10 JJS 10 03A9 6 3 9 06A1 6 6 1 09A0 6 9 0 16 15 JJS 15 011A 6 11 017A 6 17 25 25 JJS 25 022A 6 22 027A 6 27 35 40 JJS 40 032A 6 32 041A 6 41 50 50 JJS 50 052A 6 52 60 60 JJS 60 062A 6 62 80 80 JJS 80 077A 6 77 100 JJS 100 099A 6 99 125 150 JJS 150 125A 6 125 160 175 JJS 175 144A 6 144 200 200 JJS 200 Emergency stop devices 00467918 xls C The overall design of the installation must include emergency stop devices and any other safety equipment that may be needed Pressing STOP on the drive s control panel does NOT generate an emergency stop of the motor separate the drive from dangerous potential Technical data 254 Input power cables wiring Input wiring can be any of ACQ550 U1 User s Manual a four conductor cable three phases and ground protective earth Shielding is not required four insulated conductors routed through conduit Size wiring according to local safety regulations appropriate input voltage and the drive s load current In any case the conductor must be less than the maximum limit defined by the terminal size see section Drive s power connection terminals on page 256 The table below lists copper and aluminium cable types for different load currents These recommendations apply only for the conditions listed at the top of the table
304. o enable dynamic braking switch off the drive s overvoltage control Set parameter 2005 0 DISABLE Technical data ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 269 Control connections Control connection specifications Conirol connection specifications Analog inputs and See section Control terminals table on page 24 outputs Digital inputs i input impedance 1 5 kohm Maximum voltage for digital inputs is e Max contact voltage 30 V DC 250 VAC Max contact current power 6 A 30 V DC 1500 VA 250 V AC Relays e Max continuous current 2 A rms cos y 1 1 A rms cos q 0 4 digital outputs Minimum load 500 mW 12 V 10 mA Contact material Silver nickel AgN solation between relay digital outputs test voltage 2 5 kV rms 1 minute Cable specifications See section Control terminals table on page 24 Control cables General recommendations Use multi core cables with a braided copper wire shield temperature rated at 60 C 140 F or above Double shielded Single shielded Example JAMAK by Draka NK Cables Example NOMAK by Draka NK Cables For digital and analog I O cables twist the shield together into a bundle pig tail not longer than five times its width and connect it to terminal X1 1 at the drive end Leave the other end of the cable shield unconnected For connecting the shield wires of the RS485 cable see the instructions and notes in section Mechanical and electrical
305. o stop 2 CONST SP 7 Displays an alarm 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 3 LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds Note When either of the two external control locations are active and start stop and or direction are through the control panel 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 8 KEYPAD the drive follows speed frequency reference according to the configuration of the external control locations instead of the value of the last speed or parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the control panel communication is lost 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 Defines the External Fault 1 signal input and the drive response to an external fault O NOT SEL External fault signal is not used 1 Di1 Defines digital input DIT as the external fault input Activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXT FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input See DI1 above 1 DI INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the external fault input e De activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXT FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 I
306. o the following Par 0134 Binary RO6 RO5 RO4 ROS RO2 RO1 0 000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 000001 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 000010 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 000011 0 0 0 0 1 1 4 000100 0 0 0 1 0 0 63 111111 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 De energize relay 1 Energize relay 36 COMM 1 Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication e Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1 relay 6 according to the following Par 0134 Binary RO6 RO5 RO4 RO3 RO2 RO1 0o 00000 1 77 11111111 1 000001 1 1 1 1 1 0 2 000010 1 1 1 1 0 1 3 000011 1 1 1 1 0 0 4 000100 1 1 1 0 1 1 63 111111 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 De energize relay 1 Energize relay 37 TIMED FUNC 1 Energize relay when Timed Function 1 is active See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 38 40 TIMED FUNC 2 4 Energize relay when Timed Function 2 4 is active See TIMED FUNC 1 above 41 MNT TRIG FAN Energize relay when cooling fan counter is triggered See Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 42 MNT TRIG REV Energize relay when revolutions counter is triggered See Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 43 MNT TRIG RUN Energize relay when run time counter is triggered See Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 44 MNT TRIG MWH Energize relay when MWh counter is triggered See Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 46 START DELAY Energize relay when a start delay is active 47 USER LOAD C Energize relay when a user load curve fault or alarm occurs 52 JOG ACTIVE Energize relay when
307. ochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI2 Free Not allowed DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI4 DI6 Free 1 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DIS First PFC Relay DI4 First PFC Relay DI4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 2 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DIS First PFC Relay DI4 First PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 3 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DIS First PFC Relay DI4 First PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI5 Third PFC Relay DI6 Third PFC Relay DI6 Free 4 Not allowed DI1 DI2 Free DIS First PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI5 Third PFC Relay DI6 Fourth PFC Relay 5 6 Not allowed Not allowed 4 DI4 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI4 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on e the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC e the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI3 Free Not allowed DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI5 DI6 Free 1 DI1 DI3 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI4 First PFC Relay DI5 First PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 2 D
308. of the module 7 X00301 3 Open the appropriate knockout in the conduit box and i install the cable clamp for the network cable peo 4 Route the network cable through the cable clamp li T 5 Connect the network cable to the module s network connector 6 Tighten the cable clamp 7 Install the conduit box cover 1 screw 8 For configuration information see the following x00302 e section Communication set up FBA on page 213 e section Activate drive control functions FBA on page 213 The protocol specific documentation provided with the module Fieldbus adapter ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 213 Communication set up FBA Serial communication selection To activate the serial communication use parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL Set 9802 4 EXT FBA Serial communication configuration Setting 9802 together with mounting a particular FBA module automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined in the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Parameter 5101 is automatically configured Parameters 5102 5126 are protocol dependent and define for example the profile used and additional I O words These parameters are referred to as the fieldbus configuration parameters See the user s manual provided with the FBA module for details on the fieldbus configuration parameters Parameter 5127 forces th
309. ollows the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives Note The 600 V ACQ550 U1 drives are not CE approved Compliance with the EMC Directive The Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment used within the European Union The EMC product standard IEC EN 61800 3 2004 covers requirements stated for drives Compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 2004 See page 281 C Tick marking The drive carries C Tick marking Technical data 280 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual C Tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand A C Tick mark is attached to the drive to verify compliance with the relevant standard IEC 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods mandated by the Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme The Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme EMCS was introduced by the Australian Communication Authority ACA and the Radio Spectrum Management Group RSM of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development NZMED in November 2001 The aim of the scheme is to protect the radio frequency spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical electronic products Compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 2004 See page 287 UL CSA markings Wu LISTED An UL mark is attached to ACQ550 drives to verify that the drive follows the provisions of UL 5
310. oltage controller is active Check for and correct Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply Insufficient deceleration time parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Undervoltage controller is active Check for and correct Undervoltage on mains 2004 DIR LOCK The change in direction being attempted is not allowed Either Do not attempt to change the direction of motor rotation or Change parameter 1003 DIRECTION to allow direction change if reverse operation is safe 2005 10 COMM Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct Fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Communication settings Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE or Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL as appropriate e Poor connections and or noise on line 2006 Al1 LOSS Analog input 1 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check Input source and connections Parameter that sets the minimum 3021 Parameter that sets the alarm fault operation 3001 Diagnostics ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 239 Alarm code Display Description 2007 Al2 LOSS Analog input 2 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check Input source and connections Parameter that sets the minimum 3022 Parameter that sets the alarm fault operation 3001 2008 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either e Drive
311. on generator RFG output and changes the drive state to OPERATING The drive accelerates to the given reference and follows the reference Embedded fieldbus ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 205 The state diagram below describes the start stop function of CONTROL WORD CW and STATUS WORD SW bits for the ABB Drives profile From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off OFF3 CW Bit2 0 Fault OFF2 CW Bit1 0 OFF3 OFF2 FAULT SW Bit3 1 W Bit SW Bit5 0 ACTIVE ACTIVE SW Bit4 0 0 1 0 L L SWITCH ON From any state OFF1 CW Bit0 0 TR OFF1 SW Bit1 0 ACTIVE n f 0 I 0 Power ON A BCD CW Bit3 0 OPERATION SW Bit2 0 INHIBITED OPERATION INHIBITED L B C D CW Bit4 0 gt C D A CW Bit5 0 gt KEY State D mm State change CW Bit6 0 B waa Path described in example CW CONTROL WORD SW STATUS WORD RFG Ramp Function Generator Param 0104 CURRENT f Param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ n Speed Indicates the features not in ABB DRV LIM This state transition also occurs if the fault is reset from any other source e g digital input CW Bit7 1 UN CW Bit0 0 NOT READY aa TO SWITCH on SW Bit0 0 CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x110 READY TO SW Bit0 1 SWITCH ON CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x111 READY TO OPERATE wet CW Bit3 1 and EM Bit12 1 OPERATION ENABLED SW Bit2 1 CW xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111 i e Bit 4
312. on uses three PT100 sensors Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 4 PTC Sensor configuration uses one PTC The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature rises over the PTC reference temperature Tye as does the voltage over the resistor The temperature measurement Excessive function reads the voltage through analog input Alt and converts it into ohms The table below and the graph show typical PTC sensor resistance as a function of the motor operating temperature Temperature Resistance Normal Normal 1 5 kohm Excessive gt 4 kohm 5 THERM O Sensor configuration uses a thermistor e Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect either a PTC sensor or a normally closed thermistor relay to a digital input e When the digital input is 0 the motor is overheated See the connection figure on page 135 The table below and the graph show the resistance requirements for a PTC sensor connected between 24 V and a digital input as a function of the motor operating temperature Temperature Resistance Normal 3 kohm Excessive 28 kohm 6 THERM 1 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect a normally open thermistor relay to a digital input When the digital input is 1 t
313. onforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS400 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conforms to 32 bit DCU Profile 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS600 800 Note After any changes to the communication settings the protocol must be reactivated by either cycling the drive power or by clearing and then restoring the station Id 5302 Embedded fieldbus ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 181 Activate drive control functions EFB Controlling the drive Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sections describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function For the protocol specific details see the document supplied with the FBA module Start Stop Direction control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction control of the drive requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol reference Drive parameter Value Description ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 COMM Start Stop by fieldbus
314. ontact the factory or your local ABB representative Safety ACS550 U1 User s Manual 7 Table of contents List of related manuals Safety Use of warnings and notes nsanu sasa 5 Table of contents Installation Installation flow Cham sacs aaa seen DS ane ws ds dde 11 Preparing for installation 44 268 cd ede baw ner ann ada EG See dae as avd 12 nstallinGune Orive lt raie iaa eiaa eea a aa APA Epa 16 Start up control with I O and ID Run How to start up the drive 0 0 0 eee 33 How to control the drive through the I O interface 39 How to perform the ID Run 40 Control panel W WW control panel features aaae e 43 W WW control panel modes 0 ee es 44 Application macros ABB 2 Wire Macro ciutat Qu RE TURAE 58 WI MATO ia oec er bedstead a DAN tee RE Rau Ta i 59 Alternate Macro 2a ka dar Ta DIN eee de 60 Motor Potentiometer macro seen 61 Hand sAuto macro csl eu een ade ht wee ka x EN ee aaa hes 62 PID Gontrolmacto 2 ss e cette duret s e ed bt 63 PEGIMACTO waaa ka BAONG id lod er edu eu ek 64 Connection examples of two wire and three wire sensors 65 User parameter sets 000 eens 66 Macro default values for parameters 0 eee eee 67 Parameters Complete parameter list 1 2 2 0 00 eee eee 69 Complete parameter descriptions 0 0 0 0 AA 83 Embedded fieldbus OVEIVICW cce soap Eg S E
315. op 2 RAMP Selects using a deceleration ramp e Deceleration ramp is defined by 2203 DECELER TIME 1 or 2206 DECELER TIME 2 whichever is active 2103 2104 DC MAGN TIME Defines the pre magnetizing time for the DC Magnetizing start mode Use parameter 2101 to select the start mode After the start command the drive pre magnetizes the motor for the time defined here and then starts the motor Set the pre magnetizing time just long enough to allow full motor magnetization Too long a time heats the motor excessively Selects whether DC current is used for braking or DC Hold speed gt ka kag O NOT SEL Disables the DC current operation 1 DC HOLD Enables the DC Hold function See the diagram A T e Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED Stops generating sinusoidal current and injects DC into the motor when both the reference and the motor speed drop below the value of parameter Ref4 2105 e When the reference rises above the level of parameter 2105 the drive DC hol resumes normal operation old Ns T 2 DC BRAKING Enables the DC Injection Braking after modulation has speed sk stopped f parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 1 COAST braking is applied after start is removed f parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 2 RAMP braking is applied after ramp Parameters 114 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 2105 DC HOLD SPEED
316. or situation e report the situation as an alarm e report the situation as a fault Red Faults The drive signals that it has detected a severe error or fault by e enabling the red LED on the drive LED is either steady on or blinking showing the steady red status LED on the control panel if attached to the drive setting an appropriate bit in a Fault Word parameter 0305 to 0307 overriding the control panel display with the display of a fault code in the Fault mode stopping the motor if it was on The fault code on the control panel display is temporary Pressing any of the following keys removes the fault message MENU ENTER UP or DOWN key The message reappears after a few seconds if the control panel is not touched and the fault is still active Diagnostics 232 Correcting faults Flashing green Alarms ACQ550 U1 User s Manual For less severe errors called alarms the diagnostic display is advisory For these situations the drive is simply reporting that it had detected something unusual In these situations the drive e flashes the green LED on the drive does not apply to alarms that arise from control panel operation errors e flashes the green LED on the control panel if attached to the drive e sets an appropriate bit in an Alarm Word parameter 0308 or 0309 See Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS on page 89 for the bit definitions overrides the control panel display with the displ
317. os change a group of parameters to new predefined values Use macros to minimize the need for manual editing of parameters Selecting a macro sets all other parameters to their default values except e Group 99 START UP DATA parameters except parameter 9904 e 1602 PARAMETER LOCK e 1607 PARAM SAVE 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME e 9802 COMM PROT SEL e Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters e Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG parameters After selecting a macro you can make additional parameter changes manually with the control panel You enable application macros by setting the value for parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO By default 6 PID CONTROL is the enabled macro The following sections describe each of the application macros and provide a connection example for each macro The last section in this chapter Macro default values for parameters lists the parameters that the macros change and the default values established by each macro Application macros 58 ABB 2 wire macro ACQ550 U1 User s Manual This is the default macro It provides a general purpose 2 wire I O configuration with three 3 constant speeds Parameter values are the default values defined in section Complete parameter list on page 69 Connection example
318. ost 10 COMM A11 8 COMM VALUE 1 AI Setpoint is input reference 2 Drive parameter Value Description 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC O NOT SEL Set for appropriate drive 1 FAULT response 2 CONST SP7 3 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss Feedback from the drive FBA Inputs to the controller drive outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol This feedback does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of feedback data For a complete listing see all parameters listed in section Complete parameter descriptions on page 83 0102 Drive parameter SPEED Protocol reference 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 0104 CURRENT 0105 TORQUE 0106 POWER 0107 0109 DC BUS VOLTAGE OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 0 STOP 0301 0118 FB CMD WORD 1 bit DI 1 3 STATUS bit O 2 REV DI3 Scali ng To scale the drive parameter values see the following sections as appropriate e Actual Value scaling on page 229 Generic profile technical data Actual Value scaling on page 227 ABB Drives profile technical data Fieldbus adapter ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Diagnostics FBA Fault handling The ACQ550 provides fault information as follows 217 e The control panel display shows a fault code and text
319. osure fan replacement 00 00 cece eee eens 244 Capacitors ica aa Gas ES 245 CONTOLDaNel zuo acm S docu HL SCR eb d ex mus A RU a dlc 245 Technical data Ratings e rrr 247 Input power connections o occoococo rs 251 Motor connections viii UR RUE RECTOR dae Eee RED 259 Brake components o 265 Control CONNACHIONS soo careta oe nied ras POOP GRAS OS BAGA LA 269 el gate oc eee orate DELAS ae 270 eo ia M 271 Dimensions and weights 220 c eee eee 273 Degrees of protection siat o RR gai este A MAM pa KAG KA 276 Ambient conditions tees 276 Materials 3c eR ene Ra RR RR TR Mh aad Gagne Akg awe ORTUS 277 Applicable standards 00 c cee lens 279 GE Marking maaya bia A By bas len es May wed dd KA 279 CATGKINANKING s aus see poets senta bie gees doe 3 esa Goa 279 UL CSA markings ccoo ere o EE 280 IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions cece eee 281 Compliance with the IEC EN 61800 3 2004 000 aaa 281 Table of contents ACS550 U1 User s Manual Index Further information Product and service inquiries 0 0000 eee 295 Product training daria dra dali 295 Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals o oo oooooooooooo 295 Document library on the Internet 0 ee 295 Table of contents 10 ACS550 U1 User s Manual Table of contents ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Installation 11
320. oun J 2 Tie shield wires together at the drive Do NOT See Note 4 Reference terminate at SCR Common 3 Terminate the shield ONLY at the Ground terminal in the controller 4 Terminate the AGND wire at the Reference terminal in the controller Controller e For configuration information see the following sections Communication set up EFB on page 179 Activate drive control functions EFB on page 181 The appropriate EFB protocol specific technical data For example Modbus protocol technical data on page 189 Communication set up EFB Serial communication selection To activate the serial communication set parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 1 STD MODBUS Note If you cannot see the desired selection on the panel your drive does not have that protocol software in the application memory Embedded fieldbus 180 Serial communication configuration ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Setting 9802 automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined below In particular note that the station Id may require adjustment Protocol reference Code Description Modbus 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Do not edit Any non zero value entered Contains the identification and program revision of for parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL the proto
321. oup 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS parameters 10 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either Drive is in local control mode the control panel displays LOC or OFF or Drive is in remote control mode AUTO and is parameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check Communication lines and connections Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Parameters in Group 10 START STOP DIR and Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT if drive operation is AUTO 11 ID RUN FAIL The Motor ID Run was not completed successfully Check for and correct Motor connections Motor parameters 9905 9909 Diagnostics 234 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Fault Fault name in ar A ode panel Description and recommended corrective action 12 MOTOR STALL Motor or process stall Motor is operating in the stall region Check for and correct Excessive load Insufficient motor power Parameters 3010 3012 13 RESERVED Not used 14 EXT FAULT 1 Digital input defined to report first external fault is active See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 15 EXT FAULT 2 Digital input defined to report second external fault is active See parameter 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 16 EARTH FAULT Possible ground fault detected in the motor or motor cables The drive monitors for ground faults while the drive is running and while the drive is not running
322. ower given in the table the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current Also note that e the ratings apply for ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F e the maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1 5 Pha If the limit is exceeded motor torque and current are automatically restricted The function protects the input bridge of the drive against overload In multimotor systems the output current of the drive must be equal to or greater than the calculated sum of the input currents of all motors Technical data 250 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Derating The load capacity current and power decreases for certain situations as defined below In such situations where full motor power is required oversize the drive so that the derated value provides sufficient capacity For example if your application requires 15 4 A of motor current and a 8 kHz switching frequency calculate the appropriate drive size requirement as follows The minimum size required 15 4 A 0 80 19 25 A Where 0 80 is the derating for 8 kHz switching frequency see section Switching frequency derating on page 250 Referring to l n in the ratings tables starting from page 247 the following drives exceed the lon requirement of 19 25 A ACQ550 x1 023A 4 or ACQ550 x1 024A 2 Temperature derating In the temperature range 40 C 50 C 104 F 122 F the rated output current is decreased 1 for
323. pm 2 REF2 1 1 REF1 Hz rpm 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 6 12 1 O EXT1 Y 1103 REF1 SELECT 0 17 20 21 1 1 A11 Y 1104 REF1 MIN 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 0 Hz 0 rpm 1105 REF1 MAX 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm U1 60 0 62 0 Hz 1800 rpm 1106 REF2 SELECT 0 17 19 21 1 19 PID10UT Y 1107 REF2 MIN 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque 0 196 0 0 1108 REF2 MAX 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque 0 1 100 0 Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 14 19 1 9 DI3 4 Y 1202 CONST SPEED 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm U1 6 0 Hz 360 rpm 1203 CONST SPEED 2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm U1 12 0 Hz 720 rpm 1204 CONST SPEED 3 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm Ut 18 0 Hz 1080 rpm Parameters 72 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User 1205 CONST SPEED 4 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm U1 24 0 Hz 1440 rpm 1206 CONST SPEED 5 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm Ul 30 0 Hz 1800 rpm 1207 CONST SPEED 6 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm Ul 48 0 Hz 2880 rpm 1208 CONST SPEED 7 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm Ul 60 0 Hz 3600 rpm 1209 TIMED MODE SEL 1 EXT CS1 2 8 2 cs1 2 3 4 1 2 cs1 2 3 4 Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS 1
324. query data field is not an allowable value for the ACQ550 because it is one of the following Outside min or max limits Parameter is read only Message is too long Parameter write not allowed when start is active Parameter write not allowed when factory macro is selected Embedded fieldbus ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 197 ABB control profiles technical data Overview ABB Drives profile The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple protocols including Modbus and the protocols available on the FBA module Two implementations of the ABB Drives profile are available ABB DRV FULL This implementation standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and ACS800 drives ABB DRV LIM This implementation standardizes the control interface with ACS400 drives This implementation does not support two control word bits supported by ABB DRV FULL Except as noted the following ABB Drives Profile descriptions apply to both implementations DCU profile The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits It is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The fieldbus master station sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive The drive switches between states according to the bit coded instructions in the CONT
325. r config file revision parameter fault function parameter fault time parameter fieldbus appl program revision parameter fieldbus CPI firmware revision parameter fieldbus parameter refresh parameter fieldbus parameters fieldbus status parameter fieldbus type parameter protocol select parameter relay output word data parameter status words data parameters values data parameter feedback multiplier PID parameter on ABB manuals 0a select PID parameter field weakening poiMt fieldbus see EFB embedded fieldbus see EFB drive parameters see FBA fieldbus adapter see FBA drive parameters fieldbus adapter see FBA see FBA drive parameters fieldbus embedded see EFB see EFB drive parameters firmware version parameter first environment C2 compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 C2 motor cable length definition flange mounting saasaa auaa 287 floating network see IT system flux braking parameter 121 flux optimization parameter 121 force trip fault code 235 frame errors count parameter 158 frame S ZE coords a a ii 247 free fall stress testing 277 frequency at fault histor
326. r 2606 12 kHz O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 2619 DC STABILIZER Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer The DC stabilizer is used in scalar control mode to prevent possible voltage oscillations in the drive DC bus caused by motor load or weak supply network In case of voltage variation the drive tunes the frequency reference to stabilize the DC bus voltage and therefore the load torque oscillation O DISABLE Disables DC stabilizer 1 ENABLE Enables DC stabilizer 2625 OVERMODULATION Possibility to disable overmodulation Writing disable here will improve the behavior in certain applications in field weakening area Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 123 Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG This group contains usage levels and trigger points When usage reaches the set trigger point a notice displayed on the control panel signals that maintenance is due Code 2901 Description COOLING FAN TRIG Sets the trigger point for the drive s cooling fan counter e Value is compared to parameter 2902 value 0 0 Disables the trigger 2902 COOLING FAN ACT Defines the actual value of the drive s cooling fan counter When parameter 2901 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2901 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 Resets the parameter 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG Sets the trigger po
327. r example to convert a Group 01 OPERATING DATA parameter such as 0102 SPEED in P 3407 i rpm to the speed of a conveyor driven by the motor in ft min For such a conversion the source values in the figure are the min and max motor speed and the display values are the corresponding min Display value and max conveyor speed Use parameter 3405 to select the proper P 3406 units for the display Note Selecting units does not convert values Parameter is not pr effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT P3402 P 3403 3403 ISIGNAL1 MAX Source vale Defines the maximum expected value for the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 3404 value Displa Range Defines the decimal point location for the first display parameter Bey 9 f 0 3 32768 32767 0 7 Defines the decimal point location Signed Enter the number of digits desired to the right of the decimal 1 91 9 point 2 3 14 See the table for an example using pi 3 14159 3 t 3 142 8 BAR METER Specifies a bar meter display 4 3 0 65535 9 DIRECT Decimal point location and units of measure are 5 3 1 Unsigned identical to the source signal See Group 01 OPERATING DATA 6 3 14 parameter listing in section Complete parameter list on page 69 7 3 122 for resolution which indicates th
328. rameters O NOT SEL Disables selection the first ramp pair is used 1 Di1 Defines digital input DIT as the control for ramp pair selection e Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 e De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection e See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 10 of the Command Word 1 as the control for ramp pair selection e The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication e The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection e De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 e Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection e See DI1 INV above 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 max Li Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 1 See A in FREQ ied the figure e Actual acceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 e See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2203 DECELER TIME 1 gt B 0 Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 1 gt T e Actual deceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 e See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ sid 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 east cune Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 1 See B in the figure Shape is defined
329. rol panel 43 specifications control connections 269 input power nnne 251 MAINS s ete nh kaaa P RES naa NAG 251 Index 292 speed and direction signed data parameter 85 at fault history parameter 91 data parameter 2 2005 85 max limit parameter 110 min limit parameter 110 speed control parameter group 118 acceleration compensation parameter 119 automatic tuning parameter 118 119 derivation time parameter 118 integration time parameter 118 proportional gain parameter 118 vector speed mode 83 speed constant parameter group ssl 97 digital input selection parameter 97 parameters se sleeps 98 stall frequency fault parameter 126 function fault parameter 126 Te o PEDEM 126 time fault parameter 126 Standards sss duse Ee dee ade S eee 279 C22 2 No 14 eeii e e a ia e 279 CE makings e nen e eee eee 279 CSA marking 0c ai a 280 C Tick marking 000000 279 EN 50178 oto em al PARANG 279 IEC 60664 1 ooo 279 IEC EN 60204 1 2 2a 279 IEC EN 60529 222 a aA T 279 IEC EN 61000 3 12 aa 279 IEC EN 61800 3 2 2a 279 IEC EN 61800 5 1 aaa 279 ETA AA AT S be Ta 279 UL marking 0
330. rt the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated prior to the pulse in DI1 e Start Reverse command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI2 In order to start the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated during the pulse in DI2 Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel e Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DIS Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 6 DI6 Two wire Start Stop e Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DIG activated Start DI6 de activated Stop Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FORWARD 7 DI6 5 Two wire Start Stop Direction e Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DIG activated Start DI6 de activated Stop Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI5 DI5 activated Reverse de activated Forward 8 KEYPAD Control Panel e Start Stop and Direction commands are through the control panel when EXT1 is active e Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 9 DI1F 2R Start Stop Direction commands through DI1 and DI2 combinations Start forward DI1 activated and DI2 de activated Start reverse DI1 de activated and DI2 activated e Stop both DI1 and DI2 activated or both de activated e Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 10 COMM As
331. runs O 9 Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper shield into a bundle pig tail 10 Connect the ground shield bundle pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at the drive end 11 Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See section Control terminals table on page 24 Use a tightening torque of 0 4 N m 0 3 Ib ft 12 Install the conduit gland box cover 1 screw IP2005 Installation ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Wiring IP54 UL type 12 enclosure with cables 1 10 Cut the cable seals as needed for the power motor and control cables The cable seals are cone shaped rubber seals on the bottom of the drive The conical part of the seals must face downwards when the seals are inserted in the lead through plate holes On the input power cable strip the sheathing back far enough to route individual wires On the motor cable strip the sheathing back far enough to expose the copper wire shield so that the shield can be twisted into a bundle pig tail Keep the bundle not longer than five times its width to minimize noise radiation 360 grounding under the clamp is recommended for the motor cable to minimize noise radiation In this case remove the sheathing at the cable clamp Route both cables through the clamps and tighten the clamps Strip and connect the power motor wires and the power ground wire to the drive termina
332. s switched off e Replaces the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL Applies only until the output of the regulated motor increases by an amount equal to the output of the switched off auxiliary motor Then the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies O NOT SEL AUX 4 0 1 1800 Activates this function using the value motor 8125 entered as the acceleration time 1 Loft DEC IN AUX START 0 Sets the PFC deceleration time for a maximum to zero e A speed regulated motor accelerating using Group 22 frequency ramp This PFC deceleration ramp ACCEL DECEL parameters 2202 or 2205 Applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary B speed regulated motor decelerating using Group motor is switched on 22 ACCEL DECEL parameters 2203 or 2206 e Replaces the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 e At aux motor start speed regulated motor decelerates ACCEL DECEL using 8125 DEC IN AUX START Applies only until the output of the regulated motor e At aux motor stop speed regulated motor accelerates decreases by an amount equal to the output of the using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP auxiliary motor Then the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies O NOT SEL 0 1 1800 Activates this function using the value entered as the deceleration time 8126 8127 TIMED AUTOCHNG Sets the autochange using a Timed function See parameter 8119 AUTO
333. signs the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start stop and direction commands Bits 0 1 2 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the start stop and direction commands See Fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 93 Code Description 11 TIMED FUNC 1 Assigns Start Stop control to Timed Function 1 Timed Function activated START Timed Function de activated STOP See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 12 14 TIMED FUNC 2 4 Assigns Start Stop control to Timed Function 2 4 See TIMED FUNC 1 above 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS Defines external control location 2 EXT2 the configuration of start stop and direction commands See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS above 1003 DIRECTION Defines the control of motor rotation direction 1 FORWARD Rotation is fixed in the forward direction 2 REVERSE Rotation is fixed in the reverse direction 3 REQUEST Rotation direction can be changed on command 1004 JOGGING SEL Defines the signal that activates the jogging function Jogging uses Constant Speed 7 parameter 1208 for speed reference and ramp pair 2 parameters 2205 and 2206 for accelerating and decelerating When the jogging activation signal is lost the drive uses ramp stop to decelerate to zero speed even if coast stop is used in normal operation parameter 2102 The jogging status can be parameterized to
334. splayed on the panel 0 0 Resets the parameter Parameters 124 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS This group defines situations that the drive should recognize as potential faults and defines how the drive should respond if the fault is detected Code Description 3001 AI MIN FUNCTION Defines the drive response if the analog input Al signal drops below the fault limits and Al is used as the active reference source Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT as the Process or External PID controllers feedback or setpoint source Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 or Group 42 EXT TRIM PID and the corresponding PID controller is active 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT set the fault limits O NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 7 Al1 LOSS or 8 Al2 LOSS and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP 7 Displays an alarm 2006 Al1 Loss or 2007 AI2 LOSS and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 3 LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2006 Al1 LOSS or 2007 AI2 LOSS and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the analog input signal is lost 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Defines the drive response to a control panel communication error 1 FAULT Displays a fault 10 PANEL LOSS and the drive coasts t
335. starting of the motor does not cause any danger De couple the driven machine if there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation or e an ID Run can be performed during the drive start up ID Run is essential only in applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy POWER UP Apply input power Select MENU to enter the main menu O Select the Parameters mode with keys 4 3 lt w gt and select ENTER to select the Parameters mode O Select the Start Up Data group with keys lt a Cv gt and select SEL Select the application macro parameter 9902 with keys a5 cw Select EDIT to change the parameter value The default value 6 PID CONTROL is suitable in most cases for pumping O Press keys anv to change the parameter value O Select SAVE to store the modified value or select CANCEL to leave the set mode Any modifications not saved are cancelled Start up control with I O and ID Run 36 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Select EXIT to return to the listing of parameter groups Select the motor control mode parameter 9904 with keys CASH Select EDIT to change the parameter value 1 or 2 VECTOR SPEED is available 3 SCALAR FREQ is the default recommended in most cases e for multimotor drives when the number of the motors connected to the drive is variable e when the nominal current of the
336. stem TN S system Technical data 256 IT systems ACQ550 U1 User s Manual WARNING Do not attempt to install or remove the EMC filter screws EM1 EMG F1 or F2 while power is applied to the drive s input terminals For IT systems an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohm power system e Disconnect the ground connection to the internal EMC filter see section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 23 e Where EMC requirements exist check for excessive emission propagated to neighboring low voltage networks In some cases the natural suppression in transformers and cables is sufficient If in doubt use a supply transformer with static screening between the primary and secondary windings e Do NOT install an external RFI EMC filter Using an EMC filter grounds the input power through the filter capacitors which could be dangerous and could damage the drive Drive s power connection terminals The following table provides specifications for the drive s power connection terminals U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 Earthing PE terminal Frame BRK UDC terminals e Minimum Maximum Tightening Maximum Tightening wire size wire size torque wire size torque mm AWG mm AWG N m lb ft mm AWG N m lb ft R1 0 75 18 16 1 8 1 16 6 1 8 1 Ra 0 75 18 16 1 3 1 16 6 1 3 1 R3 2 5 14 25 27 B 25 3 27 B R4 10 8 50 1 0 56 4 50 110 56 l4 R5 16 6 70 2 0
337. t Oxxxx Mapping Modbus coils The drive maps the following information to the Oxxxx Modbus set called Modbus Coils e bit wise map of the CONTROL WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 coils are reserved for this purpose Embedded fieldbus ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 191 e relay output states numbered sequentially beginning with coil 00033 The following table summarizes the Oxxxx reference set Modbus Internal location ABB DRV LIM DCU PROFILE ABB DRV FULL ref all profiles 5305 0 5305 1 5305 2 00001 CONTROL WORD Bit 0 OFF1 STOP OFF1 00002 CONTROL woRD Bit 1 OFF2 START OFP2 00003 CONTROL woRD Bit2 OFF3 REVERSE orr3 00004 CONTROL WORD Bit 3 START LOCAL START 00005 CONTROL WORD Bit 4 N A RESET RAMP OUT ZERO 00006 CONTROL WORD Bit5 RAMP HOLD EXT2 RAMP HOLD 00007 CONTROL WORD Bit6 RAMP IN ZERO RUN DISABLE RAMP IN ZERO 00008 CONTROL WORD Bit7 RESET STPMODE R RESET 00009 CONTROL WORD Bit 8 N A STPMODE EM N A 00010 CONTROL WORD Bit 9 N A STPMODE C N A 00011 CONTROL WORD Bit 10 N A RAMP_2 REMOTE_CMD 00012 CONTROL WORD Bit 11 EXT2 RAMP OUT O EXT2 00013 CONTROL WORD Bit 12 N A RAMP HOLD N A 00014 CONTROL WORD Bit 13 N A RAMP IN O N A 00015 CONTROL WORD Bit 14 N A REQ LOCALLOCK N A 00016 CONTROL WORD Bit 15
338. t Correspondence with the obsolete underload supervision The now obsolete parameter 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE provided five selectable curves shown in the figure The parameter characteristics were as described below e Iftheload drops below the 7 set curve for longer than O cuenca the time set by parameter 80 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME J obsolete the underload protection is activated POE Curves 1 3 reach maximum at the motor 40 4 rated frequency set by E parameter 9907 MOTOR 20 NOM FREQ e Ty nominaltorqueofthe 5 Lf T motor A 2 4 fy fy nominal frequency of the motor If you want to emulate the behavior of an old underload curve with parameters as in the shaded columns set the new parameters as in the white columns in the two tables below Obsolete parameters New parameters Underload supervision with 3013 3014 3701 3702 3703 parameters 3013 3015 obsolete UNDERLOAD UNDERLOAD USER LOAD USER LOAD USER LOAD FUNCTION TIME C MODE C FUNC C TIME No underload functionality 0 0 Underload curve fault generated 1 t 1 1 t Underload curve alarm generated 2 t 1 2 2 t Parameters 144 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Obs par New parameters 3015 3704 3705 3707 3708 3710 3711 3713 3714 3716 3717 UNDER LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD FREQ1 TORQ FREQ2 TORQ FREQ3 TORQ FREQ4 TORQ FREQ
339. t the Start up Assistant is stopped and the display goes to the Output mode After completing a set up task the Start up Assistant defaults to application macro PID control Press lt when is highlighted to continue with the suggested task Press key v to highlight and then press X to move to the following task without doing the suggested task EXIT Press r7 to stop the Start up Assistant SAVING A USER PARAMETER SET AND FINAL CHECK 7 The start up is now completed However it might be useful at this stage to set the parameters required by your application and save the settings as a user parameter set as instructed in section User parameter sets on page 66 After the whole set up is completed check there are no faults or alarms shown on the display and the panel LED is green and does not blink The drive is now ready for use Start up control with I O and ID Run ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 35 How to perform the limited start up Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand SAFETY procedure The start up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician The safety instructions given in chapter Safety must be followed during the start up The drive will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on Check the installation See the checklist in chapter nstallation page 31 Check that the
340. t 2 gt Al 0 10 V Constant speed selection DI3 4 Relay output 1 Ready 9 y JAl2 0 4 20 mA Ramp pair 1 2 selection DI5 e Relay output 2 Running or Run enable DI6 Relay output 3 Fault 1 J1 Nm o Alt 0 10 V 107 Al2 0 4 20 mA Application macros ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 61 Motor Potentiometer macro This macro provides a cost effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the motor using only digital signals To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 4 MOTOR POT Connection example x1 A SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 Al Not used 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 Al2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common DH H7 A01 Motor output speed 0 20 mA KD 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA 79 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 4112 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start stop Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 Forward reverse Activation reverses rotation direction 15 DI3 Reference up Activation increases the reference 16 DI4 Reference down Activation decreases the reference 17 DI5 Constant speed 1 1202 7 18 DI6 Run enable Deactivation
341. t AO2 Current Q Al 0 10V Constant speed selection DI3 4 Relay output 1 Ready 2 gt Al2 0 4 20 mA Ramp pair 1 of 2 selection DI5 Relay output 2 Running or e Relay output 3 Fault 1 v1 A Al1 0 10 V n 2127 Al2 0 4 20 mA Application macros ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 3 wire macro 59 This macro is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push buttons It provides three 3 constant speeds To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 2 3 WIRE Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the control panel start stop buttons are disabled Connection example X1 1 10kohm 41 SCR Signal cable shield screen 142 Al External speed reference 1 0 10 V KO 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 Al2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common lt TH 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA lt D 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA t 119 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24v Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common ane DCOM Digital input common for all 213 DI Start Momentary activation with DI2 activated starts the drive 14 DI2 Stop Momentary deactivation stops the drive 15 DI3 Fwd R
342. t Speeds 1 3 using DI2 and DI3 See above DI1 2 for code 9 DI3 4 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 and DI4 See above DI1 2 for code 10 DI4 5 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using D14 and DI5 See above DI1 2 for code 11 DI5 6 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI5 and DI6 See above DI1 2 for code 12 DI1 2 3 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI1 DI2 and DI3 e Uses three digital inputs as defined below O DI de activated 1 DI activated g N DIS Function No constant speed Constant speed 1 1202 Constant speed 2 1203 Constant speed 3 1204 Constant speed 4 1205 Constant speed 5 1206 Constant speed 6 1207 Constant speed 7 1208 alo l ol of a o O mah ol O o o ol ol ol o Parameters 98 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 13 DI3 4 5 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI3 DI4 and DI5 See above DI1 2 3 for code 14 DI4 5 6 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI4 DI5 and DI6 See above DI1 2 3 for code 15 18 TIMED FUNC 1 4 Selects Constant Speed 1 Constant Speed 2 or the external reference depending on the state of the Timed Function 1 4 and constant speed mode See parameter 1209 TIMED MODE SEL and Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 19
343. t for appropriate drive response 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss Embedded fieldbus ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Feedback from the drive EFB Pre defined feedback Inputs to the controller drive outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol This feedback does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of feedback data For a complete listing see input word point object listings in the technical data for the appropriate protocol starting on page 189 185 Drive parameter Modbus protocol reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0102 SPEED 40102 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 40103 0104 CURRENT 40104 0105 TORQUE 40105 0106 POWER 40106 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 40107 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 40109 0301 FB CMD WORD bit O STOP 40301 bit 0 0301 FB CMD WORD1 1 bit 2 REV 40301 bit 2 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS bit O DI3 40118 Note With Modbus any parameter can be accessed using the format 4 followed by the parameter number Actual value scaling The scaling of actual values can be protocol dependent In general for Actual Values scale the feedback integer using the parameter s resolution See section Complete parameter list on page 69 for parameter resolutions For example Feedback Parameter integer resolution Feedback integer Parameter resolution Scale
344. t mode 0105 TORQUE Output torque Calculated value of torque on motor shaft in of motor nominal torque Shown by default in the control panel Output mode 0106 POWER The measured motor power in kW 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE The DC bus voltage in V DC as measured by the ACQ550 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE The voltage applied to the motor 0110 DRIVE TEMP The temperature of the drive power transistors in degrees Celsius 0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 External reference REF1 in rpm or Hz units determined by parameter 9904 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 External reference REF2 in 0113 CTRL LOCATION Active control location Alternatives are O LOCAL 1 ExT1 2 EXT2 0114 RUN TIME R The drive s accumulated running time in hours h Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode 0115 KWH COUNTER R The drive s accumulated power consumption in kilowatt hours The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0 Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT Application block output signal Value is from either PFC control if PFC Control is active or Parameter 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 Parameters 86 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS Status of the three digital inputs
345. t parameter definitions 1401 1403 and motors motor motors 1410 1412 establish the initial motor sequence The lowest MAX T parameter number with a value 31 PFC identifies the relay connected to 1PFC the first motor and so on Initially 1PFC speed regulated motor 2PFC 1st auxiliary motor etc e The first autochange shifts the sequence to 2PFC speed regulated motor 3PFC 1st auxiliary motor 1PFC last auxiliary motor Area e The next autochange shifts the sequence again and so on Autochange e f the autochange cannot start a needed motor because all is allowed PID output inactive motors are interlocked the drive displays an alarm P 8119 n 2015 PFC I LOCK When ACQ550 power supply is switched off the counter preserves the current Autochange rotation positions in permanent memory When power is restored the Autochange rotation starts at the position stored in memory e Ifthe PFC relay configuration is changed or if the PFC enable value is changed the rotation is reset See the first bullet above Parameters 170 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 8120 INTERLOCKS Defines operation of the Interlock function When the Interlock function is enabled An interlock is active when its command signal is absent e An interlock is inactive when its command signal is present e The ACQ550 will not start if a start command occurs when th
346. te a 53 Index ACQ550 U1 User s Manual timed functions parameter group 138 autochange parameter 175 booster parameter 140 enable parameter 139 source parameter 140 speed control aa 99 start time parameter 139 stop time parameter 139 timed mode parameter 99 TN S system occ 255 AA Sedem Ep dA 14 top cover see hood torque at fault history parameter 91 boost current parameter 114 data parameter 2200005 85 max limit select parameter 111 max limit parameter 112 min limit select parameter 111 min limit parameters 111 torque control vector torque mode 83 TAININGs cis pA NAL ed RR EU SUR 295 trim mode PID parameter 154 scale PID parameter 154 two wire sensor transmitter connection example 65 type code see type designation type designation 12 13 U U f ratio parameter 2 0 0 0 eee eee 121 UL CSA markings eee 280 underload curve see user load curve undervoltage automatic reset parameter 128 control enable parameter 110 ungrounded network see IT system units PID parameter 147 un
347. te 4X Registers Communication profiles When communicating by Modbus the ACQ550 supports multiple profiles for control and status information Parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE selects the profile used ABB DRV LIM The primary and default profile is the ABB DRV LIM profile This implementation of the ABB Drives profile standardizes the control interface with ACS400 drives The ABB Drives profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface It is discussed in detail in the following sections DCU PROFILE The DCU PROFILE profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits It is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment ABB DRV FULL ABB DRV FULL is the implementation of the ABB Drives profile that standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and ACS800 drives This implementation supports two control word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM implementation Modbus addressing With Modbus each function code implies access to a specific Modbus reference set Thus the leading digit is not included in the address field of a Modbus message Note The ACQ550 supports the zero based addressing of the Modbus specification Holding register 40002 is addressed as 0001 in a Modbus message Similarly coil 33 is addressed as 0032 in a Modbus message Refer again to the Mapping summary above The following sections describe in detail the mapping to each Modbus reference se
348. temperatures and drive loads Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan bearings and the gradual rise in the heatsink temperature in spite of heatsink cleaning If the drive is operated in a critical part of a process fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms start appearing Replacement fans are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts Frame sizes R1 R4 2 Remove drive cover Remove power from the drive To replace the fan For frame size R1 R2 Press together the retaining clips on the fan cover sides and lift e R3 R4 Press in on the lever located on the left side of the fan mount and rotate the fan up and out Disconnect the fan cable 5 Reinstall the fan in reverse order X0021 6 Restore power Frame size R5 AP E S N To replace the fan Remove power from drive Remove the screws attaching the fan Remove the fan Swing the fan out on its hinges Disconnect the fan cable Reinstall the fan in reverse order Restore power Arrows in the fan show the directions of the rotation and air flow Maintenance ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 243 Frame size R6 To replace the fan 1 Remove power from the drive 2 Remove the screw attaching the fan casin
349. ters as well as command status and reference values Diagnostics 0x08 Perform Modbus diagnostics Subcodes for Query 0x00 Restart 0x01 amp Listen Only 0x04 are supported Force Multiple Coils OxOF Write multiple discrete outputs For the ACQ550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Multiple 0x10 Write multiple holding registers For the ACQ550 the entire Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Write Multiple 0x17 This function combines functions 0x03 and 0x10 into a single command Embedded fieldbus 190 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Mapping summary The following table summarizes the mapping between the ACQ550 parameters and 1 0 and Modbus reference space For details see Modbus addressing below ACQ550 Modbus reference Supported function codes e Control Bits Coils Oxxxx 01 Read Coil Status Relay Outputs e 05 Force Single Coil 15 Force Multiple Coils Status Bits Discrete Inputs 1xxxx e 02 Read Input Status Discrete Inputs Analog Inputs Input Registers 3xxxxx 04 Read Input Registers Parameters Holding Registers 4xxxx 03 Read 4X Registers e Control Status Words 06 Preset Single 4X Register References 16 Preset Multiple 4X Registers e 23 Read Wri
350. the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used e See DH INV above 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL Defines control of the selection between two maximum torque limits 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 and 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 O MAX TORQUE 1 Selects 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 as the maximum limit used 1 Di1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value De activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used e See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input di1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value De activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used e See DI INV above 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 Sets the first minimum limit for torque Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque 2016 MIN TORQUE
351. the download is not appropriate for the target drive Some examples A download to an old drive specifies parameters values that are not available on the old drive A download from an old drive to a new drive does not have definitions for the new parameters parameters that did not originally exist A download can include an illegal value for the target drive e g a backup from a small drive can have a switching frequency of 12 kHz whereas a big drive can only handle 8k Hz As a default the control panel handles these situations by e Discarding parameters values not available on the target drive LOC G DIFFERENCES VALUES UNDER MIN 3 e Using parameter default values when the VALUES OVER MAX 5 download provides no values or invalid values INVALID VALUES 4 Providing a Differences List A listing of the EXTRA PARS 5 type and number of items that the target cannot MISSING VALUES 7 accept exactly as specified READY SEL You can either accept the default edits by pressing READY or view and edit each item as follows Highlight an item type in the Differences List left screen below and press SEL to see the details for the selected type right screen below LOC DIFFERENCES LOC G INVALID VAL VALUES UNDER MIN 3 9902 APLIC MACRO VALUES OVER MAX 2 2606 SWITCHING FREQ INVALID VALUES 1 a Z EXTRA PARS 5 3401 DISP 1 SEL MISSING VALUES 7 READY SEL EXIT EDIT In the above
352. the process error value changes linearly the derivative is a constant added to the PID controller output The error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter The time constant of the filter is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0 Derivation time seconds t t HP RUM D part of controller output Gain P 4001 t P 4003 4004 PID DERIV FILTER Defines the filter time constant for the error derivative part of the PID controller output Before being added to the PID controller output the error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter Increasing the filter time smooths the error derivative reducing noise 0 0 10 0 Filter time constant seconds 4005 ERROR VALUE INV Selects either a normal or inverted relationship between the feedback signal and the drive speed 0 NO Normal a decrease in feedback signal increases drive speed Error Ref Fok 1 YES Inverted a decrease in feedback signal decreases drive speed Error Fbk Ref 4006 UNITS Selects the unit for the PID controller actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 and 0132 See parameter 3405 for list of available units 4007 UNIT SCALE Defines the decimal point location in PID controller actual values EI0 Yang Entry pispiay e Enter the decimal point location counting in from the right end of the 0 00003 3 entry 1 00031 3 1 See the table for an example usi
353. the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 and REF2 Note fieldbus references are bipolar that is they can be positive or negative ABB Drives profile Parameter Value setting Al reference scaling 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD Max ref Fieldbus reference Max ref 163 100 Resultant ref 100 163 1003 DIRECTION 2 REVERSE Max ref Fieldbus reference Max ref 163 Resultant ref 163 100 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Max ref Fieldbus reference Max ref 163 100 Resultant ref 100 163 Embedded fieldbus ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 209 Fieldbus adapter Overview The ACQ550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard serial communication protocols When using serial communication the ACQ550 can either receive all of its control information from the fieldbus or e be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available control locations such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel Connect using either e Standard embedded fieldbus EFB at e fieldbus adapter FBA module mounted Fieldbus controller Fieldbus Other devices terminals X1 28 32 deor in slot 2
354. tive Case A Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER Initially the relay is de energized It is energized whenever the supervised parameter goes above the active limit Case B Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER Initially the relay is energized It is de energized whenever the supervised parameter goes below the active limit 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above LO sHI Note Case LO lt HI represents a normal hysteresis Value of s aes parameter HI 3203 LO 3202 Case A Energized 1 0 Case B Energized 1 0 LO gt HI Note Case LO gt HI represents a special hysteresis with two separate supervision limits Value of supervised parameter LO 3202 HI 3203 Case A Case B Energized 1 0 A A Energized 1 i TE Me oh a A Active limit LL LL 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM Selects the second supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI Sets t
355. tive difference This keeps feedback values at or above the setpoint Controller does not react to the situation of feedback above setpoint if another zone s feedback is closer to its setpoint 13 2 ZONE MAX The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and feedback 2 The drive will control the zone and select the set that has a smaller difference A negative difference a setpoint lower than the feedback is always smaller than a positive difference This keeps feedback values at or below the setpoint Controller does not react to the situation of feedback below setpoint if another zone s feedback is closer to its setpoint 14 2 ZONE AVE The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and feedback 2 In addition it calculates the average of the deviations and uses it to control zone 1 Therefore one feedback is kept above its setpoint and another is kept as much below its setpoint 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for PID Set selection e Activating the digital input selects PID Set 1 e De activating the digital input selects PID Set 2 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID Set selection e See DI1 INV above Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 153 Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Parameters of this group belong to PID para
356. to a bundle pig tail Route control cable s through clamp s and tighten clamp s Connect the ground shield bundle pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at the drive end Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See section Control terminals table on page 24 Use a tightening torque of 0 4 N m 0 3 Ib ft Install the conduit gland box cover 1 screw 27 X0004 Frame size R1 R2 1 4 X0005 X0006 IP2003 Installation 28 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Wiring IP21 UL type 1 enclosure with conduit 1 Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduit gland box See section Conduit Gland kit on page 19 2 Install thin wall conduit clamps not supplied 3 Install conduit gland box 4 Connect conduit runs to box 5 Route input power and motor wiring through conduits must be separate conduit runs 6 Strip wires 7 Connect power motor and ground wires to the drive terminals See the table on the right for tightening torques 1P2004 Note For R6 frame size refer to section Power Frame Tightening torque terminal considerations R6 frame size on page size Nm lb ft 257 R1 R2 1 4 1 R3 2 5 1 8 RA X 5 6 PE 2 4PE15 R5 15 11 R6 40 PE 8 30 PE 6 8 Route the control cable through the conduit must be zem separate from input power and motor conduit
357. to avoid the danger The warning symbols are used as follows Electricity warning warns of hazards from electricity which can cause physical injury and or damage to the equipment General warning warns about conditions other than those caused by electricity which can result in physical injury and or damage to the equipment WARNING The ACQ550 adjustable speed AC drive should ONLY be installed by a qualified electrician WARNING Even when the motor is stopped dangerous voltage is present at the power circuit terminals U1 V1 W1 and U2 V2 W2 and depending on the frame size UDC and UDC or BRK and BRK WARNING Dangerous voltage is present when input power is connected After disconnecting the supply wait at least 5 minutes to let the intermediate circuit capacitors discharge before removing the cover WARNING Even when power is switched off from the input terminals of the ACQ550 there may be dangerous voltage from external sources on the terminals of the relay outputs RO1 RO3 WARNING When the control terminals of two or more drives are connected in parallel the auxiliary voltage for these control connections must be taken from a single source which can either be one of the drives or an external supply Safety gt gt P bb ACQ550 U1 User s Manual WARNING Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on an IT system an ungrounded power system or a high r
358. tors for an improper connection between the drive input power and the drive output Check for and correct Proper input wiring line voltage is NOT connected to drive output e The fault can be erroneously declared if the input power is a delta grounded system and motor cable capacitance is large This fault can be disabled using parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT 36 INCOMPATIBLE The drive cannot use the software Sw Internal fault The loaded software is not compatible with the drive Call support representative 37 CB OVERTEMP Drive control board is overheated The fault trip limit is 88 C Check for and correct Excessive ambient temperature Fan failure e Obstructions in the air flow 38 USER LOAD Condition defined by parameter 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid CURVE longer than the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 101 SYSTEM ERROR Error internal to the drive Contact your local ABB representative and report 199 the error number 201 SYSTEM ERROR Error in the system Contact your local ABB representative and report the 299 error number UNKNOWN Wrong type of panel i e panel that supports drive X but not the ACQ550 DRIVE TYPE has been connected to the ACQ550 ACQ550 SUPPORTED DRIVES X 235 Diagnostics 236 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Faults that indicate conflicts in the parameter settings are listed below Fault code Fault name in panel Description and r
359. trol parameter group 164 acceleration time parameter 175 aux start order parameter 175 aux motor start delay parameter 166 aux motor stop delay parameter 166 deceleration time parameter 175 enable parameter 174 low frequency parameters 166 e A ee Pe wy Seow ioe NER MR EHE 64 number of aux motors parameter 167 number of motors parameter 175 reference step parameters 164 start delay parameter 174 start frequency parameters 165 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual PID process sets parameter groups 145 external trimming parameter group 154 0 actual signal parameter 148 100 actual signal parameter 148 actual input select parameters 150 actual value max parameters 150 actual value min parameters 150 adjustment procedure 146 comm value 1 data parameter 87 comm value 2 data parameter 87 control macro aa 63 correction source parameter 155 decimal point actual signal parameter 147 derivation filter parameter 147 derivation time parameter 147 deviation data parameter 86 error feedback inversion parameter 147 external source activate parameter 154 feedback multiplier par
360. ts the minimum content value P1505 1 Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 P 1511 l e Minimum value refers to the minimum content value that will be l converted to an analog output e These parameters content and current min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the output See the l figure P 1504 1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX P 1510 l AO CONTENT Sets the maximum content value P 1502 1508 i e Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 P 1503 1509 e Maximum value refers to the maximum content value that will P 1505 al AO mA be converted to an analog output P 1511 1504 MINIMUM AO1 Sets the minimum output current 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 Sets the maximum output current 1506 FILTER AO1 yon A E y Defines the filter time constant for A01 AO CONTENT e The filt ignal h of a step ch ithin the ti e n signal reaches 63 of a step change within the time i P 1502 1508 e P 1503 1509 e See the figure in parameter 1303 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL Defines the content for analog output A02 See AO1 CONTENT SEL above 1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Sets the minimum content value See AO1 CONTENT MIN above 1509 AO2 CONTENT MAX Sets the maximum content value See AO1 CONTENT MAX above 1510 MINIMUM AO2 Sets the minimum output current See MINIMUM A01 above Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 105 Code Description 1511 MAXIMUM AO2 Sets the maximum output current See MAXIMUM A01
361. ue 50 of reference value C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value 50 of reference value B value C B C value 5096 of reference value B value Where e C Main reference value COMM for values 9 10 and All for values 14 17 e B Correcting reference 2 A for values 9 10 and AI2 for values 14 17 Example The figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where C 25 P 4012 SETPOINT MIN O P 4013 SETPOINT MAX 0 B varies along the horizontal axis Parameters 96 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 1104 REF1 MIN A Ext ref Sets the minimum for external reference 1 e The minimum analog input signal as a percent of the full signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF1 MIN in P1105 Hz rpm MAX e Parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analog input signal e These parameters reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference P 1104 Analog 1105 REF1 MAX MIN input signal Sets the maximum for external reference 1 P 1301 P 1302 e The maximum analog input signal as a percent of full or 1304 or 1305 the signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF1 MAX in Hz rpm Ext ref e Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets A the maximum analog input signal P 1104 MIN P 1105
362. ue from which the percentage distribution is calculated Representation and default value depends on the signal selected with parameter 6404 AL2 SIGNAL 6406 PEAK VALUE Detected peak value of the signal selected with parameter 6401 PVL SIGNAL 6407 PEAK TIME 1 Date of the peak value detection Format Date if the real time clock is operating dd mm yy The number of days elapsed after the power on if the real time clock is not used or was not set xx d 6408 PEAK TIME 2 Time of the peak value detection Format hours minutes seconds Parameters 162 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 6409 CURRENT AT PEAK Current at the moment of the peak value amperes 6410 UDC AT PEAK DC voltage at the moment of the peak value volts 6411 FREQ AT PEAK Output frequency at the moment of the peak value herzes 6412 TIME OF RESET 1 Last reset date of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2 Format Date if the real time clock is operating dd mm yy The number of days elapsed after the power on if the real time clock is not used or was not set xx d 6413 TIME OF RESET 2 Last reset time of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2 e Format hours minutes seconds 6414 6415 AL1RANGEOTO10 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current 5n 0 10 distribution ALTRANGE10TO20 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current l n 10
363. ugs are required in the holes provided for access to the drive mounting slots 1P2002 1 As required for access remove the rubber plugs Push plugs out from the back of the drive 2 R5 amp R6 Align the sheet metal hood not shown in front of the drive s top mounting holes Attach as part of next step 1 3 Position the ACQ550 onto the mounting screws or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners Note Lift the ACQ550 by its metal chassis frame size R6 by the lifting holes on both sides at the top 4 Reinstall the rubber plugs 5 Non English speaking locations Add a warning sticker in the appropriate language over the existing warning on the top of the module Installation ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 19 Wiring overview Conduit Gland kit Wiring drives with the IP21 UL type 1 enclosure requires a conduit gland kit with the following items e conduit gland box e screws cover The kit is included with IP21 UL type 1 enclosures Wiring requirements A WARNING Ensure the motor is compatible for use with the ACQ550 The drive must be installed by a competent person in accordance with the considerations defined in section Preparing for installation on page 12 If in doubt contact your local ABB sales or service office As you install the wiring observe the following e There are four sets of wiring instructions one set for
364. uired by safety regulations Power cable shields must be connected to the drive PE terminal in order to meet safety regulations Power cable shields are suitable for use as equipment grounding conductors only when the shield conductors are adequately sized as required by safety regulations n multiple drive installations do not connect drive terminals in series Corner grounded TN systems A WARNING Do not attempt to install or remove the EMC filter screws EM1 EM3 F1 or F2 while power is applied to the drive s input terminals Corner grounded TN systems are defined in the following table In such systems disconnect the internal ground connection through the EMC filter capacitors do this also if the grounding configuration of the system is unknown see section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 23 Corner grounded TN systems EMC filter must be disconnected Grounded at the L1 Grounded at the L1 corner of the mid point of a delta delta leg IL B L2 L3 L3 Single phase L1 Three phase L1 grounded at an Variac without end point solidly grounded neutral The EMC filter capacitors make an internal ground connection that reduces electro magnetic emission Where EMC electro magnetic compatibility is a concern and the system is symmetrically grounded the EMC filter may be connected For reference the diagram on the right illustrates a symmetrically grounded TN sy
365. ult gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Two analog references Al1 2 Analog output AO1 Speed Ji Start stop hand auto D11 6 e Analog output AO2 Current 2 gt Alt 0 10 V Direction hand auto DI2 5 e Relay output 1 Ready L 9 gt gt JAl2 0 4 20 mA Control location selection DI3 e Relay output 2 Running or Run enable DIA Relay output 3 Fault 1 J1 m o Al1 0 10 V n 217 Al2 0 4 20 mA Application macros ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 63 PID Control macro This macro provides parameter settings for closed loop control systems such as pressure control flow control etc To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 6 PID CONTROL Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF Connection example x1 1 10 kom 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 Al External ref 1 Manual or Ext ref 2 PID 0 10 V Ko 3 AGND Analog input circuit common Note 1 3 4 tov Reference voltage 10 Vie Manual 0 10V gt speed reference D gt 5 AI2 Actual signal PID 4 20 mA pip 0 10V gt 0 100 PID 6 AGND Analog input circuit common setpoint DH H7 A01 Motor output speed 0 20 mA ro 8 A
366. um value of the analog input e See MAXIMUM Al1 above 1306 FILTER Al2 Defines the filter time constant for analog input 2 A12 e See FILTER AI1 above Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 101 Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS This group defines the condition that activates each of the relay outputs Relay outputs 4 6 are only available if OREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module is installed Code Description 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 1 what relay output 1 means O NOT SEL Relay is not used and is de energized 1 READY Energize relay when drive is ready to function Requires e Run enable signal present e No faults exist Supply voltage is within range Emergency Stop command is not on 2 RUN Energize relay when the drive is running 3 FAULT 1 Energize relay when power is applied De energizes when a fault occurs 4 FAULT Energize relay when a fault is active 5 ALARM Energize relay when an alarm is active 6 REVERSED Energize relay when motor rotates in reverse direction 7 STARTED Energize relay when drive receives a start command even if Run Enable signal is not present De energized relay when drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs 8 SUPRV1 OVER Energize relay when first supervised parameter 3201 exceeds the limit 3203 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 129 9
367. undervoltage function on or off O DISABLE Disables automatic reset ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault DC UNDERVOLT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3107 AR AI MIN Sets the automatic reset for the analog input less than minimum value function on or off O DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset e Automatically resets the fault Al lt MIN after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation WARNING When the analog input signal is restored the drive may restart even after a long stop Make sure that automatic long delayed starts will not cause physical injury and or damage equipment 3108 AR EXTERNAL FLT Sets the automatic reset for external faults function on or off O DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault EXT FAULT 1 Or EXT FAULT 2 after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Group 32 SUPERVISION 129 This group defines supervision for up to three signals from Group 01 OPERATING DATA Supervision monitors a specified parameter and energizes a relay output if the parameter passes a defined limit Use Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS to define the relay and whether the relay activates when the signal is too low or too high
368. ure A Normal B Inversion ACT1 MINIMUM gt ACT1 P 4018 MAXIMUM 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM Sets the maximum value for ACT1 e See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM BANDA A E E 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM Sets the minimum value for ACT2 SSUrcE IN Source m5 E e See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM Y i ove MaR 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM i eae Sets the maximum value for ACT2 e See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 4022 SLEEP SELECTION Defines the control for the PID sleep function O NOT SEL Disables the PID sleep control function 1 DI1 Defines digital input DIT as the control for the PID sleep function Activating the digital input activates the sleep function De activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function See DI1 above 7 INTERNAL Defines the output rpm frequency process reference and process actual value as the control for the PID sleep function Refer to parameters 4025 WAKE UP DEV and 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function De activating the digital input activates the sleep function Activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function e See DI INV above Parameters ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 151 than
369. urve see user load curve overspeed fault code 234 overvoltage control enable parameter 110 P panel communication parameter group 158 panel display variables parameter group 132 panel loss fault code 233 Index 290 parameter analog input scale fault code 236 analog output scale fault code 236 change lOCK cen cas sa saire taraa oo 106 descripti0NS oooooocooooooo 83 external relay output fault code 236 fieldbus fault code 236 hz rpm fault code 236 listing ranges resolutions defaults 69 PCU 1 power control unit fault code 236 PCU 2 power control unit fault code 236 PFC IO fault code 236 237 PFC mode fault code 236 PFC ref neg fault code 236 restore ACQ panel 04 49 save changes 00 e eee eae 107 table version parameter 131 user load curve fault code 237 parameters View changes 000 eee eee 48 parity RS 232 parameter 158 errors count parameter 158 PE earth earth fault parameter 126 PE earth connection terminal size 0 eee ee 256 torque ios e e a a a 256 peak value logging see load analyzer PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage 25 PFC con
370. us Speed 100 par 9908 Final reference limited by specific 0z 1104 1105 100 par 9908 Actual motor speed limited by 2001 2002 speed Frequency 100 par 9907 Final reference limited by 0 1104 1105 100 par 9907 Actual motor speed limited by 2007 2008 frequency Actual Values As described earlier in section Control interface on page 210 Actual Values are words containing drive values Fieldbus adapter ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Actual Value scaling 229 For Actual Values scale the feedback integer using the parameter s resolution See section Complete parameter liston page 69 for parameter resolutions For example Feedback n Feedback integer Parameter resolution integer Parameter resolution Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 2 0 1 mA 10 0 1 10 0 1926 1 Where parameters are in percent the Complete parameter list section specifies what parameter corresponds to 100 In such cases to convert from percent to engineering units multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100 and divide by 100 For example Value of the Feedback integer Parameter resolution pese delete parameter that Value of 100 ref 100 9 defines 100 Scaled Value 10 0 1 1500 rpm 10 0 1 1500 RPM 100 15 rpm 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 50 Hz 1 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actu
371. utochange function does all of the following see the figure APFC Initiates a change when the running time since the last 100 y autochange reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV and PFC input is below limit 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Stops the speed regulated motor Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor Increments the starting order counter to change the starting order for the motors Identifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated motor Switches off the above motor s contactor if the motor was gt P 8122 running Any other running motors are not interrupted PID output A A Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated m P8118 ee P8118 motor The autochange switchgear connects this motor to the ACQ550 power output A Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL e Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFC START DELAY autochange not allowed e Starts the speed regulated motor B Autochange occurs e Identifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation 1PFC etc PID output associated with each motor Switches the above motor on but only if the new speed regulated motor had been running as a constant speed motor This step keeps an equal number of motors running before and after autochange Continues with normal PFC operation Starting order counter Output The operation of the starting order counter frequency No aux tau 2aux e The relay outpu
372. uts numbered sequentially beginning with input 33 The following table summarizes the 1xxxx reference set Modbus Internal location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE ref all profiles 5305 0 oR 2 5305 1 10001 STATUS WORD Bit O RDY_ON READY 10002 STATUS WORD Bit 1 RDY_RUN ENABLED 10003 STATUS WORD Bit 2 RDY_REF STARTED 10004 STATUS WORD Bit 3 TRIPPED RUNNING 10005 STATUS WORD Bit 4 OFF 2 STA ZERO SPEED 10006 STATUS WORD Bit 5 OFF 3 STA ACCELERATE 10007 STATUS WORD Bit 6 SWC ON INHIB DECELERATE 10008 STATUS WORD Bit 7 ALARM AT SETPOINT 10009 STATUS WORD Bit 8 AT SETPOINT LIMIT 10010 STATUS WORD Bit 9 REMOTE SUPERVISION 10011 STATUS WORD Bit 10 ABOVE LIMIT REV REF 10012 STATUS WORD Bit 11 EXT2 REV ACT 10013 STATUS WORD Bit 12 RUN ENABLE PANEL LOCAL 10014 STATUS WORD Bit 13 N A FIELDBUS LOCAL 10015 STATUS WORD Bit 14 N A EXT2 ACT 10016 STATUS WORD Bit 15 N A FAULT 10017 STATUS WORD Bit 16 Reserved ALARM 10018 STATUS WORD Bit 17 Reserved REQ MAINT 10019 STATUS WORD Bit 18 Reserved DIRLOCK 10020 STATUS WORD Bit 19 Reserved LOCALLOCK 10021 STATUS WORD Bit 20 Reserved CTL MODE 10022 STATUS WORD Bit 21 Reserved Reserved 10023 STATUS WORD Bit 22 Reserved Reserved 10024 STATUS WORD Bit 23 Reserved Reserved 10025 STATUS WORD Bit 24 Reserved Reserved 10026 STATUS WORD Bit 25 Reserved Reserved 10027
373. value and for a valid register addresses Note Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile i e modified values are not automatically stored to permanent memory Use parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to save all altered values The AC 550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 4xxxx registers Function code Description 03 Read holding 4xxxx registers 06 Preset single 4xxxx register 16 0x10 Hex Preset multiple 4xxxx registers 23 0x17 Hex Read write 4xxxx registers Embedded fieldbus 196 Actual values ACQ550 U1 User s Manual The contents of the register addresses 40005 40012 are ACTUAL VALUES and are specified using parameters 5310 5317 e Read only values containing information on the operation of the drive e 16 bit words containing a sign bit and a 15 bit integer when negative values written as the two s complement of the corresponding positive value e scaled as described earlier in section Actual value scaling on page 185 Exception codes Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive The ACS550 supports the standard Modbus exception codes defined below Exception code Name Meaning 01 02 ILLEGAL FUNCTION ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS Unsupported Command The data address received in the query is not allowable It is not a defined parameter group 03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE A value contained in the
374. ve construction for example Olflex Servo FD 780 CP Lappkabel or MCCMK NK Cables Insulation jacket Inner insulator L2 Braided metallic shield L3 EN 61800 3 compliant motor cables The most efficient EMC filtering can be achieved by following these rules e Motor cables must have an effective shield as described in section Effective motor cable shields on page 264 e Motor cable shield wires must be twisted together into a bundle pig tail the bundle length must be less than five times its width and connected to the terminal marked at the bottom right hand corner of the drive Atthe motor end the motor cable shield must be earthed 360 degrees with an EMC cable gland or the shield wires must be twisted together into a bundle pig tail not longer than five times its width and connected to the PE terminal of the motor e See section Motor cable length for 400 V drives columns EMC limits on page 260 to check the maximum motor cable lengths and the need for filters for 400 V drives for IEC EN 61800 3 compliance N WARNING Do not use RFI EMC filters on IT systems Technical data ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 265 Brake components Availability Braking availability for ACQ550 drives by frame size is R1 and R2 a built in brake chopper is standard equipment Add appropriate resistor as determined using the following section Resistors are available from ABB R3 R6 does not include an inter
375. ve within the specified time out delay To correct increase the time set by parameter 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Faults 31 33 EFB1 EFB3 The three EFB fault codes listed for the drive in chapter Diagnostics on page 231 fault codes 31 33 are not used Intermittent off line occurrences The problems described above are the most common problems encountered with ACQ550 serial communication Intermittent problems might also be caused by marginally loose connections wear on wires caused by equipment vibrations insufficient grounding and shielding on both the devices and on the communication cables Embedded fieldbus ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 189 Modbus protocol technical data Overview The Modbus protocol was introduced by Modicon Inc for use in control environments featuring Modicon programmable controllers Due to its ease of use and implementation this common PLC language was quickly adopted as a de facto standard for integration of a wide variety of master controllers and slave devices Modbus is a serial asynchronous protocol Transactions are half duplex featuring a single Master controlling one or more Slaves While RS232 can be used for point to point communication between a single Master and a single Slave a more common implementation features a multi drop RS485 network with a single Master controlling multiple Slaves The ACQ550 features RS485 for its Modbus physical interface RTU The Modbus specificat
376. ver and starts again from 0 Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time e See Group 45 ENERGY SAVING Parameters 88 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 Energy saved in local currency remainder when the total saved energy is divided by 1000 See the note on page 156 To find out the total saved energy in currency units add the value of parameter 0177 multiplied by 1000 to the value of parameter 0176 Example 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 123 4 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 5 Total saved energy 5 1000 123 4 5123 4 currency units The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 999 9 the counter does not roll over Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time Local energy price is set with parameter 4502 ENERGY PRICE See Group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 Energy saved in local currency in thousand currency units Eg value 5 means 5000 currency units See the note on page 156 e The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 the counter does not roll over e See parameter 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0178 SAVED CO2 Reduction on carbon dioxide emissions in tn See the note on page 156 e The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 6553 5 the counter does not roll over e Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time CO2
377. which is protocol dependent Protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference 1601 RUN ENABLE 7 comm Run enable by fieldbus 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 COMM Fault reset by fieldbus 1607 PARAM SAVE 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to memory then value returns to 0 Fieldbus adapter ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 215 Relay output control Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied binary coded relay command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Drive parameter Value Description kaaa 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 COMM Relay Output 1 controlled by fieldbus 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 36 COMM 1 Relay Output 2 controlled by fieldbus 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 controlled by fieldbus 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 controlled by fieldbus 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 controlled by fieldbus 14121 RELAY ouTPuT6 Relay Output 6 controlled by fieldbus More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module Note Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below Drive parameter Value Protocol reference 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Relay 1 3 status 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS Relay 4 6 status Analo
378. ws EM1 and EM3 are shown in the diagram on page 21 The locations of screws F1 and F2 are shown in the diagram on page 22 Symmetrically IT systems ungrounded fails Screw grounded TN systems a dal or high resistance TN S systems y grounded gt 30 ohm EM1 x x R1 R3 7 EM3 x e EM1 x x R4 Ema x F1 X X R5 R6 F2 x x x Install the screw EMC filter will be connected Replace the screw with the provided polyamide screw EMC filter will be disconnected Remove the screw EMC filter will be disconnected 1 ACQ550 U1 drives are shipped with screw EM3 already removed Installation 24 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Control terminals table The following provides information for connecting control wiring at X1 on the drive X1 Hardware description 1 SCR Terminal for signal cable shield screen Connected internally to chassis ground 2 All Analog input channel 1 programmable Default frequency reference Resolution 0 1 accuracy 1 Two different DIP switch types can be used J1 Al1 OFF 0 10 V R 312 kohm Q Dl J1 Al ON 0 20 mA R 100 ohm Sh 3 AGND Analog input circuit common connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 Mohm NO NO 10V Potentiometer reference source 10 V 296 max 10 mA 1 kom lt R lt 10 kohm Al2 Analog input channel 2 programmable Defau
379. x motor PFC parameters 166 aux motor delay o ooooooccoo o 166 DC brake time parameter 114 DC current control parameter 113 DC current ref parameter 114 emergency devices 253 emergency select parameter 114 flux braking parameter 121 function parameter 113 Stress tesi AA Res 277 supervision parameter group 000 129 parameter low limit parameters 129 parameter selection parameters 129 supply phase fault code 234 switching frequency 0 e eee ee 259 control parameter 0 122 derating 0c cee eee ee 250 parameter o rgsa eR en 122 symmetrically grounded network see corner grounded TN system symmetrically grounded TN system 255 system controls parameter group 106 T temperature derating 250 template mounting a 16 terminal lugS 0 0 a eee eee 258 terminals control description 24 control specifications 270 location diagram R1 R4 21 location diagram R5 R6 22 termination 179 test date parameter 131 thermal fail fault code 234 three wire sensor transmitter connection example o ocooccocooco o o 65 time amp da
380. y copy of the Status Word 1 Bit 0303 FB STS WORD 1 0304 FB STS WORD 2 The drive sends status information to the fieldbus controller The status OS READY ALARM consists of two Status Words 1 ENABLED NOTICE e The control panel displays the word in 2 STARTED DIRLOCK hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displays as 0001 All zeros anda 3 RUNNING LOCALLOCK 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 4 ZERO_SPEED CTL_MODE 0304 FB STS WORD 2 5 ACCELERATE Reserved Read only copy of the Status Word 2 6 IDECELERATE Reserved e t Speparamielendave 7 AT SETPOINT CPY CTL 8 LIMIT CPY REF1 9 SUPERVISION CPY REF2 10 REV REF REQ CTL 11 REV ACT REQ REF1 12 PANEL LOCAL REQ REF2 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL REQ REF2EXT 14 EXT2 ACT ACK STARTINH 15 FAULT ACK OFF ILCK Parameters 90 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Code Description 0305 FAULT WORD 1 Read only copy of the Fault Word 1 e When a fault is active the corresponding bit for the active fault is set in the Fault Words e Each fault has a dedicated bit allocated within Fault Words e See section Fault listing on page 232 for a description of the faults e The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displays as 0001 All zeros and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 0306 FAULT WORD 2 Read only copy of the Fault Word 2 e See parameter 0305 0307 0308 0309
381. y parameter 91 max limit parameter 111 min limit parameter 111 motor resoluti0N o o 259 motor specification 259 switching parameter 122 fuses 208 240 V drives 0 aaa 252 380 480 V drives 252 500 600 V drives o ooooooooo 253 G gain PID parameter 146 generic profile FBA actual value mapping 229 actual value scaling 229 overview ee 228 reference scaling 228 technical data 000 aa 228 gland kit ee ete a dee edd 19 ground cable wire requirements 255 fault protection 0 0 0 eee eee 262 H hand auto Macro asasan aaaea 62 harmoniCS usce native wae t 279 heat lossin sero etes emp RS 271 hood IP54 UL type 12 17 32 l I O control through 00 ee eae 39 id run fail fault COde ooooooooo o 233 pararnelter z nak Set a 84 performing llle seen 40 identification magnetization 84 IEC ratings See ratings impedance grounded network see IT system incompatible software faultcode 235 information on the Internet 295 information parameter group 131 input power cable wire requirements 254 disconnecting device disconnecting m
382. y the reference 13 DI5U 6D NC Same as DI5U 6D above except that e Changing the control source EXT to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 14 Al1 A12 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 15 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 16 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 17 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 20 KEYPAD RNO Defines the control panel as the reference source A Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 does not copy the reference 21 KEYPAD NC Defines the control panel as the reference source A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 does not copy the reference Analog input reference correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table Value setting Calculation of the Al reference C B C value B val
383. zes R3 and R4 have four holes along the top Use only two If possible use the two outside holes to allow room to remove the fan for maintenance Note ACS400 drives can be replaced using the original mounting holes For R1 and R2 frame sizes the mounting holes are identical For R3 and R4 frame sizes the inside mounting holes on the top of ACQ550 drives match ACS400 mounts Installation ACQ550 U1 User s Manual 17 Remove the front cover IP21 UL type 1 1 Remove the control panel if attached 2 Loosen the captive screw at the top 3 Pull near the top to remove the cover IP2000 IP54 UL type 12 1 If hood is present Remove screws 2 holding hood in place 2 If hood is present Slide hood up and off of the cover 3 Loosen the captive screws around the edge of the cover 4 Remove the cover Installation 18 ACQ550 U1 User s Manual Mount the drive IP21 UL type 1 1 Position the ACQ550 onto the mounting screws or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners Note Lift the ACQ550 by its metal chassis frame size R6 by the lifting holes on both sides at the top 2 Non English speaking locations Add a warning sticker in the appropriate language over the existing warning on the top of the module IP54 UL type 12 For the IP54 UL type 12 enclosures rubber pl
384. zing time This selection guarantees the highest possible break away torque e SCALAR FREQ mode Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time 3 SCALAR FLYST Selects the flying start mode e Vector control modes Not applicable SCALAR FREQ mode The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor useful if the motor is already rotating and if the drive will start smoothly at the current frequency Cannot be used in multimotor systems 4 TORQ BOOST Selects the automatic torque boost mode SCALAR FREQ mode only e May be necessary in drives with high starting torque e Torque boost is only applied at start ending when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when output frequency is equal to reference In the beginning the motor magnetizes within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current e See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR 5 FLY BOOST Selects both the flying start and the torque boost mode SCALAR FREQ mode only e Flying start routine is performed first and the motor is magnetized If the speed is found to be zero the torque boost is done 8 RAMP Immediate start from zero frequency 2102 STOP FUNCTION Selects the motor stop method 1 COAST Selects cutting off the motor power as the stop method The motor coasts to st

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

製品カタログ pdf（733KB）  HP AH728AA#AK9  KitchenAid KFGS530ESS Installation Guide  ZENARD-TR マグネットバックル取扱説明書    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file